Treatment of Services Under Section 482; Allocation of Income and Deductions From Intangibles; Stewardship Expense, 44466-44519 [06-6497]
Download as PDF
44466
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY
Internal Revenue Service
26 CFR Parts 1 and 31
[TD 9278]
RIN 1545–BB31, 1545–AY38, 1545–BC52
Treatment of Services Under Section
482; Allocation of Income and
Deductions From Intangibles;
Stewardship Expense
Internal Revenue Service (IRS),
Treasury.
ACTION: Final and temporary
regulations.
AGENCY:
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
SUMMARY: This document contains final
and temporary regulations that provide
guidance regarding the treatment of
controlled services transactions under
section 482 and the allocation of income
from intangibles, in particular with
respect to contributions by a controlled
party to the value of an intangible
owned by another controlled party. This
document also contains final and
temporary regulations that modify the
regulations under section 861
concerning stewardship expenses to be
consistent with the changes made to the
regulations under section 482. These
final and temporary regulations
potentially affect controlled taxpayers
within the meaning of section 482. They
provide updated guidance necessary to
reflect economic and legal
developments since the issuance of the
current guidance.
DATES: Effective Date: These regulations
are effective on January 1, 2007.
Applicability Dates: These regulations
apply to taxable years beginning after
December 31, 2006.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
Thomas A. Vidano, (202) 435–5265, or
Carol B. Tan, (202) 435–5265 for matters
relating to section 482, or David
Bergkuist (202) 622–3850 for matters
relating to stewardship expenses (not
toll-free numbers).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Background
Section 482 of the Internal Revenue
Code generally provides that the
Secretary may allocate gross income,
deductions and credits between or
among two or more taxpayers owned or
controlled by the same interests in order
to prevent evasion of taxes or to clearly
reflect income of a controlled taxpayer.
Regulations under section 482
published in the Federal Register (33
FR 5849) on April 16, 1968, provided
guidance with respect to a wide range
of controlled transactions, including
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
transfers of tangible and intangible
property and the provision of services.
Revised and updated transfer pricing
regulations were published in the
Federal Register (59 FR 34971, 60 FR
65553 and 61 FR 21955) on July 8, 1994,
December 20, 1995, and May 13, 1996.
A notice of proposed rulemaking and
notice of public hearing were published
in the Federal Register (68 FR 53448) on
September 10, 2003. A correction to the
notice of proposed rulemaking and
notice of public hearing was published
in the Federal Register (68 FR 70214) on
December 17, 2003. A public hearing
was held on January 14, 2004.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
received a substantial volume of
comments on a wide range of issues
addressed in the 2003 proposed
regulations. These comments were very
helpful and substantial changes have
been incorporated in response. In order
to achieve the goal of updating the 1968
regulations, while facilitating
consideration of further public input in
refining final rules, these regulations are
issued in temporary form with a delayed
effective date for taxable years
beginning after December 31, 2006.
These regulations are issued a
significant amount of time after
proposed revisions to the regulations
pertaining to cost sharing arrangements
were issued. Commentators suggested
that this type of timing sequence was
important so that each regulation could
be assessed properly. Commentators
also suggested, among other things, that
the services regulations be reissued in
temporary and proposed form. By
issuing these regulations in temporary
and proposed form, the Treasury
Department and the IRS provide
taxpayers an opportunity to submit
additional comments prior to the time
these regulations become effective,
allowing commentators to consider the
potential interaction between these
regulations and the cost sharing
regulations.
Explanation of Provisions
A. Controlled Services
1. Services Cost Method—Temp. Treas.
Reg. § 1.482–9T(b)
a. The Simplified Cost Based Method
and Public Comments
The 2003 proposed regulations set
forth a simplified cost based method
(SCBM). The SCBM was intended to
preserve the salutary aspects of the
current § 1.482–2(b) cost safe harbor that
provide appropriately reduced
administrative and compliance burdens
for low margin services. At the same
time, the existing rules would be
PO 00000
Frm 00002
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
brought more in line with the arm’s
length standard, and various
problematic features of those rules
would be eliminated. The goal was to
provide certainty concerning the pricing
of low margin services, thus allowing
the compliance efforts of both taxpayers
and the IRS to concentrate on those
services for which a robust transfer
pricing analysis is particularly
appropriate. The preamble to the 2003
proposed regulations also indicated that
in certain cases, the allocation or
sharing among group members of
expenses or charges relating to corporate
headquarters or other centralized
service activities may be consistent with
the proposed regulations, but no further
guidance was provided on such service
sharing arrangements.
A number of commentators argued
that the SCBM was actually
counterproductive to its stated goals.
These commentators contended that to
apply the SCBM, taxpayers would
potentially need to expend substantial
sums to prepare comparability studies,
perhaps separately for each of the
numerous categories of back office
services. They contended that, although
taxpayers have in-depth knowledge
concerning their businesses and the
relative value added by their back
offices, the SCBM called for quantitative
judgments that business people are not
qualified to make by themselves,
especially in the prevailing compliance
environment. As a matter of proper
accountability, taxpayers would be
required as a practical matter to devote
significant compliance resources to
enlist outside consultants or otherwise
to develop support for those judgments.
Commentators suggested a range of
proposed alternatives to the SCBM
regime. One such proposal was simply
to return to the approach in the existing
regulations under § 1.482–2(b). The
1968 regulations are fairly rudimentary
in nature, particularly, in today’s tax
compliance environment. In addition,
those regulations were open to
substantial manipulation by taxpayers
(both inbound and outbound).
Moreover, there have been extensive
and far-reaching developments in the
services economy since the existing
regulations were published in 1968,
with real prospects that many
intragroup services have values
significantly in excess of their cost. As
a result, in the course of considering
comments on the 2003 proposed
regulations, the Treasury Department
and the IRS have concluded that it
would not be appropriate simply to
readopt the standard in the 1968
regulations. Additional proposals by
commentators included development of
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
a list of activities that would qualify to
be priced at cost or detailed provisions
regarding cost sharing arrangements for
low value services performed on a
centralized basis, and other options.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
may have decided not to return to the
1968 regulations, but have nonetheless
taken the full range of comments on the
2003 proposed regulations seriously.
Therefore, in light of the extensive
comments on these issues, the Treasury
Department and the IRS have
substantially redesigned the relevant
provisions. The Treasury Department
and the IRS recognize that the section
482 services regulations potentially
affect a large volume of intragroup back
office services that are common across
many industries. It is in the interest of
good tax administration to minimize the
compliance burdens applicable to such
services, especially to the extent that the
arm’s length markups are low and the
activities do not significantly contribute
to business success or failure.
Accordingly, based on the comments,
these temporary regulations eliminate
the SCBM and replace it with the
services cost method (SCM), as set forth
in § 1.482–9T(b). The SCM evaluates
whether the price for covered services,
as defined, is arm’s length by reference
to the total services costs with no
markup. Where the conditions on
application of the method are met, the
SCM will be considered the best method
for purposes of § 1.482–1(c).
b. Services Cost Method: Identification
of Covered Services and Other
Eligibility Criteria
Section 1.482–9T(b)(4) provides for
two categories of covered services that
are eligible for the SCM if the other
conditions on application of the method
are met. If the conditions are satisfied,
covered services in each category may
be charged at cost with no markup. The
first category consists of specified
covered services identified in a revenue
procedure published by the IRS. This
revenue procedure approach is
consistent with taxpayer comments.
Services will be identified in such
revenue procedure based upon the
determination of the Treasury
Department and the IRS that they
constitute support services of a type
common across industry sectors and
generally do not involve a significant
arm’s length markup on total services
costs. Because the government performs
the analysis necessary to determine the
eligibility of specified covered services,
the compliance burden that was
previously imposed by the SCBM is
eliminated for a broad class of
commonly provided services.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
An initial proposed list of specified
covered services is contained in an
Announcement being published
contemporaneously with these
temporary regulations. This
Announcement will be published in the
Internal Revenue Bulletin. For copies of
the Internal Revenue Bulletin, see
§ 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b). The Treasury
Department and the IRS solicit public
input on whether the list of services
sufficiently covers the full range of back
office services typical within
multinational groups, on the
descriptions provided for these covered
services, and on other matters related to
the Announcement. It is contemplated
that a final revenue procedure,
reflecting appropriate comments, will be
issued to coincide with the effective
date of the temporary regulations for
taxable years beginning after December
31, 2006. In the future, particular
services may be added to, clarified in,
or deleted from the list, depending on
ongoing developments.
The second category of covered
services is certain low margin covered
services. Taxpayers objected to the
requirement under the SCBM that all
services qualify for that method based
on a quantitative analysis, but based on
comments the Treasury Department and
the IRS believe that controlled taxpayers
might nonetheless want the discretion
to show that particular services—not
otherwise covered by the revenue
procedure—qualify for the SCM, using a
modified quantitative approach. Low
margin covered services consist of
services for which the median
comparable arm’s length markup on
total services costs is less than or equal
to seven percent. As under the SCBM,
the median comparable arm’s length
markup on total services costs means
the excess of the arm’s length price of
the controlled services transaction over
total services costs, expressed as a
percentage of total services costs. For
this purpose, the arm’s length price is
determined under the general transfer
pricing rules without regard to the SCM,
using the interquartile range (including
any adjustment to the median in the
case of results outside such range).
Again, if the markup on costs for
eligible services is seven percent or less,
this category of services can be charged
out at cost with no markup.
Under § 1.482–9T(b)(2), specified
covered services or low margin covered
services otherwise eligible for the SCM
will qualify for the method if the
taxpayer reasonably concludes in its
business judgment that the services do
not contribute significantly to key
competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental chances of
PO 00000
Frm 00003
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44467
success or failure in one or more trades
or businesses of the renderer, the
recipient, or both. Unlike the
quantitative judgment called for under
the SCBM, this is a business judgment
preeminently within the business
person’s own expertise. Exact precision
is not needed and it is expected that the
taxpayer’s judgment will be accepted in
most cases. This condition is intended
to focus transfer pricing compliance
resources of both taxpayers and the IRS
principally on significant valuation
issues. Thus, it is anticipated that in
most cases the examination of relevant
services will focus only on verification
of total services costs and their
appropriate allocation. These are issues
even under the 1968 regulations. There
will be little need in all but the most
unusual cases to challenge the
taxpayer’s reasonable business judgment
in concluding that such typical back
office services do not contribute
significantly to fundamental risks of
success or failure. The condition
effectively is reserved to allow the IRS
to reject any attempt to claim that a core
competency of the taxpayer’s business
qualifies as a mere back office service.
For illustrations of the role performed
by this condition, see the contrasting
pairs of Example 1 and Example 2,
Example 3 and Example 4, Example 5
and Example 6, Example 8 and Example
9, Example 10 and Example 11, and
Example 12 and Example 13 in § 1.482–
9T(b)(6).
As indicated in this preamble, it is
expected that in all but unusual cases,
the taxpayer’s business judgment will be
respected. In evaluating the
reasonableness of the taxpayer’s
conclusion, the Commissioner will
consider all the relevant facts and
circumstances. This provision avoids
the need to exclude from the SCM
certain back office services that as a
general matter and across a range of
industry sectors are low margin, but that
in the context of a particular business
nonetheless constitute high margin
services. That is, it permits the Treasury
Department and the IRS to include a
greater range of service categories under
the SCM, even though in specific
circumstances an otherwise covered
service of a particular taxpayer will be
ineligible.
In addition, under § 1.482–9T(b)(3)(i),
a single procedural requirement applies
under the SCM. The taxpayer must
maintain documentation of covered
services costs and their allocation. The
documentation must include a
statement evidencing the taxpayer’s
intention to apply the SCM.
In § 1.482–9T(b)(3)(ii), the SCM
preserves the same list of categories of
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44468
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
controlled transactions that are not
eligible to be priced under the method
as under the SCBM. The Treasury
Department and the IRS continue to
believe that these transactions tend to be
high margin transactions, transactions
for which total services costs constitute
an inappropriate reference point, or
other types of transactions that should
be subject to a more robust arm’s length
analysis under the general section 482
rules. Comments are requested in this
regard in light of the other substantial
changes made in the regulations.
Consistent with the purpose of
providing for appropriately reduced
compliance burdens for services subject
to the SCM, the temporary regulations
retain provisions in § 1.6662–6T(d)(2)
similar to those associated with the
SCBM.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
c. Shared Services Arrangements
Section 1.482–9T(b)(5) of the
temporary regulations provides explicit
guidance on shared services
arrangements (SSAs). In general, an SSA
must include two or more participants;
must include as participants all
controlled taxpayers that benefit from
one or more covered services subject to
the SSA; and must be structured such
that each covered service (or group of
covered services) confers a benefit on at
least one participant. A participant is a
controlled taxpayer that reasonably
anticipates benefits from covered
services subject to the SSA and that
substantially complies with the SSA
requirements.
Under an SSA, the arm’s length
charge to each participant is the portion
of the total costs of the services
otherwise determined under the SCM
that is properly allocated to such
participant under the arrangement. For
purposes of an SSA, two or more
covered services may be aggregated,
provided that the aggregation is
reasonable based on the facts and
circumstances, including whether it
reasonably reflects the relative
magnitude of the benefits that the
participants reasonably anticipate from
the services in question. Such
aggregation may, but need not,
correspond to the aggregation used in
applying other provisions of the SCM. If
the taxpayer reasonably concludes that
the SSA (including any aggregation for
purposes of the SSA) results in an
allocation of the costs of covered
services that provides the most reliable
measure of the participants’ respective
shares of the reasonably anticipated
benefits from those services, then the
Commissioner may not adjust such
allocation basis.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
In addition, as a procedural matter,
the taxpayer must maintain
documentation concerning the SSA,
including a statement that it intends to
apply the SCM under the SSA and
information on the participants, the
allocation basis, and grouping of
services for purposes of the SSA.
Guidance is also provided on the
coordination of cost allocations under
an SSA and cost allocations under a
qualified cost sharing arrangement.
d. Deleted Provisions
The SCM is considerably streamlined
as compared to the SCBM. Upon further
consideration, and in light of public
comments, many of the conditions,
contractual requirements, quantitative
screens, and other technicalities
associated with the SCBM have been
eliminated. The Treasury Department
and the IRS believe this streamlined
approach serves the interests of both the
government and taxpayers by reducing
complexity and administrative burden.
2. Comparable Uncontrolled Services
Price Method—Temp. Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9T(c)
The 2003 proposed regulations set
forth the comparable uncontrolled
services price (CUSP) method. This
method evaluated whether the
consideration in a controlled services
transaction is arm’s length by
comparison to the price charged in a
comparable uncontrolled services
transaction. This method was closely
analogous to the comparable
uncontrolled price (CUP) method in
existing § 1.482–3(b).
One commentator objected to the
statement in § 1.482–9(b)(1) of the 2003
proposed regulations that, to be
evaluated under the CUSP method, a
controlled service ordinarily needed to
be ‘‘identical to or have a high degree
of similarity’’ to the uncontrolled
comparable transactions. The
commentator viewed the comparability
analysis in the examples in proposed
§ 1.482–9(b)(4) as more consistent with
the standard in existing § 1.482–
3(b)(2)(ii)(A). The Treasury Department
and the IRS agree that the comparability
standards under the CUSP method for
services should run parallel to those
under the CUP method for sales of
tangible property. Indeed, the
provisions are parallel. The
commentator misconstrues the purpose
of the quoted provision.
Although the provision contains
general guidance on situations in which
the method ordinarily applies, it is not
intended to and does not alter the
substantive comparability standards.
Just like the CUP method, the standards
PO 00000
Frm 00004
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
under the CUSP method emphasize the
relative similarity of the controlled
services to the uncontrolled transaction
and the presence or absence of
nonroutine intangibles. Section 1.482–
9T(c)(2)(ii) of the temporary regulations
also provides, consistent with the best
method rule, that the CUSP method
generally provides the most direct and
reliable measure of an arm’s length
result if the uncontrolled transaction
either has no differences from the
controlled services transaction or has
only minor differences that have a
definite and reasonably ascertainable
effect on price, and appropriate
adjustments may be made for such
differences. If such adjustments cannot
be made, or if there are more than minor
differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions, the
comparable uncontrolled services price
method may be used, but the reliability
of the results as a measure of the arm’s
length price will be reduced. Further, if
there are material differences for which
reliable adjustments cannot be made,
this method ordinarily will not provide
a reliable measure of an arm’s length
result.
The CUSP provisions in these
temporary regulations are substantially
similar to the corresponding provisions
in the 2003 proposed regulations.
3. Gross Services Margin Method—
Temp. Treas. Reg. § 1.482–9T(d)
The 2003 proposed regulations
provided for a gross services margin
method, which evaluated the amount
charged in a controlled services
transaction by reference to the gross
services profit margin in uncontrolled
transactions that involve similar
services. The method was analogous to
the resale price method for transfers of
tangible property in existing § 1.482–
3(c).
Under the 2003 proposed regulations,
this method would ordinarily be used
where a controlled taxpayer performs
activities in connection with a ‘‘related
uncontrolled transaction’’ between a
member of the controlled group and an
uncontrolled taxpayer. For example, the
method may be used where a controlled
taxpayer renders services to another
member of the controlled group in
connection with a transaction between
that other member and an uncontrolled
party (agent services), or where a
controlled taxpayer contracts to provide
services to an uncontrolled taxpayer and
another member of the controlled group
actually performs the services
(intermediary function).
The 2003 proposed regulations
defined the terms ‘‘related uncontrolled
transaction,’’ ‘‘applicable uncontrolled
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
price,’’ and ‘‘appropriate gross services
profit’’. A ‘‘related uncontrolled
transaction’’ is a transaction between a
member of the controlled group and an
uncontrolled taxpayer for which a
controlled taxpayer performs either
agent services or an intermediary
function. The ‘‘applicable uncontrolled
price’’ is the sales price paid by the
uncontrolled party in the related
uncontrolled transaction. The
‘‘appropriate gross services profit’’ is the
product of the applicable uncontrolled
price and the gross services profit
margin in comparable uncontrolled
services transactions. The gross services
profit margin takes into account all
functions performed by other members
of the controlled group and any other
relevant factors.
One commentator mistakenly
interpreted the term ‘‘related
uncontrolled transaction’’ to suggest
that the comparable transaction under
this method is one that takes place
between controlled parties. While this
was not intended, the Treasury
Department and the IRS agree that the
nomenclature is potentially confusing,
and as a result, these regulations
substitute the term ‘‘relevant
uncontrolled transaction’’ in lieu of
‘‘related uncontrolled transaction’’
wherever that appeared. In other
respects, the gross services margin
provisions in these temporary
regulations are substantially similar to
the provisions in the 2003 proposed
regulations.
4. Cost of Services Plus Method—Temp.
Treas. Reg. § 1.482–9T(e)
The 2003 proposed regulations set
forth the cost of services plus method.
This method evaluated the amount
charged in a controlled services
transaction by reference to the gross
services profit markup in comparable
uncontrolled services transactions. The
gross services profit is determined by
reference to the markup as a percentage
of comparable transactional costs in
comparable uncontrolled transactions.
This method would ordinarily apply
where the renderer of controlled
services provides the same or similar
services to both controlled and
uncontrolled parties. In general, those
are the only circumstances in which a
controlled taxpayer would likely have
the detailed information concerning
comparable transactional costs
necessary to apply this method reliably.
The cost of services plus method in
the 2003 proposed regulations was
generally analogous to the cost plus
method for transfers of tangible property
in existing § 1.482–3(d). The method
implicitly recognized that financial
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
accounting standards applicable to
services have not developed to the same
degree as the standards applicable to
other categories of transactions, such as
manufacturing or distribution of
tangible property. For that reason, the
method adopted the concept of
‘‘comparable transactional costs,’’ which
the 2003 proposed regulations defined
as all costs of providing the services
taken into account in determining the
gross services profit markup in
comparable uncontrolled services
transactions. In this context, comparable
uncontrolled transactions could be
either services transactions between the
controlled taxpayer and uncontrolled
parties (internal comparables), or
services transactions between two
uncontrolled parties (external
comparables).
The 2003 proposed regulations also
recognized that comparable
transactional costs could be a subset of
total services costs. Generally accepted
accounting principles (GAAP) or
Federal income tax accounting rules (if
income tax data for comparable
uncontrolled transactions are available)
could provide an appropriate platform
for analysis under this provision, but
neither is necessarily conclusive.
Commentators objected that the
concept of comparable transactional
costs was imprecise, and they suggested
that such costs should in any event
include only the direct costs associated
with providing a particular service, as
determined under GAAP or Federal
income tax accounting rules. As noted
above, the financial accounting
standards for services transactions are
not as precise as the standards
applicable to other types of transactions.
The relative lack of uniformity in turn
makes it impractical to derive a single
definition of cost that would apply
generally to controlled services
transactions.
Comparable transactional costs may
potentially include direct and indirect
costs, if such costs are included in the
internal or external uncontrolled
transactions that form the basis for
comparison. Section 1.482–9T(e)(4)
Example 1 has been modified to clarify
this concept.
Several commentators objected to
§ 1.482–9(d)(3)(ii)(A) of the 2003
proposed regulations. In their view, this
provision required the results obtained
under the cost of services plus method
to be confirmed by means of a separate
analysis under the comparable profits
method (CPM) for services. If a
confirming analysis under the CPM for
services were required in all cases,
commentators reasoned, the cost of
services plus method could not be
PO 00000
Frm 00005
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44469
viewed as a specified method in its own
right.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
agree and clarify that the intent of the
rules is not to require confirmation of
the results under the cost of services
plus method. In response to public
comments, § 1.482–9T(e)(3)(ii)(A) of
these temporary regulations
incorporates several changes. First,
restatement of the price under this
method in the form of a markup on total
costs of the controlled taxpayer is
necessary only if the cost of services
plus method utilizes external
comparables. If internal comparables are
used, this calculation need not be
performed. Second, in situations where
the price is restated, the sole purpose is
to determine whether it is necessary to
perform additional evaluation of
functional comparability.
For example, if the price under the
cost of services plus method, when
restated, indicates a markup on the
renderer’s total services costs that is
either low or negative, this may indicate
differences in functions that have not
been accounted for under the traditional
comparability factors. A low or negative
markup suggests the need for additional
inquiry, the outcome of which may
suggest that the cost of services plus
method is not the most reliable measure
of an arm’s length result under the best
method rule. Conforming changes have
been made in § 1.482–9T(e)(4) Example
3 of these temporary regulations.
5. Comparable Profits Method for
Services—Temp. Treas. Reg. § 1.482–
9T(f)
The 2003 proposed regulations
provided for a Comparable Profits
Method (CPM) for services, which was
similar to the CPM in existing § 1.482–
5. In general, the CPM for services
evaluated whether the amount charged
in a controlled services transaction is
arm’s length by reference to objective
measures of profitability (profit level
indicators or PLIs) derived from
financial information regarding
uncontrolled taxpayers that engage in
similar services transactions under
similar circumstances. The CPM for
services applied only where the
renderer of controlled services is the
tested party.
Section 1.482–9(e) of the 2003
proposed regulations provided that the
profit level indicators (PLIs) provided
for in existing § 1.482–5(b)(4)(ii) may
also be used under the CPM for services.
The relative lack of uniformity in
financial accounting standards for
services, combined with potentially
incomplete information regarding the
cost accounting practices of the
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
44470
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
uncontrolled comparables, strongly
suggest that PLIs that require accurate
segmentation of costs may have limited
reliability.
The 2003 proposed regulations stated
that the degree of consistency in
accounting practices between the
controlled services transaction and the
uncontrolled services transaction might
affect the reliability of the results under
the CPM for services. If appropriate
adjustments to account for such
differences are not possible, the
reliability of the results under this
method will be reduced.
Section 1.482–9(e)(2)(ii) of the 2003
proposed regulations provided for a new
profit level indicator that may be
particularly useful for controlled
services transactions: the ratio of
operating profits to total services costs,
or the markup on total costs (also
referred to as the ‘‘net cost plus’’).
Because this profit level indicator
evaluates operating profits by reference
to the markup on all costs related to the
provision of services, it is more likely to
use a cost base of the tested party that
is comparable to the cost base used by
uncontrolled parties in performing
similar business activities.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
received a number of comments
concerning the CPM for services.
Commentators questioned whether the
definition of ‘‘total services costs,’’
which provides the net cost plus cost
base under the CPM for services,
included stock-based compensation. In
response to these comments, the
Treasury Department and the IRS clarify
their intent that § 1.482–5(c)(2)(iv) of the
existing regulations apply to the CPM
for services. Accordingly, new Example
3, Example 4, Example 5, and Example
6 are included in § 1.482–9T(f)(3) of
these temporary regulations. These
examples show the application of
existing § 1.482–5(c)(2)(iv) to fact
patterns that involve differences in the
utilization of or accounting for stockbased compensation in the context of
controlled services transactions.
One commentator expressed
reservations concerning a statement in
the preamble to the 2003 proposed
regulations, which indicated that PLIs
based on return on capital or assets
might be unreliable for controlled
services because the reliability of these
PLIs decreases as operating assets play
a less prominent role in generating
operating profits. This commentator
contended that such PLIs are reliable for
all firms, including service providers.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
clarify that, although return on capital
PLIs may produce reliable results in the
case of certain service providers, in
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
general, such PLIs are subject to the
general reservation in existing § 1.482–
5(b)(4)(i) to the effect that the reliability
of such PLIs increases as operating
assets play a greater role in general
operating profits.
Aside from the addition of the
examples described above, the CPM for
services provisions in these temporary
regulations are substantially similar to
the provisions in the 2003 proposed
regulations.
6. Profit Split Method—Temp. Treas.
Reg. §§ 1.482–9T(g) and 1.482–
6T(c)(3)(i)(B)
The 2003 proposed regulations
provided additional guidance
concerning application of the
comparable profit split and the residual
profit split methods to controlled
services transactions. Generally, these
methods evaluated whether the
allocation of the combined operating
profit or loss attributable to one or more
controlled transactions is arm’s length
by reference to the relative value of each
controlled taxpayer’s contributions to
the combined operating profit or loss.
The 2003 proposed regulations
provided that the guidance regarding
the profit split methods in existing
§ 1.482–6, as amended by proposed
§ 1.482–6(c)(3)(i)(B) and by other
changes, applied to controlled services
transactions. Section 1.482–9(g) of the
2003 proposed regulations also
provided specific additional guidance
concerning application of existing
§ 1.482–6, as amended, to controlled
services transactions.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
received numerous comments on the
profit split method. Commentators
objected in particular to references in
the 2003 proposed regulations to
‘‘interrelated’’ transactions in § 1.482–
6(c)(3)(i)(B)(1), and to ‘‘high-value
services’’ and ‘‘highly integrated
transactions’’ in § 1.482–9(g)(1).
Commentators viewed these terms as
vague and subjective. Commentators
also sought more specific guidance
concerning the circumstances in which
the residual profit split method would
constitute the best method under the
principles of existing § 1.482–1(c). In
addition, some commentators suggested
that one hallmark of a nonroutine
contribution in the context of controlled
services is that the renderer bears
substantial risks. Another commentator
suggested that the arm’s length
compensation for a function performed
by an employee or group of employees
should not in any event be evaluated
under a profit split method. In this
commentator’s view, such an activity
should be classified as routine because
PO 00000
Frm 00006
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the market return for the function is
equivalent to the total compensation
paid to the employees. Commentators
also raised several objections to the
factual assumptions in the proposed
analysis concerning § 1.482–9(g)(2)
Example 2 of the 2003 proposed
regulations.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
agreed with a number of comments and,
as a result, have made substantial
changes to these provisions. Under
these temporary regulations, all
references to ‘‘interrelated’’ transactions
in § 1.482–6(c)(3)(i)(B)(1), as well as
references to ‘‘high-value services’’ and
‘‘highly integrated transactions’’ in
§ 1.482–9(g)(1) have been eliminated.
Section 1.482–9T(g)(1) now states that
the profit split method is ‘‘ordinarily
used in controlled services transactions
involving a combination of nonroutine
contributions by multiple controlled
taxpayers.’’ This change from the 2003
proposed regulations (which referred to
‘‘high-value’’ or ‘‘highly-integrated’’
transactions), conforms to the changes
to § 1.482–6T(c)(3)(i)(B)(1), as described
below.
Section 1.482–6T(c)(3)(i)(B)(1) of
these temporary regulations defines a
nonroutine contribution as ‘‘a
contribution that is not accounted for as
a routine contribution.’’ In other words,
a nonroutine contribution is one for
which the return cannot be determined
by reference to market benchmarks.
Importantly, in this context, the term
‘‘routine’’ does not necessarily signify
that a contribution is low value. In fact,
comparable uncontrolled transactions
may indicate that the returns to a
routine contribution are very significant.
In response to the comments and in
accordance with the revised definition
of nonroutine contribution in these
temporary regulations, the following
references were eliminated as
unnecessary: (1) Contributions not fully
accounted for by market returns; and (2)
contributions so interrelated with other
transactions that they cannot be reliably
evaluated on a separate basis. These
changes will bring added clarity to the
temporary regulations.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that these revised provisions
respond to the public comments and
offer more specific guidance concerning
the circumstances in which the profit
split method would likely constitute the
best method under existing § 1.482–1(c).
In particular, the term ‘‘high-value’’ is
not included in temporary § 1.482–
9T(g)(1), thus eliminating any
implication that the profit split method
is a ‘‘default’’ method for controlled
services that have value significantly in
excess of cost. This shift in emphasis is
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
also reflected in section B.2 of this
preamble, which describes the deletion
of language from several examples that
some believed suggested that the
residual profit split is a default method.
The clear intent is that no method,
including the profit split, is a default
method for purposes of the best method
rule. Rather, the profit split method
applies if a controlled services
transaction has one or more material
elements for which it is not possible to
determine a market-based return. The
Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that the above changes address
the comments made and so do not
believe that it is necessary for the
regulations to adopt alternative
definitions of nonroutine contribution
put forward by commentators, such as
definitions based on the degree of risk
borne by the renderer of services or the
extent to which an activity is performed
solely by employees of the taxpayer.
Finally, based on the public
comments, and in light of the changes
described in this preamble, § 1.482–
9(g)(2) Example 2 of the 2003 proposed
regulations has been withdrawn and
replaced by a new example that more
effectively illustrates application of the
profit split method to nonroutine
contributions by multiple controlled
parties.
7. Unspecified Methods—§ 1.482–9T(h)
The 2003 proposed regulations
provided that an unspecified method
may provide the most reliable measure
of an arm’s length result under the best
method rule. Such an unspecified
method must take into account that
uncontrolled taxpayers compare the
terms of a particular transaction to the
realistic alternatives to that transaction.
No significant comments were
received concerning the unspecified
method provisions. Consistent with the
general aim to coordinate the analyses
under the various sections of the
regulations under section 482 so that
economically similar transactions will
be evaluated similarly, however,
§ 1.482–9T(h) has been modified to
provide that in applying an unspecified
method to services, the realistic
alternatives to be considered include
‘‘economically similar transactions
structured as other than services
transactions.’’ This provision allows
flexibility to consider non-services
alternatives to a services transaction, for
example, a transfer or license of
intangible property, if such an approach
provides the most reliable measure of an
arm’s length result. The Treasury
Department and the IRS are considering
similar changes to §§ 1.482–3(e)(1) and
1.482–4(d)(1) of the existing regulations.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
Public comments are requested
regarding the advisability of such
changes and the form they should take.
Aside from this change, the unspecified
method provisions in these temporary
regulations are substantially similar to
the provisions in the 2003 proposed
regulations.
8. Contingent-Payment Contractual
Terms—Temp. Treas. Reg. § 1.482–9T(i)
The contingent-payment contractual
term provisions in the 2003 proposed
regulations built on the fundamental
principle that, in structuring controlled
transactions, taxpayers are free to
choose from among a wide range of risk
allocations. This provision in the 2003
proposed regulations also acknowledged
that contingent-payment terms—terms
requiring compensation to be paid only
if specified results are obtained—may be
particularly relevant in the context of
controlled services transactions. The
2003 proposed regulations provided
detailed guidance concerning
contingent-payment contractual terms,
including economic substance
considerations as well as documentation
requirements.
Under § 1.482–9(i)(2) of the 2003
proposed regulations, a contingentpayment arrangement was given effect if
it met three basic requirements: (1) The
arrangement is contained in a written
contract executed prior to the start of
the activity; (2) the contract makes
payment contingent on a future benefit
directly related to the outcome of the
controlled services transaction; and (3)
the contract provides for payment on a
basis that reflects the recipient’s benefit
from the services rendered and the risks
borne by the renderer.
Commentators generally supported
the contingent-payment terms provision
as providing guidance concerning a
contractual structure with particular
relevance to controlled services
transactions. However, they also raised
three fundamental concerns regarding
the scope and operation of this
provision. First, the commentators
questioned whether controlled
taxpayers would need to identify
uncontrolled comparables for any
contingent-payment terms that they seek
to adopt. Second, they pointed out that
certain references to economic
substance provisions and
documentation requirements were
either unclear or duplicative of
provisions in existing § 1.482–1(d)(3).
Third, commentators expressed concern
that the IRS might improperly impute
contingent-payment terms as a means of
addressing erroneous transfer pricing in
situations that do not involve lack of
economic substance, for example, non-
PO 00000
Frm 00007
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44471
arm’s length pricing of activities such as
marketing or research and development.
The temporary regulations respond to
each of these concerns. First, under
§ 1.482–9(i)(1) of the 2003 proposed
regulations, one factor that needed to be
considered was whether an
uncontrolled taxpayer would have paid
a contingent fee if it engaged in a similar
transaction under comparable
circumstances. In response to
comments, the temporary regulations
eliminate this requirement and instead
emphasize the importance of the
economic substance principles under
§ 1.482–1(d)(3) of the existing
regulations. That is, whether a
particular arrangement entered into by
controlled parties has economic
substance is not determined by
reference to whether it corresponds to
arrangements adopted by uncontrolled
parties.
Second, in response to comments, the
temporary regulations eliminate
duplicative or unnecessary references to
the economic substance rules. For
example, § 1.482–9T(i)(2)(ii) has been
modified to provide that the contingentpayment arrangement as a whole,
including both the contingency and the
basis of payment, must be consistent
with economic substance, as evaluated
under existing § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B).
This section eliminates the additional
requirement under the 2003 proposed
regulations, that the arm’s length charge
under a contingent-payment
arrangement must be evaluated by
reference to economic substance
principles.
Third, the temporary regulations
respond to the concern identified by
commentators that the IRS might apply
the contingent-payment provisions in an
inappropriate manner, for example, to
correct erroneous transfer pricing in
prior taxable years that are not under
examination. As discussed in more
detail in section C of this preamble, the
temporary regulations include an
example to illustrate factual
circumstances in which contractual
terms pertaining to risk allocations
(provided they are otherwise consistent
with taxpayers’ conduct and
arrangements) are fully respected,
notwithstanding that on examination
the activities were determined to have
been priced on a non-arm’s length basis.
Other concerns, relating to interaction of
the contingent-payment terms provision
with the commensurate with income
standard, are also addressed in section
C of this preamble.
New § 1.482–9T(i)(5) Example 3
illustrates the application of these rules
to a situation in which the contingency
identified in a contingent-payment
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44472
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
provision is not satisfied. The example
responds to a request by commentators
for additional guidance to address such
a factual scenario.
9. Total Services Costs—Temp. Treas.
Reg. § 1.482–9T(j)
Section 1.482–9(j) of the 2003
proposed regulations defined ‘‘total
services costs’’ for purposes of the
SCBM, the CPM for services, and the
cost of services plus method where the
gross services profit was restated in the
form of a markup on total services costs.
Under the 2003 proposed regulations,
total services costs included all costs
directly identified with provision of the
controlled services, as well as all other
costs reasonably allocable to such
services under § 1.482–9(k). The
Treasury Department and the IRS
intended that, in this context, ‘‘costs’’
must comprise provision for all
resources expended, used, or made
available to render the service.
Generally accepted accounting
principles (GAAP) or Federal income
tax accounting rules may provide an
appropriate analytic platform, but
neither would necessarily be conclusive
in evaluating whether an item must be
included in total services costs. The
issue of determining total services costs
is not a new one; it is relevant under the
current 1968 regulations as well.
Commentators objected that § 1.482–
9(j) of the 2003 proposed regulations
failed to list the specific items that were
included in total services costs. Some
commentators suggested that, absent
more precise guidance in this regard,
controlled taxpayers should be
permitted to rely on the definition of
costs applicable under GAAP or Federal
income tax principles. Commentators
also requested clarification whether
total services costs included stock-based
compensation.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
view the definition of total services
costs in the 2003 proposed regulations
as having struck the correct balance
between specificity and flexibility. In
general, the accounting standards
applicable to services do not provide a
uniform means of determining all costs
that relate to the provision of services.
Consequently, the Treasury Department
and the IRS conclude that total services
costs for purposes of section 482 cannot
be determined solely by reference to
GAAP or other accounting standards or
practices.
In response to comments, however,
§ 1.482–9T(j) of the temporary
regulations clarifies that all
contributions in cash or in kind
(including stock-based compensation)
are included in total services costs. In
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
addition, the third sentence of § 1.482–
9T(j) states that ‘‘costs for this purpose
should comprise provision for all
resources expended, used, or made
available to achieve the specific
objective for which the service is
rendered.’’ To better reflect, for
example, the inclusion of stock-based
compensation in total services costs, the
term ‘‘provision’’ is adopted in place of
the term ‘‘consideration’’ as used in the
2003 proposed regulations.
Commentators also observed that the
definition of total services costs in the
2003 proposed regulations did not
address situations in which the costs of
a controlled service provider include
significant charges from uncontrolled
parties. Commentators posited that such
third-party costs should be permitted to
‘‘pass through,’’ rather than being
subject to a markup under the transfer
pricing method used to analyze the
controlled services transaction. The
Treasury Department and the IRS agree
that these comments raised an issue that
needs to be addressed, but decided to do
so in a manner different from that
suggested by the commentators. In
response to this comment, the
temporary regulations add § 1.482–
9T(l)(4), which under certain
circumstances allows a controlled
services transaction that involves thirdparty costs to be evaluated on a
disaggregated basis. See section A.11.e
of this preamble.
10. Allocation of Costs—Temp. Treas.
Reg. § 1.482–9T(k)
Section 1.482–9(k) of the 2003
proposed regulations retained the
flexible approach of existing § 1.482–
2(b)(3) through (6), which permitted
taxpayers to use any reasonable
allocation and apportionment of costs in
determining an arm’s length charge for
services. In evaluating whether the
allocation used by the taxpayer is
appropriate, the 2003 proposed
regulations required that consideration
be given to all bases and factors,
including practices used by the taxpayer
to apportion costs for other (non-tax)
purposes. Such practices, although
relevant, need not be given conclusive
weight by the Commissioner in
evaluating the arms length charge for
controlled services.
Commentators urged that any
technique that a taxpayer uses to
allocate costs should be entitled to
deference, provided it is consistent with
GAAP. For the reasons expressed above
concerning § 1.482–9T(j), GAAP may
provide an appropriate analytic
platform but is not necessarily
controlling in evaluating the arm’s
length charge for controlled services.
PO 00000
Frm 00008
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
In the case of administrative or
support services, commentators
suggested that the Commissioner should
accept any reasonable allocation used
by the taxpayer, for example, revenue,
sales, or employee headcount. In
general, the cost of a service that
provides benefits to multiple parties
must be allocated in a manner that
reliably reflects the proportional benefit
received by each of those parties. This
standard is intended to be substantially
equivalent to the standard in § 1.482–
2(b)(2)(i) and 1.482–2(b)(6) of the
existing regulations. In response to
comments, § 1.482–9T(b)(5)(i)(B) of
these temporary regulations also
provides rules whereby the costs of
covered services subject to a shared
services arrangement are allocated to
participants in a manner that the
taxpayer reasonably concludes will
most reliably reflect each participant’s
reasonably anticipated benefits from the
services. See section A.1.c of this
preamble.
11. Controlled Services Transactions—
Temp. Treas. Reg. § 1.482–9T(l)
a. Definition of Activity—Temp. Treas.
Reg. § 1.482–9T(l)(2)
Section 1.482–9(l) of the 2003
proposed regulations set forth a
threshold test for determining whether
an activity constituted a controlled
services transaction subject to the
general framework of § 1.482–9. The
2003 proposed regulations broadly
defined a controlled services transaction
as any activity by a controlled taxpayer
that resulted in a benefit to one or more
other controlled taxpayers. An
‘‘activity’’ was in turn defined as the use
by the renderer, or the making available
to the recipient, of any property or other
resources of the renderer.
One commentator interpreted this
provision as indicating that any activity
properly analyzed under one or more
other provisions of the transfer pricing
regulations should not be subject to
§1.482–9 of the 2003 proposed
regulations. Other commentators
suggested that the ‘‘predominant
character’’ of a transaction should
control whether it is analyzed as a
controlled service under §1.482–9 of the
2003 proposed regulations or under
other provisions of the section 482
regulations.
Controlled taxpayers have a great deal
of flexibility to structure transactions in
various ways that are economically
equivalent. In some cases, an overall
transaction may include separate
elements of differing characters, for
example, a transfer of tangible property
bundled together with the provision of
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
a service. The structure adopted may
sometimes be more reliably analyzed on
either a disaggregated or an aggregated
basis under the relevant section of the
section 482 regulations, for example,
either as a separate transfer of tangible
property under the existing section 482
regulations in § 1.482–3 and a separate
controlled services transaction under
these temporary regulations in § 1.482–
9T, or as an overall controlled services
transaction under these temporary
regulations. To the extent that a
controlled transaction is structured so
that it is most reliably evaluated as a
controlled services transaction, it will
be analyzed as such. To the extent that
multiple elements of a single overall
transaction potentially create an overlap
between the section 482 regulations
applicable to other types of transactions
and these temporary regulations
concerning controlled services
transactions, the Treasury Department
and the IRS believe that the appropriate
coordination is achieved by applying
the rules in § 1.482–9T(m). See section
A.12.a of this preamble.
b. Benefit Test—Temp. Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9T(l)(3)
Section 1.482–9(l)(3) of the 2003
proposed regulations provided rules for
determining whether an activity
provides a benefit. Under § 1.482–
9(l)(3)(i), a benefit is present if the
activity directly results in a reasonably
identifiable increment of economic or
commercial value that enhances the
recipient’s commercial position, or is
reasonably anticipated to do so. Another
requirement is that an uncontrolled
taxpayer in circumstances comparable
to those of the recipient would be
willing to pay an uncontrolled party to
perform the same or a similar activity,
or be willing to perform for itself the
same or similar activity. The 2003
proposed regulations thus made
significant changes to the benefit test
under the existing regulations, which is
based on whether an uncontrolled party
in the position of the renderer would
expect payment for a particular activity.
The 2003 proposed regulations adopted
the so-called ‘‘specific benefit’’
approach, which mandates an arm’s
length charge only if a particular
activity provides an identifiable benefit
to a particular taxpayer. In addition,
§ 1.482–9(l)(3)(ii) of the 2003 proposed
regulations provided that no benefit is
present if an activity has only indirect
or remote effects.
Commentators viewed the 2003
proposed regulations as providing
insufficient guidance concerning
methods that controlled taxpayers might
use to allocate or share expenses or
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
charges, in particular with respect to
centralized services performed on a
centralized basis for multiple affiliates.
In response to these comments, the
temporary regulations authorize the use
of shared services arrangements for
centralized services that qualify for the
SCM in § 1.482–9T(b). By entering into
such arrangements, taxpayers can,
among other things, reduce the burden
associated with analysis of centralized
services, which would presumably
include activities that provide benefits
on only an occasional or intermittent
basis. See section A.1.c of this preamble,
concerning shared services
arrangements.
One commentator suggested that,
because the benefit test in the 2003
proposed regulations focused on the
recipient, the arm’s length charge
should also be analyzed from the
perspective of the recipient and
economic conditions in the recipient’s
geographic market. The commentator
misunderstands the application of the
benefit test. Although the benefit test
focuses on the recipient, evaluation of
the arm’s length charge under the best
method rule in a particular case (for
example, under a profit split method)
may require analysis of the recipient,
the renderer, or both (depending, for
example, on which party performs the
simplest, most easily measurable
functions).
c. Specific Applications of the Benefit
Test—Temp Treas. Reg. § 1.482–
9T(l)(3)(ii) through (v)
The 2003 proposed regulations
provided additional rules concerning
application of the benefit test to
particular circumstances, such as
application to activities with indirect or
remote effects, duplicative activities,
shareholder activities, and passive
association. These rules in the 2003
proposed regulations were substantially
similar to the rules in existing § 1.482–
2(b)(2). For example, § 1.482–9(l)(3)(ii)
and (l)(3)(iii) provided that no benefit is
present if an activity has only indirect
or remote effects or merely duplicates
an activity that the recipient has already
performed on its own behalf. Section
1.482–9(l)(3)(iv) provided that
shareholder activities do not confer a
benefit on controlled parties and
therefore do not give rise to an arm’s
length charge. Shareholder activities
were defined as activities that primarily
benefit the owner-member of a
controlled group in its capacity as
owner, rather than other controlled
parties.
In addition, § 1.482–9(l)(3)(v) of the
2003 proposed regulations provided that
certain ‘‘passive association’’ effects do
PO 00000
Frm 00009
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44473
not give rise to a benefit within the
meaning of the regulations concerning
controlled services. Passive association
was defined as an increment of value
that a controlled party obtains on
account of its membership in the
controlled group. Section 1.482–
9(l)(3)(v) of the 2003 proposed
regulations provided, however, that
membership in a controlled group may
be considered in evaluating
comparability between controlled and
uncontrolled transactions.
Concerning indirect or remote effects,
one commentator suggested that if a
centralized activity by a parent confers
only occasional or intermittent benefits
on a subsidiary, such benefits should be
classified as indirect or remote. As to
the shareholder provisions,
commentators noted that the 2003
proposed regulations failed to address
the potential that an activity that confers
a reasonably identifiable increment of
value on a controlled party might also
be appropriately classified as a
shareholder activity. As to the passive
association provisions, commentators
questioned whether membership in a
controlled group is relevant to
evaluation of comparability.
Commentators raised the concern that
virtually any uncontrolled transaction
could potentially be considered
unreliable, because it generally would
not reflect the same efficiencies and
synergies as the controlled services
transaction.
Regarding the comments concerning
indirect or remote effects, the Treasury
Department and the IRS believe that to
equate occasional or intermittent
benefits in all cases with indirect or
remote effects would conflict with the
specific-benefit rule. That rule requires
that any service that produces an
identifiable and direct benefit warrants
an arm’s length charge, even if the
service is provided only occasionally or
intermittently. Accordingly, the
temporary regulations retain this
provision without change.
In response to comments relating to
shareholder activities, § 1.482–
9T(l)(3)(iv) of the temporary regulations
refers to the ‘‘sole effect’’ rather than the
‘‘primary effect’’ of an activity. This
change clarifies that a shareholder
activity is one of which the sole effect
is either to protect the renderer’s capital
investment in one or more members of
the controlled group, or to facilitate
compliance by the renderer with
reporting, legal, or regulatory
requirements specifically applicable to
the renderer, or both. As modified, the
definition in temporary § 1.482–
9T(l)(3)(iv) now conforms to the general
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44474
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
definition of benefit in § 1.482–
9T(l)(3)(i).
In response to commentators’ request
for clarification regarding the passive
association rules, new § 1.482–9T(l)(5)
Example 19 illustrates a situation in
which group membership would be
taken into account in evaluating
comparability.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
have inserted the word ‘‘generally’’ in
the description of duplicative activities
in § 1.482–9T(l)(3)(iii). This change
clarifies that although a duplicative
activity does not generally give rise to
a benefit, under certain circumstances,
such an activity may provide an
increment of value to the recipient by
reference to the general rule in § 1.482–
9T(l)(3)(i). In such cases, the activity
would be appropriately classified as a
controlled services transaction.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
d. Guarantees, Including Financial
Guarantees
The proposed regulations appear to
have created confusion on the part of
some taxpayers regarding the
appropriate characterization of financial
guarantees for tax purposes. The
provision of a financial guarantee does
not constitute a service for purposes of
determining the source of the guarantee
fees. See Centel Communications, Inc. v.
Commissioner, 920 F.2d 1335 (7th Cir.
1990); Bank of America v. United
States, 680 F.2d 142 (Ct. Cl. 1980).
Nevertheless, some taxpayers have
suggested that guarantees are services
that could qualify for the cost safe
harbor and that the provision of a
guarantee has no cost. This position
would mean that in effect guarantees are
uniformly non-compensatory. The
Treasury Department and the IRS do not
agree with this uniform no charge rule
for guarantees. As a result, financial
transactions, including guarantees, are
explicitly excluded from eligibility for
the SCM by § 1.482–9T(b)(3)(ii)(H).
However, no inference is intended by
this exclusion that financial transactions
(including guarantees) would otherwise
be considered the provision of services
for transfer pricing purposes. The
Treasury Department and the IRS
subsequently intend to issue transfer
pricing guidance regarding financial
guarantees, in particular, along with
other guidance concerning the treatment
of global dealing operations. See Section
A.12.e of this preamble for a discussion
of coordination with global dealing
operations. Such guidance will also
include rules to determine the source of
income from financial guarantees.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
e. Third-Party Costs—Temp. Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9T(l)(4)
Commentators observed that the
definition of ‘‘total services costs’’ in
§ 1.482–9(j) of the 2003 proposed
regulations did not address situations in
which the costs of a controlled service
provider included significant charges
from uncontrolled parties.
Commentators claimed that such thirdparty costs should be treated as ‘‘pass
through’’ items that, in most cases,
should not be subject to the markup (if
any) applicable to costs incurred by the
renderer in its capacity as service
provider. This comment was potentially
relevant to all cost-based methods in
§ 1.482–9 of the 2003 proposed
regulations. The Treasury Department
and the IRS agreed that these comments
raised an issue that needed to be
addressed, but decided to do so in a
manner different from that suggested by
the commentators.
In response to this comment, these
temporary regulations include a new
§ 1.482–9T(l)(4). Under this provision, if
total services costs include material
third-party costs, the controlled services
transaction may be analyzed either as a
single transaction or as two separate
transactions, depending on which
approach provides the most reliable
measure of the arm’s length result under
the best method rule in existing § 1.482–
1(c). Consistent with the best method
rule, in determining which approach
provides the most reliable indication of
the arm’s length result, the primary
factors are the degree of comparability
between the controlled services
transaction and the uncontrolled
comparables and the quality of the data
and assumptions used. New § 1.482–
9T(l)(5) Example 20 and Example 21
provide illustrations of this rule.
The rule in § 1.482–9T(l)(4) of the
temporary regulations applies to all
specified methods that use cost to
evaluate the arm’s length charge for
controlled services, including the SCM
in § 1.482–9T(b). A determination that a
controlled services transaction is more
reliably evaluated on a disaggregated
basis may have an effect on the analysis
of that transaction under other
provisions of these regulations.
f. Examples, Temp. Treas. Reg. § 1.482–
9T(l)(5)
Section 1.482–9T(l)(5) of the
temporary regulations provides
numerous examples that illustrate
applications of the rules in § 1.482–
9T(l). Changes have been made to
certain of these examples to conform to
the modifications described under the
previous headings in this section.
PO 00000
Frm 00010
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
12. Coordination With Other Transfer
Pricing Rules—Temp. Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9T(m)
Section 1.482–9(m) of the 2003
proposed regulations provided
coordination rules applicable to a
controlled services transaction that is
combined with, or includes elements of,
a non-services transaction. These
coordination rules relied on the best
method rule in existing § 1.482–1(c)(1)
to determine which method or methods
would provide the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length result for a
particular controlled transaction.
a. Services Transactions That Include
Other Types of Transactions—Temp.
Treas. Reg. § 1.482–9T(m)(1)
A transaction structured as a
controlled services transaction may
include material elements that do not
constitute controlled services. Section
1.482–9(m)(1) of the 2003 proposed
regulations provided that, the decision
whether to evaluate such a transaction
in an integrated manner under the
transfer pricing methods in § 1.482–9 or
to evaluate one or more elements
separately under services and nonservices methods depends on which of
these approaches would provide the
most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result. If the non-services component(s)
of an integrated transaction could be
adequately accounted for in evaluating
the comparability of the controlled
transaction to the uncontrolled
comparables, then the transaction could
generally be evaluated solely as a
controlled service under § 1.482–9.
One commentator criticized this
coordination rule as inherently
subjective and proposed that a
‘‘predominant character’’ test be
adopted instead. Another commentator
interpreted certain statements in the
preamble as indicating that any
controlled transaction that was reliably
analyzed under one of the transfer
pricing methods applicable to tangible
or intangible property would necessarily
be outside the scope of the regulations
regarding controlled services.
Upon further consideration, the
Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that no changes are necessary to
the coordination rule in § 1.482–
9T(m)(1) because these commentators
have misconstrued the application of
this rule to integrated transactions. The
coordination rule in § 1.482–9T(m)(1)
focuses on the underlying economics of
such transactions and the most reliable
means of evaluating those economics
under the best method rule. The
Treasury Department and the IRS
recognize that controlled taxpayers have
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
substantial flexibility to structure
transactions in a variety of economically
equivalent ways. Provided that the
structure adopted has economic
substance, the coordination rule is
designed to respect that structure and to
seek the most reliable means of
evaluating the arm’s length price.
Consequently, if a taxpayer structures a
transaction so that it constitutes a
controlled service, the transaction will
generally be analyzed under the
principles of § 1.482–9T, without regard
to other provisions of the section 482
regulations.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
b. Services Transactions That Effect a
Transfer of Intangible Property—Temp.
Treas. Reg. § 1.482–9T(m)(2)
Section 1.482–9(m)(2) of the 2003
proposed regulations provided that a
transaction structured as a controlled
service may result in the transfer of
intangible property, may include an
element that constitutes the transfer of
intangible property, or may have an
effect similar to the transfer of
intangible property. In such cases, if the
element of the transaction that related to
intangible property was material, the
arm’s length result for that element
would be determined or corroborated
under a method provided for in the
regulations applicable to transfers of
intangible property. See existing
§ 1.482–4.
Commentators viewed this rule as
potentially authorizing the
Commissioner to recharacterize a
controlled services transaction as a
transaction that involved a transfer of
intangible property. Such authority,
commentators claimed, was inconsistent
with existing § 1.482–4(b), which
defines an intangible as an item that has
‘‘substantial value independent of the
services of any individual.’’
Commentators also contended that the
coordination rules impermissibly
extended the commensurate with
income standard to controlled services
transactions. Commentators suggested
that, assuming each component of a
controlled services transaction may be
reliably accounted for under a specified
transfer pricing method, no additional
analysis is necessary concerning
elements that arguably pertain to
intangible property.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
agree with the commentators that the
phrase ‘‘may have an effect similar to
the transfer of intangible property’’
could be interpreted as improperly
expanding § 1.482–4 of the existing
regulations to non-intangible
transactions. This is not the intent of
this provision. Consequently, to make
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
this clear, the temporary regulations
omit this phrase.
Other concerns raised by
commentators misinterpret the
interaction between this coordination
rule and the definition of intangibles in
§ 1.482–4(b). Section 1.482–4(b) of the
existing regulations contains a list of
specified intangibles and a residual
category of other similar items, all of
which must have ‘‘substantial value
independent of the services of any
individual.’’ In contrast, the
coordination rule in § 1.482–9T(m)(2)
applies after it is determined that an
integrated transaction includes an
intangible component that is material.
Because the coordination rule in
§ 1.482–9T(m)(2) applies only to
transactions that incorporate a material
intangible component, it is not
inconsistent with existing § 1.482–4(b),
nor does it apply the commensurate
with income standard of existing
§ 1.482–4(f)(2) to transactions that do
not have a material element that
constitutes an intangible transfer.
Section 1.482–9(m)(6) Example 4 of
the 2003 proposed regulations
illustrated the application of this rule to
a controlled services transaction that
included an element constituting the
transfer of an intangible. Several
commentators questioned the factual
assumptions in Example 4.
Commentators contended that a
controlled party performing R&D for
another controlled party generally
would not have rights in any know-how
or technical data arising out of the R&D
activity; instead the contract would
specify that the party that paid for the
research would obtain such rights.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
agree with these comments and have
concluded that the factual assumptions
in this example are unclear.
Consequently, Example 4 has been
redrafted to illustrate a situation in
which the controlled party performing
the R&D is the owner of know-how or
technical data that resulted from that
R&D activity. The controlled party then
transfers its rights to another controlled
party. As revised, this example more
clearly illustrates application of the rule
in § 1.482–9T(m)(2).
c. Services Subject to a Qualified Cost
Sharing Arrangement—Temp. Treas.
Reg. § 1.482–9T(m)(3)
Section 1.482–9(m)(3) of the 2003
proposed regulations provided that
services provided by a controlled
participant under a qualified cost
sharing arrangement are subject to
existing § 1.482–7. The Treasury
Department and the IRS are in the
process of comprehensively revising the
PO 00000
Frm 00011
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44475
regulations applicable to cost sharing. In
the interim, and pending issuance of
final regulations that coordinate these
two provisions, the rule § 1.482–
9T(m)(3) retains this coordination rule.
d. Other Types of Transaction That
Include a Services Transaction—Temp.
Treas. Reg. § 1.482–9T(m)(4)
Section 1.482–9T(m)(4) is adopted in
substantially the same form as in the
2003 proposed regulations. A
transaction structured other than as a
controlled services transaction may
include material elements that
constitute controlled services. Section
1.482–9T(m)(4) of these temporary
regulations provides rules for evaluating
such integrated transactions. As with
the corresponding rules in the 2003
proposed regulations, these rules
complement the more general rule in
§ 1.482–9(m)(1), which relates to
integrated transactions structured as
controlled services transactions.
e. Global Dealing Operations
In § 1.482–9(m)(5) of the 2003
proposed regulations, the section for
coordination with the global dealing
regulations was ‘‘reserved.’’ In response
to comments, this provision is omitted
in these temporary regulations, based on
the view that reserved treatment is not
appropriate. The Treasury Department
and the IRS are presently working on
new global dealing regulations. The
intent of the Treasury Department and
the IRS is that when final regulations
are issued, those regulations, not
§ 1.482–9T, will govern the evaluation
of the activities performed by a global
dealing operation within the scope of
those regulations. Pending finalization
of the global dealing regulations,
taxpayers may rely on the proposed
global dealing regulations, not the
temporary services regulations, to
govern financial transactions entered
into in connection with a global dealing
operation as defined in proposed
§ 1.482–8. Therefore, proposed
regulations under § 1.482–9(m)(5)
issued elsewhere in the Federal Register
clarify that a controlled services
transaction does not include a financial
transaction entered into in connection
with a global dealing operation.
B. Income Attributable to Intangibles—
Temp. Treas. Reg. § 1.482–4T(f)(3) and
(4)
The 2003 proposed regulations
substantially replaced § 1.482–4(f)(3) of
the existing regulations, which dealt
with issues relating to the allocation of
income from intangibles. The 2003
proposed regulations adopted new
§ 1.482–4(f)(3) and (f)(4), which
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44476
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
provided modified rules for determining
the owner of an intangible for purposes
of section 482 and also provided rules
for determining the arm’s length
compensation in situations where a
controlled party other than the owner
makes contributions to the value of an
intangible.
1. Ownership of Intangible Property—
Temp. Treas. Reg. § 1.482–4T(f)(3)
Section 1.482–4(f)(3)(i)(A) of the 2003
proposed regulations contained
modified rules for determining the
owner of intangible property for
purposes of section 482. In general,
under these rules, the controlled party
that was identified as the owner of a
legally protected intangible under the
intellectual property laws of the
relevant jurisdiction or other legal
provision was treated as the owner of
that intangible for purposes of section
482.
The 2003 proposed regulations also
clarified that a license or other right to
use an intangible may constitute an item
of intangible property for purposes of
section 482. This provision, which
contemplated the identification of a
single owner for each discrete set of
rights that constitutes an intangible,
replaced provisions in the existing
regulations that could be interpreted as
providing for multiple owners of an
intangible. See Proposed § 1.482–
4(f)(3)(i) and (f)(3)(iv), Example 4.
The 2003 proposed regulations also
adopted a provision that parallels the
requirement in the existing regulations,
to the effect that ownership for purposes
of section 482 must be consistent with
the economic substance of the
controlled transaction. Intellectual
property law generally places relatively
few limitations on the ability of
members of a controlled group to assign
or transfer legal ownership among
themselves. As a result, this rule is a
safeguard against purely formal
assignments of ownership that, if given
effect for purposes of section 482, could
produce results that are inconsistent
with the arm’s length standard.
Under § 1.482–4(f)(3)(i)(A) of the 2003
proposed regulations, in situations
where it was not possible to identify the
owner of an intangible under the
intellectual property law of the relevant
jurisdiction, contractual term, or other
legal provision, the controlled taxpayer
with practical control over the
intangible would be treated as the
owner for purposes of section 482. This
provision replaced the so-called
‘‘developer-assister’’ rule in existing
§ 1.482–4(f)(3)(ii)(B). In the case of nonlegally protected intangibles, the
developer-assister rule assigned
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
ownership of an intangible to the
controlled taxpayer that bore the largest
portion of the costs of development.
The 2003 proposed regulations did
not adopt the developer-assister rule, so
they also eliminated related provisions
pertaining to assistance to the owner of
intangible property. In place of those
rules, the 2003 proposed regulations
contained new provisions relating to
contributions to the value of intangible
property owned by another controlled
party. See Proposed § 1.482–4(f)(4)(i).
These rules are discussed in greater
detail in section B.2 of this preamble.
Section 1.482–4(f)(3)(i)(B) of the 2003
proposed regulations excluded certain
intangibles that are subject to the cost
sharing provisions of § 1.482–7. The
Treasury Department and the IRS are
currently revising the existing
regulations related to cost sharing.
When final cost sharing regulations are
issued, § 1.482–4(f)(3) and (4) will take
into account the changes made to the
cost sharing provisions.
Extensive comments were received
concerning the revised approach to
determining ownership of intangibles
under section 482. To varying degrees,
many commentators supported the new
ownership standard, noting that it
should be easier to apply and should
produce more certainty of results in this
area. Other commentators, however,
took issue with the proposed rules.
Some of these commentators took the
position that legal ownership does not
provide an appropriate basis for
determining ownership under section
482, while others believed that the
determination of ownership under
section 482 should include a full-scale
application of substantive intellectual
property law, including relevant
statutory provisions as well as judicial
doctrines and common law principles
that may bear on the issue of ownership.
After considering the public
comments, the Treasury Department
and the IRS conclude that legal
ownership provides the appropriate
framework for determining ownership
of intangibles under section 482. In this
specific context, the Treasury
Department and the IRS intend that the
‘‘legal owner’’ under these rules will be
the controlled party that possesses title
to the intangible, based on consideration
of the facts and circumstances. This
analysis would take into account
applications filed with a central
government registry (such as the U.S.
Patent and Trademark Office or the
Copyright Office in the United States),
any contractual provisions in effect
between the controlled parties, and
other legal provisions. Legal ownership,
understood in this manner, provides a
PO 00000
Frm 00012
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
practical and administrable framework
for determining ownership of
intangibles for purposes of section 482.
The suggestions that the ownership
rules under section 482 should in effect
incorporate by reference the substantive
intellectual property rules have not been
adopted. In the view of the Treasury
Department and the IRS, it would be
counterproductive to require an indepth application of intellectual
property law in determining which
controlled party is treated as the owner
under section 482. The primary function
of intellectual property law is to define
the rights of a legal entity, which in
some cases might be a controlled group,
as compared with one or more
uncontrolled parties that have
competing claims to the same item of
intangible property. For this reason,
application of the substantive
provisions of intellectual property law
would not be useful, and might in fact
produce inappropriate results, given
that under section 482 the relevant
determination is which of several
controlled parties should be classified
as the owner of an intangible.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
anticipate that ownership of an
intangible as determined under the legal
owner standard will not conflict with
the simultaneous requirement that
ownership under section 482 be
determined in accordance with the
economic substance. For example, if the
economic substance of the controlled
parties’ dealings conflicts with
treatment of the legal owner as the
owner under section 482, the
Commissioner may determine
ownership by reference to the economic
substance of the transaction. In other
cases, ownership for purposes of section
482 should be consistent with the
ownership determined by reference to
either legal ownership or practical
control.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
also believe that the 2003 proposed
regulations properly adopted a practical
control standard for ‘‘non-legally
protected’’ intangibles. The control
standard should not displace valid
contractual terms intended to specify
that a particular controlled party is the
owner of an existing intangible or an
intangible under development. Because
a contractual term constitutes a ‘‘legal
provision,’’ the intangible would be
analyzed as a legally protected
intangible, as opposed to a non-legally
protected intangible subject to the
practical control rule.
Commentators suggested that certain
statements in the 2003 proposed
regulations incorrectly equated a
licensee of intangible property with a
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
distributor of tangible property. In
response to these comments, the
Treasury Department and the IRS have
revised the examples in § 1.482–
4T(f)(4)(ii) to avoid any implication that
these regulations equate or distinguish
these business relationships.
2. Contributions to the Value of an
Intangible—Temp. Treas. Reg. § 1.482–
4T(f)(4)
Under § 1.482–4(f)(4)(i) of the 2003
proposed regulations, the rules of
section 482 were applied to determine
the arm’s length compensation for any
activity that was reasonably anticipated
to increase the value of an intangible
owned by another controlled party.
Such an activity was defined as a
‘‘contribution’’ under this provision.
This provision replaced certain rules in
the existing regulations that required
arm’s length compensation to be
provided for any assistance by a
controlled party to the owner of the
intangible.
This new guidance concerning
contributions to the value of an
intangible was intended to provide a
more refined framework than the rules
in existing § 1.482–4(f)(3), in particular
by reducing the potential for
inappropriate, all-or-nothing results.
Moreover, because the revised rules
afforded heightened deference to
contractual arrangements, they were
intended to give controlled taxpayers
incentives to document transactions on
a contemporaneous basis and to adhere
to the contractual terms agreed upon at
the outset of the arrangement.
Section 1.482–4(f)(4)(i) of the 2003
proposed regulations provided that
compensation for a contribution may be
embedded within the terms of another
transaction, may be stated separately as
a fee for services, or may be provided for
as a reduction in the royalty or the
transfer price of tangible property. The
regulations also recognized that if a
controlled party’s activities are
reasonably anticipated to enhance only
the value of its own rights under a
license or exclusive distribution
arrangement, no compensation is due
under the arm’s length standard. The
rules addressed the most commonly
encountered factual scenarios that
potentially give rise to contributions on
the part of a controlled party.
Section 1.482–4(f)(4)(i) of the 2003
proposed regulations provided that in
general a separate allocation is not
appropriate if the compensation for a
contribution was embedded within the
terms of a related controlled transaction.
In such cases, the contribution is taken
into account in evaluating the
comparability of the controlled
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
transaction to the uncontrolled
comparables and in determining the
arm’s length consideration for the
controlled transaction that includes the
embedded contribution.
This rule potentially interacted with
§ 1.482–3(f) of the existing regulations,
concerning transfers of tangible property
together with an embedded intangible.
For example, assume that a reseller of
trademarked goods performs activities
that are classified as contributions
within the meaning of § 1.482–4(f)(4). If
no separate compensation for these
activities is provided for by a
contractual term, then ordinarily no
allocation would be appropriate either
for the embedded trademark or for the
underlying activities. Both elements
would, however, be taken into account
in evaluating the comparability of the
controlled transfer to the uncontrolled
comparables and in determining the
arm’s length consideration for the
controlled transfer of the trademarked
goods. See § 1.482–4T(f)(4)(ii) Example
2.
Commentators objected to certain
aspects of Example 2, Example 3,
Example 5, and Example 6 in § 1.482–
4(f)(4)(ii) of the 2003 proposed
regulations. Those examples stated that,
if it is not possible to identify
uncontrolled transactions that
incorporated a similar range of
interrelated elements as the nonroutine
contributions by the controlled parties,
it may be appropriate to apply a residual
profit split analysis. In the opinion of
commentators, these statements implied
that profit split methods were preferred
methods in any case that involved a
contribution to the value of an
intangible.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
agree with these comments. There was
no intention to imply any such
treatment of the residual profit split
method. As a result, these statements in
the examples have been eliminated. In
addition, the examples in the temporary
regulations specifically refer to the best
method rule and cross-reference new
Example 10, Example 11, and Example
12 in § 1.482–8, which show application
of the best method rule to intangible
development activities. See also section
A.6 of this preamble, concerning
definition of nonroutine contribution for
purposes of the profit split methods.
In addition, and in response to
comments, a new Example 5 in § 1.482–
1T(d)(3)(ii)(C) illustrates factual
circumstances in which contractual
terms pertaining to intangible
development activities are respected,
although on examination the activities
are found to be priced on a non-arm’s
length basis. Together, these changes
PO 00000
Frm 00013
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44477
clarify that, subject to the best method
rule and satisfaction of economic
substance requirements, controlled
parties may adopt contractual terms that
provide for marketing, research and
development, or other intangible
development activities to be
compensated based on reimbursement
of specified costs plus a profit element.
The underlying contractual
compensation terms will be given effect
for purposes of section 482 as long as
they have economic substance.
Commentators sought clarification
regarding the term ‘‘incremental
marketing activities,’’ which was used
in several examples in § 1.482–4(f)(4)(ii)
of the 2003 proposed regulations.
In the examples, the term
‘‘incremental marketing activities’’
referred to activities by a controlled
party that are quantitatively greater (in
terms of volume, expense, etc.) than the
activities undertaken by comparable
uncontrolled parties in the transactions
used to analyze the controlled
transaction. Such activities must be
taken into account by either evaluating
a separate transaction that accounts for
such incremental activities or analyzing
the underlying transaction and making
necessary adjustments to the
uncontrolled transactions to incorporate
such activities into the comparability
analysis. Discrete changes were made to
the examples to clarify these principles.
As a result, apart from this additional
clarification, these comments are not
adopted.
Commentators proposed that the
Treasury Department and the IRS adopt
discounted cash-flow analysis (DCF) as
a specified method for analysis of
contributions. The Treasury Department
and the IRS find it unnecessary to do so
because they already recognize DCF as
one of several approaches that may be
reliably applied to evaluate intangible
property. This method may be
particularly useful, either as an
unspecified method or in conjunction
with one of the specified methods, in
evaluating contributions within the
meaning of § 1.482–4T(f)(4)(i). Further
consideration is being given to the
suggestion to adopt DCF as a specified
method in its own right.
C. Contractual Terms Imputed From
Economic Substance—§ 1.482–
1(d)(3)(ii)(C), Examples 3, 4, 5, and 6
Central to the approach taken in the
2003 proposed regulations were the
concepts that controlled taxpayers have
substantial freedom to adopt contractual
terms, and that such contractual terms
are given effect under section 482,
provided they are in accord with the
economic substance of the controlled
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
44478
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
parties’ dealings. An important corollary
of these principles, however, applies
where controlled parties fail to specify
contractual terms, or specify terms that
are not consistent with economic
substance. In such cases, the
Commissioner may impute contractual
terms to accord with the economic
substance of the controlled parties’
activities. See § 1.482–1(d)(3) of the
existing regulations.
Commentators raised several concerns
regarding the potential interaction
between the economic substance rules
in existing § 1.482–1(d)(3) and certain
provisions in the 2003 proposed
regulations, including those relating to
contributions to the value of intangibles
and contingent-payment contractual
terms. Some commentators suggested
that application of these provisions
together with the existing economic
substance rules could create incentives
for the Commissioner to make
inappropriate adjustments, e.g., to
impute contingent-payment terms or
transfers of intangibles in any situation
in which non-arm’s length pricing was
identified.
It bears emphasis that the
Commissioner may invoke his authority
under § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii) in only two
situations: (1) Controlled taxpayers fail
to specify contractual terms for the
transaction; or (2) controlled taxpayers
specify contractual terms that are not in
accordance with economic substance.
Clearly, if contributions within the
meaning of § 1.482–4T(f)(4)(i) are
present, the contractual terms of the
controlled transaction should address
those contributions in a manner that
accords with economic substance. If this
is not the case, the Commissioner must
impute an arrangement that best
conforms to the economic substance of
the transaction. In given facts and
circumstances, it may be possible to rely
on evidence that the taxpayer brings
forward. In other circumstances, the
Commissioner will impute an
arrangement based on economic
substance, taking into account the facts
and circumstances, the parties’ conduct,
and other relevant evidence, including
any that the taxpayer brings forward on
examination. See Example 3, Example
4, and Example 6 in § 1.482–
1T(d)(3)(ii)(C).
In response to comments, § 1.482–
1T(d)(3)(ii)(C) includes a new Example
5, which illustrates the interaction of
the economic substance rule with
general transfer pricing rules in the
context of intangible development
activities. In the example, the
contractual terms specify that intangible
development activities are priced by
reference to reimbursement of specified
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
costs plus a markup or profit
component. On examination, the
Commissioner determines that the
specified compensation falls outside the
arm’s length range, as determined by
comparison to uncontrolled
transactions. The example illustrates
that this determination, without more,
does not support a conclusion that the
contractual terms lacked economic
substance. If, however, the
compensation paid is outside the arm’s
length range by a substantial amount,
the Commissioner may take that fact
into account in determining whether the
contractual arrangement as a whole
possessed economic substance.
The examples in § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(C)
of the 2003 proposed regulations
described alternative constructions that
the Commissioner might adopt if the
contractual terms for the controlled
transaction were not in accordance with
economic substance: These alternatives
included: (1) Imputation of a separate
services arrangement, with contingentpayment terms; (2) imputation of a longterm, exclusive distribution
arrangement; or (3) requiring
compensation for termination of an
imputed long-term license arrangement.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that one or more of these
arrangements may be appropriate,
depending on the facts of the specific
case.
Commentators expressed concerns
regarding the scope of the
Commissioner’s authority to impute
arrangements based on economic
substance. Some commentators
suggested that a single set of contractual
terms should apply in any situation
where the Commissioner determines
that the controlled parties’ contractual
terms lack economic substance. Another
commentator recommended that the
Commissioner should impute only
contractual terms similar to those
observed in comparable uncontrolled
transactions. After much consideration,
the Treasury Department and the IRS
have not adopted these comments. The
determination of the economic
substance of a transaction between
related parties necessarily turns on an
examination of all the facts and
circumstances. Under the regulations,
the taxpayer is in control of this issue
in the first instance to the extent it
expressly sets forth the economic
substance in contractual terms and its
conduct and arrangements are
consistent with these terms. Otherwise,
the IRS is forced to try and impute the
economic substance based on whatever
facts and circumstances are available,
including any information the taxpayer
brings forward on examination.
PO 00000
Frm 00014
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Commentators also suggested that
under the 2003 proposed regulations,
the Commissioner’s authority to impute
contingent-payment contractual terms
was unnecessarily broad. In the
commentators’ view, this authority
would lead the Commissioner to apply
commensurate with income principles
to controlled transactions that have no
significant intangible property
component. The Commissioner’s
authority to impute contingent-payment
contractual terms was appropriately
tailored to result in application of
economic substance principles in those
situations where it was warranted. The
Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that the commensurate with
income principle of the statute is
consistent with the arm’s length
principle and fundamentally relates to
the underlying economic substance and
true risk allocations inherent in the
relevant controlled transactions. Related
parties may, with economic substance,
agree to compensate one another for
services with compensation payable
only in future periods contingent on the
success or failure of the services to
produce the contemplated results.
Related parties may expressly enter into
those contractual terms and, in the
absence of express terms or where the
related parties’ conduct and
arrangements are inconsistent with their
contractual terms, the IRS may in
appropriate facts and circumstances
impute contingent-payment contractual
terms.
D. Stewardship Expenses—§ 1.861–8T
The temporary regulations would
modify the present regulations under
§ 1.861–8(e)(4) to conform to, and to be
consistent with, the revised language
relating to controlled services
transactions as set forth in § 1.482–9T(l).
E. Effective Date—§ 1.482–9T(n)
In order to achieve the goal of
updating the 1968 regulations, while
facilitating consideration of further
public input in refining final rules,
these regulations are issued in
temporary form with a delayed effective
date for taxable years beginning after
December 31, 2006. Controlled
taxpayers may also elect to apply these
temporary regulations to any taxable
year beginning after September 10,
2003, the date of publication of the 2003
proposed regulations. Where such an
election is made, the temporary
regulations will apply in full to such
taxable year and all subsequent taxable
years of the taxpayer making the
election. Such an election must be made
by attaching a statement to the
taxpayer’s timely filed U.S. tax return
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
(including extensions) for its first
taxable year after December 31, 2006.
These regulations are issued after
proposed revisions to the regulations
pertaining to cost sharing arrangements.
By issuing regulations in temporary and
proposed form concerning controlled
services and the allocation of income
from intangibles, the Treasury
Department and the IRS also provide
taxpayers an opportunity to submit
comments that take into account the
potential interaction between these two
sets of regulations.
The initial list of specified covered
services for purposes of the SCM is
being issued for public input in the form
of an Announcement in tandem with
these temporary regulations. This
Announcement will be published in the
Internal Revenue Bulletin. For copies of
the Internal Revenue Bulletin, see
§ 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b). The Treasury
Department and the IRS intend to take
all public comments into account and
issue a final revenue procedure that will
be effective coincident with the delayed
effective date of these temporary
regulations.
Special Analyses
It has been determined that this
Treasury decision is not a significant
regulatory action as defined in
Executive Order 12866. Therefore, a
regulatory assessment is not required. It
also has been determined that section
553(b) of the Administrative Procedure
Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 5) does not apply
to these regulations. For the
applicability of the Regulatory
Flexibility Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 6) refer
to the Special Analyses section of the
preamble to the cross-reference notice of
proposed rulemaking published in the
Proposed Rules section in this issue of
the Federal Register. Pursuant to
section 7805(f) of the Internal Revenue
Code, these temporary regulations will
be submitted to the Chief Counsel for
Advocacy of the Small Business
Administration for comment on their
impact on small business.
26 CFR Part 31
Employment taxes, Income taxes,
Penalties, Pensions, Railroad retirement,
Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements, Social Security and
Unemployment compensation.
Amendment to the Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
*
*
*
*
Paragraph 1. The authority citation
for part 1 is amended by adding an entry
in numerical order to read in part as
follows:
(j) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–1T(j).
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *
Section 1.482–9 also issued under 26
U.S.C. 482. * * *
*
I
I Par. 2. Section 1.482–0 is amended as
follows:
I 1. The section heading is revised.
I 2. The entries for 1.482–1(a)(1),
(b)(2)(i), (d)(3)(ii)(C), (d)(3)(v),
(f)(2)(ii)(A), (f)(2)(ii)(B), (g)(4)(iii), (i) and
(j) are revised.
I 3. The entries for § 1.482–2(b) are
revised.
I 4. The entries for § 1.482–4(f)(3), (f)(4)
and (f)(5) are revised and new entries for
§ 1.482–4(f)(6) and (f)(7) are added.
I 5. The entries for 1.482–
6(c)(2)(ii)(B)(1), (c)(2)(ii)(D), (c)(3)(i)(A),
(c)(3)(i)(B) and (c)(3)(ii)(D) are revised
and the entry for 1.482–6(d) is added.
I 6. The entry for 1.482–8(a) is revised.
I 7. The entries for 1.482–9 are added.
The additions and revisions read as
follows:
§ 1.482–0 Outline of regulations under
section 482.
*
*
*
*
*
§ 1.482–1 Allocation of income and
deductions among taxpayers.
(a)(1) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–1T(a)(1).
*
*
*
*
*
(b) * * *
(2) * * *
(i) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–1T(b)(2)(i).
(d) * * *
(3) * * *
(ii) * * *
(C) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
1T(d)(3)(ii)(C).
(v) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–1T(d)(3)(v).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
*
(g) * * *
(4) * * *
(iii) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–1T(g)(4)(iii).
PART 1—INCOME TAXES
*
Income taxes, Reporting and
recordkeeping requirements.
*
*
The principal authors of these
regulations are Thomas A. Vidano and
Carol B. Tan, Office of Associate Chief
Counsel (International) for matters
relating to section 482, and David
Bergkuist, Office of Associate Chief
Counsel (International) for matters
relating to stewardship.
26 CFR Part 1
(iii) * * *
(B) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
1T(f)(2)(iii)(B).
Accordingly, 26 CFR parts 1 and 31
are amended as follows:
I
Drafting Information
List of Subjects
44479
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
(A) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
1T(f)(2)(ii)(A).
PO 00000
Frm 00015
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
*
*
*
*
(i) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–1T(i).
*
*
*
*
§ 1.482–2 Determination of taxable income
in specific situations.
*
*
*
*
(b) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–2T(b).
*
*
*
*
*
§ 1.482–4 Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a transfer of
intangible property.
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(3) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–4T(f)(3).
(4) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–4T(f)(4).
(5) Consideration not artificially limited.
(6) Lump sum payments
(i) In general.
(ii) Exceptions.
(iii) Example.
(7) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–4T(f)(7).
§ 1.482–6
Profit split method.
*
*
*
*
*
(c) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
(B) * * *
(1) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
6T(c)(2)(ii)(B)(1).
*
*
*
*
*
(D) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
6T(c)(2)(ii)(D).
(3) * * *
(i) * * *
(A) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
6T(c)(3)(i)(A).
(B) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
6T(c)(3)(i)(B).
(ii) * * *
(D) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
6T(c)(3)(ii)(D).
*
*
*
*
*
(d) Effective date. [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–0T, the entry for
§ 1.482–6T(d).
§ 1.482–8 Examples of the best method
rule.
(a) Introduction.
*
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
*
*
04AUR3
*
*
44480
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
(3) Expiration date.
§ 1.482–9 Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a controlled
services transaction. [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–0T, the
entries for § 1.482–9T.
§ 1.482–4T Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a transfer of
intangible property.
I Par. 3. Section 1.482–0T is added to
read as follows:
§ 1.482–0T Outline of regulations under
section 482.
This section contains major captions
for §§ 1.482–1T, 1.482–2T, 1.482–4T,
1.482–6T, 1.482–8T, and § 1.482–9T.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
§ 1.482–1T Allocation of income and
deductions among taxpayers.
(a) In general.
(1) Purpose and scope.
(2) through (b)(1) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–1(a)(2) through (b)(1).
(b)(2) Arm’s length methods.
(i) Methods.
(b)(2)(ii) through (d)(3)(ii)(B) [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry
for § 1.482–1(b)(2)(ii) through (c)(3)(ii)(B).
(C) Examples.
(d)(3)(iii) and (iv) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–1(d)(3)(iii) and (iv).
(v) Property or services.
(d)(4) through (f)(2)(i) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–1(d)(4) through (f)(2)(i).
(ii) Allocation based on taxpayer’s actual
transactions.
(A) In general.
(f)(2)(ii)(B) through (f)(2)(iii)(A) [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry
for § 1.482–1(f)(2)(ii)(B) through (f)(2)(iii)(A).
(B) Circumstances warranting
consideration of multiple year data.
(f)(2)(iii)(C) through (g)(3) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–1(f)(2)(iii)(C) through (g)(3).
(4) Setoffs.
(i) In general.
(g)(4)(ii) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–0, the entry for § 1.482–1(g)(4)(ii).
(iii) Examples.
(g)(4)(iii) Example 2 through (h) [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry
for § 1.482–1(g)(4)(iii) Example 2 through (h).
(i) Definitions.
(i)(1) through (10) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–1(i)(1) through (10).
(j) Effective date.
(1) In general.
(2) Election to apply regulation to earlier
years.
(3) Expiration date.
§ 1.482–2T Determination of taxable
income in specific situations.
(a) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0, the entry for § 1.482–2(a).
(b) Rendering of services.
(c) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0, the entry for § 1.482–2(c).
(d) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0, the entry for § 1.482–2(d).
(e) Effective date.
(1) In general.
(2) Election to apply regulation to earlier
years.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
(a) through (f)(2) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–4(a) through (f)(2).
(3) Ownership of intangible property.
(i) Identification of owner.
(A) In general.
(B) Cost sharing arrangements.
(ii) Examples.
(4) Contribution to the value of an
intangible owned by another.
(i) In general.
(ii) Examples.
(f)(5) and (f)(6) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–4(f)(5) and (f)(6).
(7) Effective date.
(i) In general.
(ii) Election to apply regulation to earlier
years.
(iii) Expiration date.
§ 1.482–6T
Profit split method.
(a) through (c)(2)(ii)(A) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–6(a) through (c)(2)(ii)(A).
(B) Comparability.
(1) In general.
(c)(2)(ii)(B)(2) through (C) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–6(c)(2)(ii)(B)(2) through (C).
(D) Other factors affecting reliability.
(c)(3)(i) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–0, the entry for § 1.482–6(c)(3)(i).
(A) Allocate income to routine
contributions.
(B) Allocate residual profit.
(1) Nonroutine contributions generally.
(2) Nonroutine contributions of intangible
property.
(c)(3)(ii)(A) through (C) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entry for
§ 1.482–6(c)(3)(ii)(A) through (C).
(D) Other factors affecting reliability.
(c)(3)(iii) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–0, the entry for § 1.482–
6(c)(3)(iii).
(d) Effective date.
(1) In general.
(2) Election to apply regulation to earlier
taxable years.
(3) Expiration date.
§ 1.482–8T Examples of the best method
rule.
(a) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0, the entry for § 1.482–8(a).
(b) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–0, the entry for § 1.482–8(b)
(c) Effective date.
(1) In general.
(2) Election to apply regulation to earlier
taxable years.
(3) Expiration date.
§ 1.482–9T Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a controlled
services transaction.
(a) In general.
(b) Services cost method
(1) In general.
PO 00000
Frm 00016
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(2) Not services that contribute
significantly to fundamental risks of business
success or failure.
(3) Other conditions on application of
services cost method.
(i) Adequate books and records.
(ii) Excluded transactions.
(4) Covered services.
(i) Specified covered services.
(ii) Low margin covered services.
(5) Shared services arrangement.
(i) In general.
(ii) Requirements for shared services
arrangement.
(A) Eligibility.
(B) Allocation.
(C) Documentation.
(iii) Definition and special rules.
(A) Participant.
(B) Aggregation.
(C) Coordination with cost sharing
arrangements.
(6) Examples.
(c) Comparable uncontrolled services price
method.
(1) In general.
(2) Comparability and reliability
considerations.
(i) In general.
(ii) Comparability.
(A) In general.
(B) Adjustments for differences between
controlled and uncontrolled transactions.
(iii) Data and assumptions.
(3) Arm’s length range.
(4) Examples.
(5) Indirect evidence of the price of a
comparable uncontrolled services
transaction.
(i) In general.
(ii) Example.
(d) Gross services margin method.
(1) In general.
(2) Determination of arm’s length price.
(i) In general.
(ii) Relevant uncontrolled transaction.
(iii) Applicable uncontrolled price.
(iv) Appropriate gross services profit.
(v) Arm’s length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability
considerations.
(i) In general.
(ii) Comparability.
(A) Functional comparability.
(B) Other comparability factors.
(C) Adjustments for differences between
controlled and uncontrolled transactions.
(D) Buy-sell distributor.
(iii) Data and assumptions.
(A) In general.
(B) Consistency in accounting.
(4) Examples.
(e) Cost of services plus method.
(1) In general.
(2) Determination of arm’s length price.
(i) In general.
(ii) Appropriate gross services profit.
(iii) Comparable transactional costs.
(iv) Arm’s length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability
considerations.
(i) In general.
(ii) Comparability.
(A) Functional comparability.
(B) Other comparability factors.
(C) Adjustments for differences between
the controlled and uncontrolled transactions.
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
(iii) Data and assumptions.
(A) In general.
(B) Consistency in accounting.
(4) Examples.
(f) Comparable profits method.
(1) In general.
(2) Determination of arm’s length result.
(i) Tested party.
(ii) Profit level indicators.
(iii) Comparability and reliability
considerations—Data and assumptions—
Consistency in accounting.
(3) Examples.
(g) Profit split method.
(1) In general.
(2) Examples.
(h) Unspecified methods.
(i) Contingent-payment contractual terms
for services.
(1) Contingent-payment contractual terms
recognized in general.
(2) Contingent-payment arrangement.
(i) General Requirements
(A) Written contract.
(B) Specified contingency.
(C) Basis for payment.
(ii) Economic Substance and Conduct
(3) Commissioner’s authority to impute
contingent-payment terms.
(4) Evaluation of arm’s length charge.
(5) Examples.
(j) Total services costs.
(k) Allocation of costs.
(1) In general.
(2) Appropriate method of allocation and
apportionment.
(i) Reasonable method standard.
(ii) Use of general practices.
(3) Examples.
(l) Controlled services transaction.
(1) In general.
(2) Activity.
(3) Benefit.
(i) In general.
(ii) Indirect or remote benefit.
(iii) Duplicative activities.
(iv) Shareholder activities.
(v) Passive association.
(4) Disaggregation of Transactions
(5) Examples.
(m) Coordination with transfer pricing
rules for other transactions.
(1) Services transactions that include other
types of transactions.
(2) Services transactions that effect a
transfer of intangible property.
(3) Services subject to a qualified cost
sharing arrangement.
(4) Other types of transactions that include
controlled services transactions.
(5) Examples.
(n) Effective date.
(1) In general.
(2) Election to apply regulations to earlier
taxable years.
(3) Expiration date.
I Par. 4. Section 1.482–1 is amended as
follows:
I 1. Paragraphs (a)(1), (b)(2)(i),
(d)(3)(ii)(C) Example 3, (d)(3)(v),
(f)(2)(ii)(A), (f)(2)(iii)(B), (g)(4)(i),
(g)(4)(iii) and paragraph (i) are revised.
I 2. Paragraph (d)(3)(ii)(C) Examples 4
through 6 are added.
I 3. Paragraph (j)(6) is added.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
The addition and revisions read as
follows:
§ 1.482–1 Allocation of income and
deductions among taxpayers.
(a)(1) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–1T(a)(1).
*
*
*
*
*
(b) * * * (1) * * *
(b)(2)(i) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–1T(b)(2)(i).
*
*
*
*
*
(d) * * *
(3) * * *
(ii) * * *
(C) * * *
Example 3. [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–1T(d)(3)(ii)(C),
Example 3.
Examples 4 through 6. [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see 1.482–
1T(d)(3)(ii)(C) Examples 4 through 6.
*
*
*
*
*
(v) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–1T(d)(3)(v).
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii)(A) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–1T(f)(2)(ii)(A).
*
*
*
*
*
(iii) * * *
(B) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–1T(f)(3)(iii)(B).
*
*
*
*
*
(g) * * *
(4) * * * (i) * * * [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–1T(g)(4)(i).
(iii) * * *
Example 1. [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–1T(g)(4)(iii),
Example 1.
*
*
*
*
*
(i) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–1T(i).
(j) * * *
(6) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–1T(j)(6).
Par. 5. Section 1.482–1T is added to
read as follows:
§ 1.482–1T Allocation of income and
deductions among taxpayers (temporary).
(a) In general—(1) Purpose and scope.
The purpose of section 482 is to ensure
that taxpayers clearly reflect income
attributable to controlled transactions
and to prevent the avoidance of taxes
with respect to such transactions.
Section 482 places a controlled taxpayer
on a tax parity with an uncontrolled
taxpayer by determining the true taxable
income of the controlled taxpayer. This
section sets forth general principles and
guidelines to be followed under section
482. Section 1.482–2 provides rules for
the determination of the true taxable
income of controlled taxpayers in
PO 00000
Frm 00017
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44481
specific situations, including controlled
transactions involving loans or advances
or the use of tangible property. Sections
1.482–3 through 1.482–6 provide rules
for the determination of the true taxable
income of controlled taxpayers in cases
involving the transfer of property.
Section 1.482–7T sets forth the cost
sharing provisions applicable to taxable
years beginning on or after October 6,
1994, and before January 1, 1996.
Section 1.482–7 sets forth the cost
sharing provisions applicable to taxable
years beginning on or after January 1,
1996. Section 1.482–8 provides
examples illustrating the application of
the best method rule. Finally, § 1.482–
9T provides rules for the determination
of the true taxable income of controlled
taxpayers in cases involving the
performance of services.
(a)(2) through (b)(1) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–1(a)(2)
through (b)(1).
(b)(2) Arm’s length methods—(i)
Methods. Sections 1.482–2 through
1.482–6 and § 1.482–9T provide specific
methods to be used to evaluate whether
transactions between or among members
of the controlled group satisfy the arm’s
length standard and, if they do not, to
determine the arm’s length result.
Section 1.482–7 provides the specific
method to be used to evaluate whether
a qualified cost sharing arrangement
produces results consistent with an
arm’s length result.
(b)(2)(ii) through (d)(3)(ii)(C),
Examples 1, and 2 [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–1(b)(2)(ii)
through (d)(3)(ii)(C), Examples 1 and 2.
Example 3. Contractual terms imputed
from economic substance. (i) FP, a foreign
producer of wristwatches, is the registered
holder of the YY trademark in the United
States and in other countries worldwide. In
year 1, FP enters the United States market by
selling YY wristwatches to its newly
organized United States subsidiary, USSub,
for distribution in the United States market.
USSub pays FP a fixed price per wristwatch.
USSub and FP undertake, without separate
compensation, marketing activities to
establish the YY trademark in the United
States market. Unrelated foreign producers of
trademarked wristwatches and their
authorized United States distributors
respectively undertake similar marketing
activities in independent arrangements
involving distribution of trademarked
wristwatches in the United States market. In
years 1 through 6, USSub markets and sells
YY wristwatches in the United States.
Further, in years 1 through 6, USSub
undertakes incremental marketing activities
in addition to the activities similar to those
observed in the independent distribution
transactions in the United States market. FP
does not directly or indirectly compensate
USSub for performing these incremental
activities during years 1 through 6. Assume
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
44482
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
that, aside from these incremental activities,
and after any adjustments are made to
improve the reliability of the comparison, the
price paid per wristwatch by the
independent, authorized distributors of
wristwatches would provide the most
reliable measure of the arm’s length price
paid per YY wristwatch by USSub.
(ii) By year 7, the wristwatches with the
YY trademark generate a premium return in
the United States market, as compared to
wristwatches marketed by the independent
distributors. In year 7, substantially all the
premium return from the YY trademark in
the United States market is attributed to FP,
for example through an increase in the price
paid per watch by USSub, or by some other
means.
(iii) In determining whether an allocation
of income is appropriate in year 7, the
Commissioner may consider the economic
substance of the arrangements between
USSub and FP, and the parties’ course of
conduct throughout their relationship. Based
on this analysis, the Commissioner
determines that it is unlikely that, ex ante, an
uncontrolled taxpayer operating at arm’s
length would engage in the incremental
marketing activities to develop or enhance an
intangible owned by another party unless it
received contemporaneous compensation or
otherwise had a reasonable anticipation of
receiving a future benefit from those
activities. In this case, USSub’s undertaking
the incremental marketing activities in years
1 through 6 is a course of conduct that is
inconsistent with the parties’ attribution to
FP in year 7 of substantially all the premium
return from the enhanced YY trademark in
the United States market. Therefore, the
Commissioner may impute one or more
agreements between USSub and FP,
consistent with the economic substance of
their course of conduct, which would afford
USSub an appropriate portion of the
premium return from the YY trademark
wristwatches. For example, the
Commissioner may impute a separate
services agreement that affords USSub
contingent-payment compensation for its
incremental marketing activities in years 1
through 6, which benefited FP by
contributing to the value of the trademark
owned by FP. In the alternative, the
Commissioner may impute a long-term,
exclusive agreement to exploit the YY
trademark in the United States that allows
USSub to benefit from the incremental
marketing activities it performed. As another
alternative, the Commissioner may require
FP to compensate USSub for terminating
USSub’s imputed long-term, exclusive
agreement to exploit the YY trademark in the
United States, an agreement that USSub
made more valuable at its own expense and
risk. The taxpayer may present additional
facts that could indicate which of these or
other alternative agreements best reflects the
economic substance of the underlying
transactions, consistent with the parties’
course of conduct in the particular case.
Example 4. Contractual terms imputed
from economic substance. (i) FP, a foreign
producer of athletic gear, is the registered
holder of the AA trademark in the United
States and in other countries worldwide. In
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
year 1, FP enters into a licensing agreement
that affords its newly organized United States
subsidiary, USSub, exclusive rights to certain
manufacturing and marketing intangibles
(including the AA trademark) for purposes of
manufacturing and marketing athletic gear in
the United States under the AA trademark.
The contractual terms of this agreement
obligate USSub to pay FP a royalty based on
sales, and also obligate both FP and USSub
to undertake without separate compensation
specified types and levels of marketing
activities. Unrelated foreign businesses
license independent United States businesses
to manufacture and market athletic gear in
the United States, using trademarks owned
by the unrelated foreign businesses. The
contractual terms of these uncontrolled
transactions require the licensees to pay
royalties based on sales of the merchandise,
and obligate the licensors and licensees to
undertake without separate compensation
specified types and levels of marketing
activities. In years 1 through 6, USSub
manufactures and sells athletic gear under
the AA trademark in the United States.
Assume that, after adjustments are made to
improve the reliability of the comparison for
any material differences relating to marketing
activities, manufacturing or marketing
intangibles, and other comparability factors,
the royalties paid by independent licensees
would provide the most reliable measure of
the arm’s length royalty owed by USSub to
FP, apart from the additional facts in
paragraph (ii) of this example.
(ii) In years 1 through 6, USSub performs
incremental marketing activities with respect
to the AA trademark athletic gear, in addition
to the activities required under the terms of
the license agreement with FP, that are also
incremental as compared to those observed
in the comparables. FP does not directly or
indirectly compensate USSub for performing
these incremental activities during years 1
through 6. By year 7, AA trademark athletic
gear generates a premium return in the
United States, as compared to similar athletic
gear marketed by independent licensees. In
year 7, USSub and FP enter into a separate
services agreement under which FP agrees to
compensate USSub on a cost basis for the
incremental marketing activities that USSub
performed during years 1 through 6, and to
compensate USSub on a cost basis for any
incremental marketing activities it may
perform in year 7 and subsequent years. In
addition, the parties revise the license
agreement executed in year 1, and increase
the royalty to a level that attributes to FP
substantially all the premium return from
sales of the AA trademark athletic gear in the
United States.
(iii) In determining whether an allocation
of income is appropriate in year 7, the
Commissioner may consider the economic
substance of the arrangements between
USSub and FP and the parties’ course of
conduct throughout their relationship. Based
on this analysis, the Commissioner
determines that it is unlikely that, ex ante, an
uncontrolled taxpayer operating at arm’s
length would engage in the incremental
marketing activities to develop or enhance an
intangible owned by another party unless it
received contemporaneous compensation or
PO 00000
Frm 00018
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
otherwise had a reasonable anticipation of a
future benefit. In this case, USSub’s
undertaking the incremental marketing
activities in years 1 through 6 is a course of
conduct that is inconsistent with the parties’
adoption in year 7 of contractual terms by
which FP compensates USSub on a cost basis
for the incremental marketing activities that
it performed. Therefore, the Commissioner
may impute one or more agreements between
USSub and FP, consistent with the economic
substance of their course of conduct, which
would afford USSub an appropriate portion
of the premium return from the AA
trademark athletic gear. For example, the
Commissioner may impute a separate
services agreement that affords USSub
contingent-payment compensation for the
incremental activities it performed during
years 1 through 6, which benefited FP by
contributing to the value of the trademark
owned by FP. In the alternative, the
Commissioner may impute a long-term,
exclusive United States license agreement
that allows USSub to benefit from the
incremental activities. As another alternative,
the Commissioner may require FP to
compensate USSub for terminating USSub’s
imputed long-term United States license
agreement, a license that USSub made more
valuable at its own expense and risk. The
taxpayer may present additional facts that
could indicate which of these or other
alternative agreements best reflects the
economic substance of the underlying
transactions, consistent with the parties’
course of conduct in this particular case.
Example 5. Non-arm’s length
compensation. (i) The facts are the same as
in paragraph (i) of Example 4. As in Example
4, assume that, after adjustments are made to
improve the reliability of the comparison for
any material differences relating to marketing
activities, manufacturing or marketing
intangibles, and other comparability factors,
the royalties paid by independent licensees
would provide the most reliable measure of
the arm’s length royalty owed by USSub to
FP, apart from the additional facts described
in paragraph (ii) of this example.
(ii) In years 1 through 4, USSub performs
certain incremental marketing activities with
respect to the AA trademark athletic gear, in
addition to the activities required under the
terms of the basic license agreement, that are
also incremental as compared with those
activities observed in the comparables. At the
start of year 1, FP enters into a separate
services agreement with USSub, which states
that FP will compensate USSub quarterly, in
an amount equal to specified costs plus X%,
for these incremental marketing functions.
Further, these written agreements reflect the
intent of the parties that USSub receive such
compensation from FP throughout the term
of the agreement, without regard to the
success or failure of the promotional
activities. During years 1 though 4, USSub
performs marketing activities pursuant to the
separate services agreement and in each year
USSub receives the specified compensation
from FP on a cost of services plus basis.
(iii) In evaluating year 4, the Commissioner
performs an analysis of independent parties
that perform promotional activities
comparable to those performed by USSub
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
and that receive separately-stated
compensation on a current basis without
contingency. The Commissioner determines
that the magnitude of the specified cost plus
X% is outside the arm’s length range in each
of years 1 through 4. Based on an evaluation
of all the facts and circumstances, the
Commissioner makes an allocation to require
payment of compensation to USSub for the
promotional activities performed in year 4,
based on the median of the interquartile
range of the arm’s length markups charged by
the uncontrolled comparables described in
§ 1.482–1(e)(3).
(iv) Given that based on facts and
circumstances, the terms agreed by the
controlled parties were that FP would bear
all risks associated with the promotional
activities performed by USSub to promote
the AA trademark product in the United
States market, and given that the parties’
conduct during the years examined was
consistent with this allocation of risk, the fact
that the cost of services plus markup on
USSub’s services was outside the arm’s
length range does not, without more, support
imputation of additional contractual terms
based on alternative views of the economic
substance of the transaction, such as terms
indicating that USSub, rather than FP, bore
the risk associated with these activities. In
other facts and circumstances, had the
compensation paid to USSub been
significantly outside the arm’s length range,
that might lead the Commissioner to examine
further whether, despite the contractual
terms that require cost-plus reimbursement of
USSub, the economic substance of the
transaction was not consistent with FP’s
bearing the risk associated with promotional
activities in the United States market.
Example 6. Contractual terms imputed
from economic substance. (i) Company X is
a member of a controlled group that has been
in operation in the pharmaceutical sector for
many years. In years 1 through 4, Company
X undertakes research and development
activities. As a result of those activities,
Company X developed a compound that may
be more effective than existing medications
in the treatment of certain conditions.
(ii) Company Y is acquired in year 4 by the
controlled group that includes Company X.
Once Company Y is acquired, Company X
makes available to Company Y a large
amount of technical data concerning the new
compound, which Company Y uses to
register patent rights with respect to the
compound in several jurisdictions, making
Company Y the legal owner of such patents.
Company Y then enters into licensing
agreements with group members that afford
Company Y 100% of the premium return
attributable to use of the intangible by its
subsidiaries.
(iii) In determining whether an allocation
is appropriate in year 4, the Commissioner
may consider the economic substance of the
arrangements between Company X and
Company Y, and the parties’ course of
conduct throughout their relationship. Based
on this analysis, the Commissioner
determines that it is unlikely that an
uncontrolled taxpayer operating at arm’s
length would make available the results of its
research and development or perform
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
services that resulted in transfer of valuable
know how to another party unless it received
contemporaneous compensation or otherwise
had a reasonable anticipation of receiving a
future benefit from those activities. In this
case, Company X’s undertaking the research
and development activities and then
providing technical data and know-how to
Company Y in year 4 is inconsistent with the
registration and subsequent exploitation of
the patent by Company Y. Therefore, the
Commissioner may impute one or more
agreements between Company X and
Company Y consistent with the economic
substance of their course of conduct, which
would afford Company X an appropriate
portion of the premium return from the
patent rights. For example, the Commissioner
may impute a separate services agreement
that affords Company X contingent-payment
compensation for its services in year 4 for the
benefit of Company Y, consisting of making
available to Company Y technical data,
know-how, and other fruits of research and
development conducted in previous years.
These services benefited Company Y by
giving rise to and contributing to the value
of the patent rights that were ultimately
registered by Company Y. In the alternative,
the Commissioner may impute a transfer of
patentable intangible rights from Company X
to Company Y immediately preceding the
registration of patent rights by Company Y.
The taxpayer may present additional facts
that could indicate which of these or other
alternative agreements best reflects the
economic substance of the underlying
transactions, consistent with the parties’
course of conduct in the particular case.
(d)(3)(iii) and (iv) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–1(d)(3)(iii)
and (d)(3)(iv).
(d)(3)(v) Property or services.
Evaluating the degree of comparability
between controlled and uncontrolled
transactions requires a comparison of
the property or services transferred in
the transactions. This comparison may
include any intangibles that are
embedded in tangible property or
services being transferred. The
comparability of the embedded
intangibles will be analyzed using the
factors listed in § 1.482–4(c)(2)(iii)(B)(1)
(comparable intangible property). The
relevance of product comparability in
evaluating the relative reliability of the
results will depend on the method
applied. For guidance concerning the
specific comparability considerations
applicable to transfers of tangible and
intangible property and performance of
services, see §§ 1.482–3 through 1.482–
6 and § 1.482–9T; see also § 1.482–3(f),
§ 1.482–4T(f)(4), and § 1.482–9T(m),
dealing with the coordination of the
intangible and tangible property and
performance of services rules.
(d)(4) through (f)(2)(i) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–1(d)(4)
through (f)(2)(i).
(f)(2)(ii) Allocation based on
taxpayer’s actual transactions—(A) In
PO 00000
Frm 00019
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44483
general. The Commissioner will
evaluate the results of a transaction as
actually structured by the taxpayer
unless its structure lacks economic
substance. However, the Commissioner
may consider the alternatives available
to the taxpayer in determining whether
the terms of the controlled transaction
would be acceptable to an uncontrolled
taxpayer faced with the same
alternatives and operating under
comparable circumstances. In such
cases the Commissioner may adjust the
consideration charged in the controlled
transaction based on the cost or profit of
an alternative as adjusted to account for
material differences between the
alternative and the controlled
transaction, but will not restructure the
transaction as if the alternative had been
adopted by the taxpayer. See § 1.482–
1(d)(3) (factors for determining
comparability; contractual terms and
risk); §§ 1.482–3(e), 1.482–4(d), and
1.482–9T(h) (unspecified methods).
(f)(2)(ii)(B) through (f)(2)(iii)(A)
[Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–1(f)(2)(ii)(B) through
(f)(2)(iii)(A).
(f)(2)(iii)(B) Circumstances warranting
consideration of multiple year data. The
extent to which it is appropriate to
consider multiple year data depends on
the method being applied and the issue
being addressed. Circumstances that
may warrant consideration of data from
multiple years include the extent to
which complete and accurate data are
available for the taxable year under
review, the effect of business cycles in
the controlled taxpayer’s industry, or
the effects of life cycles of the product
or intangible being examined. Data from
one or more years before or after the
taxable year under review must
ordinarily be considered for purposes of
applying the provisions of paragraph
(d)(3)(iii) of this section (risk),
paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section
(market share strategy), § 1.482–4(f)(2)
(periodic adjustments), § 1.482–5
(comparable profits method), § 1.482–
9T(f) (comparable profits method for
services), and § 1.482–9T(i) (contingentpayment contractual terms for services).
On the other hand, multiple year data
ordinarily will not be considered for
purposes of applying the comparable
uncontrolled price method of § 1.482–
3(b) or the comparable uncontrolled
services price method of § 1.482–9T(c)
(except to the extent that risk or market
share strategy issues are present).
(f)(2)(iii)(C) through (g)(3) [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–
1(f)(2)(iii)(C) through (g)(3).
(g)(4) Setoffs—(i) In general. If an
allocation is made under section 482
with respect to a transaction between
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44484
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
controlled taxpayers, the Commissioner
will take into account the effect of any
other non-arm’s length transaction
between the same controlled taxpayers
in the same taxable year which will
result in a setoff against the original
section 482 allocation. Such setoff,
however, will be taken into account
only if the requirements of paragraph
(g)(4)(ii) of this section are satisfied. If
the effect of the setoff is to change the
characterization or source of the income
or deductions, or otherwise distort
taxable income, in such a manner as to
affect the U.S. tax liability of any
member, adjustments will be made to
reflect the correct amount of each
category of income or deductions. For
purposes of this setoff provision, the
term arm’s length refers to the amount
defined in paragraph (b) of this section
(Arm’s length standard), without regard
to the rules in § 1.482–2(a) that treat
certain interest rates as arm’s length
rates of interest.
(g)(4)(ii) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–1(g)(4)(ii).
(g)(4)(iii) Examples. The following
examples illustrate this paragraph (g)(4):
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Example 1. P, a U.S. corporation, renders
construction services to S, its foreign
subsidiary in Country Y, in connection with
the construction of S’s factory. An arm’s
length charge for such services determined
under § 1.482–9T would be $100,000. During
the same taxable year P makes available to S
the use of a machine to be used in the
construction of the factory, and the arm’s
length rental value of the machine is $25,000.
P bills S $125,000 for the services, but does
not charge S for the use of the machine. No
allocation will be made with respect to the
undercharge for the machine if P notifies the
district director of the basis of the claimed
setoff within 30 days after the date of the
letter from the district director transmitting
the examination report notifying P of the
proposed adjustment, establishes that the
excess amount charged for services was equal
to an arm’s length charge for the use of the
machine and that the taxable income and
income tax liabilities of P are not distorted,
and documents the correlative allocations
resulting from the proposed setoff.
(g)(4)(iii) Example 2 through (h)
[Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–1(g)(4)(iii) Example 2 through
(h).
(i) Definitions. The definitions set
forth in paragraphs (i)(1) through (i)(10)
of this section apply to this section and
§§ 1.482–2T through 1.482–9T.
(j)(1) through (j)(5) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see 1.482–1(j)(1)
through (j)(5).
(j)(6)(i) The provisions of paragraphs
(a)(1), (b)(2)(i), (d)(3)(ii)(C) Example 3,
Example 4, Example 5, and Example 6,
(d)(3)(v), (f)(2)(ii)(A), (f)(2)(iii)(B),
(g)(4)(i), (g)(4)(iii), and (i) of this section
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
are generally applicable for taxable
years beginning after December 31,
2006.
(ii) A person may elect to apply the
provisions of paragraphs (a)(1), (b)(2)(i),
(d)(3)(ii)(C) Example 3, Example 4,
Example 5, and Example 6, (d)(3)(v),
(f)(2)(ii)(A), (f)(2)(iii)(B), (g)(4)(i),
(g)(4)(iii), and (i) of this section to
earlier taxable years in accordance with
the rules set forth in § 1.482–9T(n)(2).
(iii) The applicability of § 1.482–1T
expires on or before July 31, 2009.
I Par. 6. Section 1.482–2 is amended as
follows:
I 1. Paragraph (b) is revised.
I 2. Paragraph (e) is added.
The addition and revision read as
follows:
§ 1.482–2 Determination of taxable income
in specific situations.
*
*
*
*
*
(b) Rendering of services. [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–2T(b).
*
*
*
*
*
(e) Effective date. [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–2T(e).
I Par. 7. Section 1.482–2T is added to
read as follows:
§ 1.482–2T Determination of taxable
income in specific situations (temporary).
(a) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–2(a).
(b) Rendering of services. For rules
governing allocations under section 482
to reflect an arm’s length charge for
controlled transactions involving the
rendering of services, see § 1.482–9T.
(c) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–2(c).
(d) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–2(d).
(e) Effective date—(1) In general. The
provision of paragraph (b) of this section
is generally applicable for taxable years
beginning after December 31, 2006.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of paragraph (b)
of this section to earlier taxable years in
accordance with the rules set forth in
§ 1.482–9T(n)(2).
(3) Expiration date. The applicability
of § 1.482–2T expires on or before July
31, 2009.
I Par. 8. Section 1.482–4 is amended as
follows:
I 1. Paragraph (f)(3) is revised.
I 2. Paragraphs (f)(4) and (f)(5) are
redesignated as paragraphs (f)(5) and
(f)(6), respectively.
I 3. New paragraphs (f)(4) and (f)(7) are
added.
The revision and additions read as
follows:
PO 00000
Frm 00020
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
§ 1.482–4 Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a transfer of
intangible property.
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(3) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–4T(f)(3).
(4) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–4T(f)(4).
*
*
*
*
*
(7) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–4T(f)(7).
I Par. 9. Section 1.482–4T is added to
read as follows:
§ 1.482–4T Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a transfer of
intangible property (temporary).
(a) through (f)(2) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–4(a)
through (f)(2).
(f)(3) Ownership of intangible
property—(i) Identification of owner—
(A) In general. The legal owner of an
intangible pursuant to the intellectual
property law of the relevant jurisdiction,
or the holder of rights constituting an
intangible pursuant to contractual terms
(such as the terms of a license) or other
legal provision, will be considered the
sole owner of the respective intangible
for purposes of this section unless such
ownership is inconsistent with the
economic substance of the underlying
transactions. See § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B)
(identifying contractual terms). If no
owner of the respective intangible is
identified under the intellectual
property law of the relevant jurisdiction,
or pursuant to contractual terms
(including terms imputed pursuant to
§ 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B)) or other legal
provision, then the controlled taxpayer
who has control of the intangible, based
on all the facts and circumstances, will
be considered the sole owner of the
intangible for purposes of this section.
(B) Cost sharing arrangements. The
rule in paragraph (f)(3)(i)(A) of this
section will apply to interests in
covered intangibles, as defined in
§ 1.482–7(b)(4)(iv), only as provided in
§ 1.482–7 (sharing of costs).
(ii) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (f)(3) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. FP, a foreign corporation, is the
registered holder of the AA trademark in the
United States. FP licenses to its U.S.
subsidiary, USSub, the exclusive rights to
manufacture and market products in the
United States under the AA trademark. FP is
the owner of the trademark pursuant to
intellectual property law. USSub is the
owner of the license pursuant to the terms of
the license, but is not the owner of the
trademark. See paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of
this section (defining an intangible as, among
other things, a trademark or a license).
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
Example 2. The facts are the same as in
Example 1. As a result of its sales and
marketing activities, USSub develops a list of
several hundred creditworthy customers that
regularly purchase AA trademarked
products. Neither the terms of the contract
between FP and USSub nor the relevant
intellectual property law specify which party
owns the customer list. Because USSub has
knowledge of the contents of the list, and has
practical control over its use and
dissemination, USSub is considered the sole
owner of the customer list for purposes of
this paragraph (f)(3).
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
(4) Contribution to the value of an
intangible owned by another—(i) In
general. The arm’s length consideration
for a contribution by one controlled
taxpayer that develops or enhances the
value, or may be reasonably anticipated
to develop or enhance the value, of an
intangible owned by another controlled
taxpayer will be determined in
accordance with the applicable rules
under section 482. If the consideration
for such a contribution is embedded
within the contractual terms for a
controlled transaction that involves
such intangible, then ordinarily no
separate allocation will be made with
respect to such contribution. In such
cases, pursuant to § 1.482–1(d)(3), the
contribution must be accounted for in
evaluating the comparability of the
controlled transaction to uncontrolled
comparables, and accordingly in
determining the arm’s length
consideration in the controlled
transaction.
(ii) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (f)(4) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. A, a member of a controlled
group, allows B, another member of the
controlled group, to use tangible property,
such as laboratory equipment, in connection
with B’s development of an intangible that B
owns. By furnishing tangible property, A
makes a contribution to the development of
an intangible owned by another controlled
taxpayer, B. Pursuant to paragraph (f)(4)(i) of
this section, the arm’s length charge for A’s
furnishing of tangible property will be
determined under the rules for use of
tangible property in § 1.482–2(c).
Example 2. (i) Facts. FP, a foreign producer
of wristwatches, is the registered holder of
the YY trademark in the United States and
in other countries worldwide. FP enters into
an exclusive, five-year, renewable agreement
with its newly organized U.S. subsidiary,
USSub. The contractual terms of the
agreement grant USSub the exclusive right to
re-sell trademark YY wristwatches in the
United States, obligate USSub to pay a fixed
price per wristwatch throughout the entire
term of the contract, and obligate both FP and
USSub to undertake without separate
compensation specified types and levels of
marketing activities.
(ii) The consideration for FP’s and USSub’s
marketing activities, as well as the
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
consideration for the exclusive right to re-sell
YY trademarked merchandise in the United
States, are embedded in the transfer price
paid for the wristwatches. Accordingly,
pursuant to paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section,
ordinarily no separate allocation would be
appropriate with respect to these embedded
contributions.
(iii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to the transfer price for the
wristwatches is determined under §§ 1.482–
1, 1.482–3, and this section through § 1.482–
6. The comparability analysis would include
consideration of all relevant factors,
including the nature of the intangible
embedded in the wristwatches and the nature
of the marketing activities required under the
agreement. This analysis would also take into
account that the compensation for the
activities performed by USSub and FP, as
well as the consideration for USSub’s use of
the YY trademark, is embedded in the
transfer price for the wristwatches, rather
than provided for in separate agreements. See
§§ 1.482–3(f) and 1.482–9T(m)(4).
Example 3. (i) Facts. FP, a foreign producer
of athletic gear, is the registered holder of the
AA trademark in the United States and in
other countries. In year 1, FP licenses to a
newly organized U.S. subsidiary, USSub, the
exclusive rights to use certain manufacturing
and marketing intangibles to manufacture
and market athletic gear in the United States
under the AA trademark. The license
agreement obligates USSub to pay a royalty
based on sales of trademarked merchandise.
The license agreement also obligates FP and
USSub to perform without separate
compensation specified types and levels of
marketing activities. In year 1, USSub
manufactures and sells athletic gear under
the AA trademark in the United States.
(ii) The consideration for FP’s and USSub’s
respective marketing activities is embedded
in the contractual terms of the license for the
AA trademark. Accordingly, pursuant to
paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section, ordinarily
no separate allocation would be appropriate
with respect to the embedded contributions
in year 1. See § 1.482–9T(m)(4).
(iii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to the royalty under the license
agreement would be analyzed under § 1.482–
1 and this section through § 1.482–6. The
comparability analysis would include
consideration of all relevant factors, such as
the term and geographical exclusivity of the
license, the nature of the intangibles subject
to the license, and the nature of the
marketing activities required to be
undertaken pursuant to the license. Pursuant
to paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section, the
analysis would also take into account the fact
that the compensation for the marketing
services is embedded in the royalty paid for
use of the AA trademark, rather than
provided for in a separate services agreement.
For illustrations of application of the best
method rule, see § 1.482–8T Example 10,
Example 11, and Example 12.
Example 4. (i) Facts. The year 1 facts are
the same as in Example 3, with the following
exceptions. In year 2, USSub undertakes
certain incremental marketing activities, in
addition to those required by the contractual
terms of the license for the AA trademark
PO 00000
Frm 00021
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44485
executed in year 1. The parties do not
execute a separate agreement with respect to
these incremental marketing activities
performed by USSub The license agreement
executed in year 1 is of sufficient duration
that it is reasonable to anticipate that USSub
will obtain the benefit of its incremental
activities, in the form of increased sales or
revenues of trademarked products in the U.S.
market.
(ii) To the extent that it was reasonable to
anticipate that USSub’s incremental
marketing activities would increase the value
only of USSub’s intangible (that is, USSub’s
license to use the AA trademark for a
specified term), and not the value of the AA
trademark owned by FP, USSub’s
incremental activities do not constitute a
contribution for which an allocation is
warranted under paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this
section.
Example 5. (i) Facts. The year 1 facts are
the same as in Example 3. In year 2, FP and
USSub enter into a separate services
agreement that obligates USSub to perform
certain incremental marketing activities to
promote AA trademark athletic gear in the
United States, above and beyond the
activities specified in the license agreement
executed in year 1. In year 2, USSub begins
to perform these incremental activities,
pursuant to the separate services agreement
with FP.
(ii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to USSub’s incremental
marketing activities covered by the separate
services agreement would be evaluated under
§§ 1.482–1 and 1.482–9T, including a
comparison of the compensation provided for
the services with the results obtained under
a method pursuant to § 1.482–9T, selected
and applied in accordance with the best
method rule of § 1.482–1(c).
(iii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to the royalty under the license
agreement is determined under § 1.482–1 and
this section through § 1.482–6. The
comparability analysis would include
consideration of all relevant factors, such as
the term and geographical exclusivity of the
license, the nature of the intangibles subject
to the license, and the nature of the
marketing activities required to be
undertaken pursuant to the license. The
comparability analysis would take into
account that the compensation for the
incremental activities by USSub is provided
for in the separate services agreement, rather
than embedded in the royalty paid for use of
the AA trademark. For illustrations of
application of the best method rule, see
§ 1.482–8T Example 10, Example 11, and
Example 12.
Example 6. (i) Facts. The year 1 facts are
the same as in Example 3. In year 2, FP and
USSub enter into a separate services
agreement that obligates FP to perform
incremental marketing activities, not
specified in the year 1 license, by advertising
AA trademarked athletic gear in selected
international sporting events, such as the
Olympics and the soccer World Cup. FP’s
corporate advertising department develops
and coordinates these special promotions.
The separate services agreement obligates
USSub to pay an amount to FP for the benefit
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44486
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
to USSub that may reasonably be anticipated
as the result of FP’s incremental activities.
The separate services agreement is not a
qualified cost sharing arrangement under
§ 1.482–7. FP begins to perform the
incremental activities in year 2 pursuant to
the separate services agreement.
(ii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to the incremental marketing
activities performed by FP under the separate
services agreement would be evaluated under
§ 1.482–9T. Under the circumstances, it is
reasonable to anticipate that FP’s activities
would increase the value of USSub’s license
as well as the value of FP’s trademark.
Accordingly, the incremental activities by FP
may constitute in part a controlled services
transaction for which USSub must
compensate FP. The analysis of whether an
allocation is warranted would include a
comparison of the compensation provided for
the services with the results obtained under
a method pursuant to § 1.482–9T, selected
and applied in accordance with the best
method rule of § 1.482–1(c).
(iii) Whether an allocation is appropriate
with respect to the royalty under the license
agreement would be evaluated under
§ 1.482–1 through § 1.482–6 of this section.
The comparability analysis would include
consideration of all relevant factors, such as
the term and geographical exclusivity of
USSub’s license, the nature of the intangibles
subject to the license, and the marketing
activities required to be undertaken by both
FP and USSub pursuant to the license. This
comparability analysis would take into
account that the compensation for the
incremental activities performed by FP was
provided for in the separate services
agreement, rather than embedded in the
royalty paid for use of the AA trademark. For
illustrations of application of the best method
rule, see § 1.482–8T, Example 10, Example
11, and Example 12.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
(f)(5) and (f)(6) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–4(f)(5) and (f)(6).
(f)(7) Effective date. (i) In general. The
provisions of paragraphs (f)(3) and (f)(4)
are generally applicable for taxable
years beginning after December 31,
2006.
(ii) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of paragraphs
(f)(3) and (f)(4) of this section to earlier
taxable years in accordance with the
rules set forth in § 1.482–9T(n)(2).
(iii) Expiration date. The applicability
of § 1.482–4T expires on or before July
31, 2009.
I Par. 10. Section 1.482–6 is amended
by revising paragraphs (c)(2)(ii)(B)(1),
(c)(2)(ii)(D), (c)(3)(i)(A), (c)(3)(i)(B), and
(c)(3)(ii)(D) to read as follows:
The revisions and addition read as
follows:
§ 1.482–6
*
Profit split method.
*
*
(c) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
VerDate Aug<31>2005
*
*
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
(B) * * * (1) * * * [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–
6T(c)(2)(ii)(B)(1).
*
*
*
*
*
(D) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–6T(c)(2)(ii)(D).
*
*
*
*
*
(3) * * *
(i) * * *
(A) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–6T(c)(3)(i)(A).
(B) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–6T(c)(3)(i)(B).
(ii) * * *
(D) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–6T(c)(3)(ii)(D).
*
*
*
*
*
I Par. 11. Section 1.482–6T is added to
read as follows:
§ 1.482–6T
Profit split method (temporary).
(a) through (c)(2)(ii)(A) [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–6(a)
through (c)(2)(ii)(A).
(c)(2)(ii)(B) Comparability—(1) In
general. The degree of comparability
between the controlled and
uncontrolled taxpayers is determined by
applying the comparability provisions
of § 1.482–1(d). The comparable profit
split compares the division of operating
profits among the controlled taxpayers
to the division of operating profits
among uncontrolled taxpayers engaged
in similar activities under similar
circumstances. Although all of the
factors described in § 1.482–1(d)(3) must
be considered, comparability under this
method is particularly dependent on the
considerations described under the
comparable profits method in § 1.482–
5(c)(2) or § 1.482–9T(f)(2)(iii) because
this method is based on a comparison of
the operating profit of the controlled
and uncontrolled taxpayers. In addition,
because the contractual terms of the
relationship among the participants in
the relevant business activity will be a
principal determinant of the allocation
of functions and risks among them,
comparability under this method also
depends particularly on the degree of
similarity of the contractual terms of the
controlled and uncontrolled taxpayers.
Finally, the comparable profit split may
not be used if the combined operating
profit (as a percentage of the combined
assets) of the uncontrolled comparables
varies significantly from that earned by
the controlled taxpayers.
(c)(2)(ii)(B)(2) through (C) [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–
6(c)(2)(ii)(B)(2) through (C).
(c)(2)(ii)(D) Other factors affecting
reliability. Like the methods described
in §§ 1.482–3, 1.482–4, 1.482–5 and
1.482–9T, the comparable profit split
PO 00000
Frm 00022
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
relies exclusively on external market
benchmarks. As indicated in § 1.482–
1(c)(2)(i), as the degree of comparability
between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions increases, the
relative weight accorded the analysis
under this method will increase. In
addition, the reliability of the analysis
under this method may be enhanced by
the fact that all parties to the controlled
transaction are evaluated under the
comparable profit split. However, the
reliability of the results of an analysis
based on information from all parties to
a transaction is affected by the
reliability of the data and the
assumptions pertaining to each party to
the controlled transaction. Thus, if the
data and assumptions are significantly
more reliable with respect to one of the
parties than with respect to the others,
a different method, focusing solely on
the results of that party, may yield more
reliable results.
(c)(3)(i) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–6(c)(3)(i).
(c)(3)(i)(A) Allocate income to routine
contributions. The first step allocates
operating income to each party to the
controlled transactions to provide a
market return for its routine
contributions to the relevant business
activity. Routine contributions are
contributions of the same or a similar
kind to those made by uncontrolled
taxpayers involved in similar business
activities for which it is possible to
identify market returns. Routine
contributions ordinarily include
contributions of tangible property,
services and intangibles that are
generally owned by uncontrolled
taxpayers engaged in similar activities.
A functional analysis is required to
identify these contributions according to
the functions performed, risks assumed,
and resources employed by each of the
controlled taxpayers. Market returns for
the routine contributions should be
determined by reference to the returns
achieved by uncontrolled taxpayers
engaged in similar activities, consistent
with the methods described in §§ 1.482–
3, 1.482–4, 1.482–5 and 1.482–9T.
(B) Allocate residual profit—(1)
Nonroutine contributions generally. The
allocation of income to the controlled
taxpayer’s routine contributions will not
reflect profits attributable to each
controlled taxpayer’s contributions to
the relevant business activity that are
not routine (nonroutine contributions).
A nonroutine contribution is a
contribution that is not accounted for as
a routine contribution. Thus, in cases
where such nonroutine contributions
are present there normally will be an
unallocated residual profit after the
allocation of income described in
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
paragraph (c)(3)(i)(A) of this section.
Under this second step, the residual
profit generally should be divided
among the controlled taxpayers based
upon the relative value of their
nonroutine contributions to the relevant
business activity. The relative value of
the nonroutine contributions of each
taxpayer should be measured in a
manner that most reliably reflects each
nonroutine contribution made to the
controlled transaction and each
controlled taxpayer’s role in the
nonroutine contributions. If the
nonroutine contribution by one of the
controlled taxpayers is also used in
other business activities (such as
transactions with other controlled
taxpayers), an appropriate allocation of
the value of the nonroutine contribution
must be made among all the business
activities in which it is used.
(2) Nonroutine contributions of
intangible property. In many cases,
nonroutine contributions of a taxpayer
to the relevant business activity may be
contributions of intangible property. For
purposes of paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B)(1) of
this section, the relative value of
nonroutine intangible property
contributed by taxpayers may be
measured by external market
benchmarks that reflect the fair market
value of such intangible property.
Alternatively, the relative value of
nonroutine intangible property
contributions may be estimated by the
capitalized cost of developing the
intangible property and all related
improvements and updates, less an
appropriate amount of amortization
based on the useful life of each
intangible. Finally, if the intangible
development expenditures of the parties
are relatively constant over time and the
useful life of the intangible property
contributed by all parties is
approximately the same, the amount of
actual expenditures in recent years may
be used to estimate the relative value of
nonroutine intangible property
contributions.
(c)(3)(ii)(A) through (C) [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–
6(c)(3)(ii)(A) through (C).
(c)(3)(ii)(D) Other factors affecting
reliability. Like the methods described
in §§ 1.482–3, 1.482–4, 1.482–5 and
1.482–9T, the first step of the residual
profit split relies exclusively on external
market benchmarks. As indicated in
§ 1.482–1(c)(2)(i), as the degree of
comparability between the controlled
and uncontrolled transactions increases,
the relative weight accorded the
analysis under this method will
increase. In addition, to the extent the
allocation of profits in the second step
is not based on external market
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
benchmarks, the reliability of the
analysis will be decreased in relation to
an analysis under a method that relies
on market benchmarks. Finally, the
reliability of the analysis under this
method may be enhanced by the fact
that all parties to the controlled
transaction are evaluated under the
residual profit split. However, the
reliability of the results of an analysis
based on information from all parties to
a transaction is affected by the
reliability of the data and the
assumptions pertaining to each party to
the controlled transaction. Thus, if the
data and assumptions are significantly
more reliable with respect to one of the
parties than with respect to the others,
a different method, focusing solely on
the results of that party, may yield more
reliable results.
(c)(3)(iii) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–6(c)(3)(iii).
(d) Effective date—(1) In general. The
provisions of paragraphs (c)(2)(ii)(B)(1)
and (D), (c)(3)(i)(A) and (B), and
(c)(3)(ii)(D) of this section are generally
applicable for taxable years beginning
after December 31, 2006.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of paragraphs
(c)(2)(ii)(B)(1) and (D), (c)(3)(i)(A) and
(B), and (c)(3)(ii)(D) of this section to
earlier taxable years in accordance with
the rules set forth in § 1.482–9T(n)(2).
(3) Expiration date. The applicability
of § 1.482–6T expires on or before July
31, 2009.
I Par. 12. Section 1.482–8 is amended
as follows:
I 1. Designating the undesignated
introductory text as paragraph (a) and
adding a paragraph heading.
I 2. Adding paragraph (b) designation,
heading, and Examples 10 through 12.
The additions read as follows:
§ 1.482–8
rule.
Examples of the best method
(a) Introduction. * * *
(b) Examples. * * *
Examples 10 through 12. [Reserved].
For further guidance, see 1.482–8T(b)
Examples 10 through 12.
I Par. 13. Section 1.482–8T is added to
read as follows:
§ 1.482–8T Examples of the best method
rule (temporary).
(a) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–8(a).
(b) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–8(b), Examples 1 through 9.
Example 10. Cost of services plus method
preferred to other methods. (i) FP designs
and manufactures consumer electronic
devices that incorporate advanced
technology. In year 1, FP introduces Product
PO 00000
Frm 00023
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44487
X, an entertainment device targeted primarily
at the youth market. FP’s wholly-owned,
exclusive U.S. distributor, USSub, sells
Product X in the U.S. market. USSub hires
an independent marketing firm, Agency A, to
promote Product X in the U.S. market.
Agency A has successfully promoted other
electronic products on behalf of other
uncontrolled parties. USSub executes a oneyear, renewable contract with Agency A that
requires it to develop the market for Product
X, within an annual budget set by USSub. In
years 1 through 3, Agency A develops
advertising, buys media, and sponsors events
featuring Product X. Agency A receives a
markup of 25% on all expenses of promoting
Product X, with the exception of media buys,
which are reimbursed at cost. During year 3,
sales of Product X decrease sharply, as
Product X is displaced by competitors’
products. At the end of year 3, sales of
Product X are discontinued.
(ii) Prior to the start of year 4, FP develops
a new entertainment device, Product Y. Like
Product X, Product Y is intended for sale to
the youth market, but it is marketed under a
new trademark distinct from that used for
Product X. USSub decides to perform all U.S.
market promotion for Product Y. USSub hires
key Agency A staff members who handled
the successful Product X campaign. To
promote Product Y, USSub intends to use
methods similar to those used successfully
by Agency A to promote Product X (print
advertising, media, event sponsorship, etc.).
FP and USSub enter into a one-year,
renewable agreement concerning promotion
of Product Y in the U.S. market. Under the
agreement, FP compensates USSub for
promoting Product Y, based on a cost of
services plus markup of A%. Third-party
media buys by USSub in connection with
Product Y are reimbursed at cost.
(iii) Assume that under the contractual
arrangements between FP and USSub, the
arm’s length consideration for Product Y and
the trademark or other intangibles may be
determined reliably under one or more
transfer pricing methods. At issue in this
example is the separate evaluation of the
arm’s length compensation for the year 4
promotional activities performed by USSub
pursuant to its contract with FP.
(iv) USSub’s accounting records contain
reliable data that separately state the costs
incurred to promote Product Y. A functional
analysis indicates that USSub’s activities to
promote Product Y in year 4 are similar to
activities performed by Agency A during
years 1 through 3 under the contract with FP.
In other respects, no material differences
exist in the market conditions or the
promotional activities performed in year 4, as
compared to those in years 1 through 3.
(v) It is possible to identify uncontrolled
distributors or licensees of electronic
products that perform, as one component of
their business activities, promotional
activities similar to those performed by
USSub. However, it is unlikely that publicly
available accounting data from these
companies would allow computation of the
comparable transactional costs or total
services costs associated with the marketing
or promotional activities that these entities
perform, as one component of business
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
44488
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
activities. If that were possible, the
comparable profits method for services might
provide a reliable measure of an arm’s length
result. The functional analysis of the
marketing activities performed by USSub in
year 4 indicates that they are similar to the
activities performed by Agency A in years 1
through 3 for Product X. Because reliable
information is available concerning the
markup on costs charged in a comparable
uncontrolled transaction, the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length price is the cost
of services plus method in § 1.482–9T(e).
Example 11. CPM for services preferred to
other methods. (i) FP manufactures furniture
and accessories for residential use. FP sells
its products to retailers in Europe under the
trademark, ‘‘Moda.’’ FP holds all worldwide
rights to the trademark, including in the
United States. USSub is FP’s wholly-owned
subsidiary in the U.S. market and the
exclusive U.S. distributor of FP’s
merchandise. Historically, USSub dealt only
with specialized designers in the U.S. market
and advertised in trade publications targeted
to this market. Although items sold in the
U.S. and Europe are physically identical,
USSub’s U.S. customers generally resell the
merchandise as non-branded merchandise.
(ii) FP retains an independent firm to
evaluate the feasibility of selling FP’s
trademarked merchandise in the general
wholesale and retail market in the United
States. The study concludes that this segment
of the U.S. market, which is not exploited by
USSub, may generate substantial profits.
Based on this study, FP enters into a separate
agreement with USSub, which provides that
USSub will develop this market in the
United States for the benefit of FP. USSub
separately accounts for personnel expenses,
overhead, and out-of-pocket costs attributable
to the initial stage of the marketing campaign
(Phase I). USSub receives as compensation its
costs, plus a markup of X%, for activities in
Phase I. At the end of Phase I, FP will
evaluate the program. If success appears
likely, USSub will begin full-scale
distribution of trademarked merchandise in
the new market segment, pursuant to
agreements negotiated with FP at that time.
(iii) Assume that under the contractual
arrangements in effect between FP and
USSub, the arm’s length consideration for the
merchandise and the trademark or other
intangibles may be determined reliably under
one or more transfer pricing methods. At
issue in this example is the separate
evaluation of the arm’s length compensation
for the marketing activities conducted by
USSub in years 1 and following.
(iv) A functional analysis reveals that
USSub’s activities consist primarily of
modifying the promotional materials created
by FP, negotiating media buys, and arranging
promotional events. FP separately
compensates USSub for all Phase I activities,
and detailed accounting information is
available regarding the costs of these
activities. The Phase I activities of USSub are
similar to those of uncontrolled companies
that perform, as their primary business
activity, a range of advertising and media
relations activities on a contract basis for
uncontrolled parties.
(v) No information is available concerning
the comparable uncontrolled prices for
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
services in transactions similar to those
engaged in by FP and USSub. Nor is any
information available concerning
uncontrolled transactions that would allow
application of the cost of services plus
method. It is possible to identify
uncontrolled distributors or licensees of
home furnishings that perform, as one
component of their business activities,
promotional activities similar to those
performed by USSub. However, it is unlikely
that publicly available accounting data from
these companies would allow computation of
the comparable transactional costs or total
services costs associated with the marketing
or promotional activities that these entities
performed, as one component of their
business activities. On the other hand, it is
possible to identify uncontrolled advertising
and media relations companies, the principal
business activities of which are similar to the
Phase I activities of USSub. Under these
circumstances, the most reliable measure of
an arm’s length price is the comparable
profits method of § 1.482–9T(f). The
uncontrolled advertising comparables’
treatment of material items, such as
classification of items as cost of goods sold
or selling, general, and administrative
expenses, may differ from that of USSub.
Such inconsistencies in accounting treatment
between the uncontrolled comparables and
the tested party, or among the comparables,
are less important when using the ratio of
operating profit to total services costs under
the comparable profits method for services in
§ 1.482–9T(f). Under this method, the
operating profit of USSub from the Phase I
activities is compared to the operating profit
of uncontrolled parties that perform general
advertising and media relations as their
primary business activity.
Example 12. Residual profit split preferred
to other methods. (i) USP is a manufacturer
of athletic apparel sold under the AA
trademark, to which FP owns the worldwide
rights. USP sells AA trademark apparel in
countries throughout the world, but prior to
year 1, USP did not sell its merchandise in
Country X. In year 1, USP acquires an
uncontrolled Country X company which
becomes its wholly-owned subsidiary, XSub.
USP enters into an exclusive distribution
arrangement with XSub in Country X. Before
being acquired by USP in year 1, XSub
distributed athletic apparel purchased from
uncontrolled suppliers and resold that
merchandise to retailers. After being acquired
by USP in year 1, XSub continues to
distribute merchandise from uncontrolled
suppliers and also begins to distribute AA
trademark apparel. Under a separate
agreement with USP, XSub uses its best
efforts to promote the AA trademark in
Country X, with the goal of maximizing sales
volume and revenues from AA merchandise.
(ii) Prior to year 1, USP executed long-term
endorsement contracts with several
prominent professional athletes. These
contracts give USP the right to use the names
and likenesses of the athletes in any country
in which AA merchandise is sold during the
term of the contract. These contracts remain
in effect for five years, starting in year 1.
Before being acquired by USP, XSub renewed
a long-term agreement with SportMart, an
PO 00000
Frm 00024
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
uncontrolled company that owns a
nationwide chain of sporting goods retailers
in Country X. XSub has been SportMart’s
primary supplier from the time that
SportMart began operations. Under the
agreement, SportMart will provide AA
merchandise preferred shelf-space and will
feature AA merchandise at no charge in its
print ads and seasonal promotions. In
consideration for these commitments, USP
and XSub grant SportMart advance access to
new products and the right to use the
professional athletes under contract with
USP in SportMart advertisements featuring
AA merchandise (subject to approval of
content by USP).
(iii) Assume that it is possible to segregate
all transactions by XSub that involve
distribution of merchandise acquired from
uncontrolled distributors (non-controlled
transactions). In addition, assume that, apart
from the activities undertaken by USP and
XSub to promote AA apparel in Country X,
the arm’s length compensation for other
functions performed by USP and XSub in the
Country X market in years 1 and following
can be reliably determined. At issue in this
Example 12 is the application of the residual
profit split analysis to determine the
appropriate division between USP and XSub
of the balance of the operating profits from
the Country X market, that is the portion
attributable to nonroutine contributions to
the marketing and promotional activities.
(iv) A functional analysis of the marketing
and promotional activities conducted in the
Country X market, as described in this
example, indicates that both USP and XSub
made nonroutine contributions to the
business activity. FP contributed the longterm endorsement contracts with
professional athletes. XSub contributed its
long-term contractual rights with SportMart,
which were made more valuable by its
successful, long-term relationship with
SportMart.
(v) Because both USP and XSub made
valuable, nonroutine contributions to the
marketing and promotional activities in
Country X, neither the comparable
uncontrolled services price method, the cost
of services plus method, nor the comparable
profits method for services will provide a
reliable measure of an arm’s length result. On
account of the valuable, nonroutine
contributions made by both parties, the most
reliable measure of an arm’s length result is
the residual profit split method in § 1.482–
9T(g). The residual profit split analysis
would take into account both routine and
nonroutine contributions by USP and XSub,
in order to determine an appropriate
allocation of the combined operating profits
in the Country X market from the sale of AA
merchandise and from related promotional
and marketing activities.
(c) Effective date—(1) In general. The
provisions of § 1.482–8T Example 10,
Example 11, and Example 12 are
generally applicable for taxable years
beginning after December 31, 2006.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of § 1.482–8T
Example 10, Example 11, and Example
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
12 to earlier taxable years in accordance
with the rules set forth in § 1.482–
9T(n)(2).
(3) Expiration date. The applicability
of § 1.482–8T expires on or before July
31, 2009.
I Par. 14. Section 1.482–9T is added to
read as follows:
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
§ 1.482–9T Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a controlled
services transaction (temporary).
(a) In general. The arm’s length
amount charged in a controlled services
transaction must be determined under
one of the methods provided for in this
section. Each method must be applied
in accordance with the provisions of
§ 1.482–1, including the best method
rule of § 1.482–1(c), the comparability
analysis of § 1.482–1(d), and the arm’s
length range of § 1.482–1(e), except as
those provisions are modified in this
section. The methods are—
(1) The services cost method,
described in paragraph (b) of this
section;
(2) The comparable uncontrolled
services price method, described in
paragraph (c) of this section;
(3) The gross services margin method,
described in paragraph (d) of this
section;
(4) The cost of services plus method,
described in paragraph (e) of this
section;
(5) The comparable profits method,
described in § 1.482–5 and in paragraph
(f) of this section;
(6) The profit split method, described
in § 1.482–6 and in paragraph (g) of this
section; and
(7) Unspecified methods, described in
paragraph (h) of this section.
(b) Services cost method—(1) In
general. The services cost method
evaluates whether the amount charged
for covered services meeting the
requirements of paragraphs (b)(2) and
(b)(3) of this section is arm’s length by
reference to the total services costs (as
defined in paragraph (j) of this section)
with no markup. If covered services
meet the conditions of this paragraph
(b), then the services cost method will
be considered the best method for
purposes of § 1.482–1(c), and the
Commissioner’s allocations will be
limited to adjusting the amount charged
for such services to the properly
determined amount of such total
services costs.
(2) Not services that contribute
significantly to fundamental risks of
business success or failure. Services are
not covered services unless the taxpayer
reasonably concludes in its business
judgment that the covered services do
not contribute significantly to key
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of
success or failure in one or more trades
or businesses of the renderer, the
recipient, or both. In evaluating the
reasonableness of the conclusion
required by this paragraph (b)(2),
consideration will be given to all the
facts and circumstances.
(3) Other conditions on application of
services cost method. The arm’s length
amount charged in a controlled services
transaction may be evaluated under the
services cost method if it meets the
requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of
this section and is not described in
paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section.
(i) Adequate books and records.
Permanent books of account and records
are maintained for as long as the costs
with respect to the covered services are
incurred by the renderer. Such books
and records must include a statement
evidencing the taxpayer’s intention to
apply the services cost method to
evaluate the arm’s length charge for
such services. Such books and records
must be adequate to permit verification
by the Commissioner of the total
services costs incurred by the renderer,
including a description of the services
in question, identification of the
renderer and the recipient of such
services, and sufficient documentation
to allow verification of the methods
used to allocate and apportion such
costs to the services in question in
accordance with paragraph (k) of this
section.
(ii) Excluded transactions. The
following categories of transactions, in
whole or part, are not covered services:
(A) Manufacturing;
(B) Production;
(C) Extraction, exploration or
processing of natural resources;
(D) Construction;
(E) Reselling, distribution, acting as a
sales or purchasing agent, or acting
under a commission or other similar
arrangement;
(F) Research, development, or
experimentation;
(G) Engineering or scientific;
(H) Financial transactions, including
guarantees; and
(I) Insurance or reinsurance.
(4) Covered services. For purposes of
this paragraph (b), covered services
consist of a controlled transaction or a
group of controlled service transactions
(see § 1.482–1(f)(2)(i) (aggregation of
transactions)) that meets the definition
of specified covered services or low
margin covered services.
(i) Specified covered services.
Specified covered services are
controlled services transactions that the
Commissioner specifies by revenue
PO 00000
Frm 00025
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44489
procedure. Services will be included in
such revenue procedure based upon the
Commissioner’s determination that the
specified covered services are support
services common among taxpayers
across industry sectors and generally do
not involve a significant median
comparable markup on total services
costs. For the definition of the median
comparable markup on total services
costs, see paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this
section. The Commissioner may add to,
subtract from, or otherwise revise the
specified covered services described in
the revenue procedure by subsequent
revenue procedure, which amendments
will ordinarily be prospective only in
effect.
(ii) Low margin covered services. Low
margin covered services are controlled
services transactions for which the
median comparable markup on total
services costs is less than or equal to
seven percent. For purposes of this
paragraph (b), the median comparable
markup on total services costs means
the excess of the arm’s length price of
the controlled services transaction
determined under the general section
482 regulations without regard to this
paragraph (b), using the interquartile
range described in § 1.482–1(e)(2)(iii)(C)
and as necessary adjusting to the
median of such interquartile range, over
total services costs, expressed as a
percentage of total services costs.
(5) Shared services arrangement—(i)
In general. If covered services are the
subject of a shared services
arrangement, then the arm’s length
charge to each participant for such
services will be the portion of the total
costs of the services otherwise
determined under the services cost
method of this paragraph (b) that is
properly allocated to such participant
pursuant to the arrangement.
(ii) Requirements for shared services
arrangement. A shared services
arrangement must meet the
requirements described in this
paragraph (b)(5).
(A) Eligibility. To be eligible for
treatment under this paragraph (b)(5), a
shared services arrangement must—
(1) Include two or more participants;
(2) Include as participants all
controlled taxpayers that reasonably
anticipate a benefit (as defined under
paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section) from
one or more covered services specified
in the shared services arrangement; and
(3) Be structured such that each
covered service (or each reasonable
aggregation of services within the
meaning of paragraph (b)(5)(iii)(B) of
this section) confers a benefit on at least
one participant in the shared services
arrangement.
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
44490
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
(B) Allocation. The costs for covered
services must be allocated among the
participants based on their respective
shares of the reasonably anticipated
benefits from those services, without
regard to whether the anticipated
benefits are in fact realized. Reasonably
anticipated benefits are benefits as
defined in paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this
section. The allocation of costs must
provide the most reliable measure of the
participants’ respective shares of the
reasonably anticipated benefits under
the principles of the best method rule.
See § 1.482–1(c). The allocation must be
applied on a consistent basis for all
participants and services. The allocation
to each participant in each taxable year
must reasonably reflect that
participant’s respective share of
reasonably anticipated benefits for such
taxable year. If the taxpayer reasonably
concluded that the shared services
arrangement (including any aggregation
pursuant to paragraph (b)(5)(iii)(B) of
this section) allocated costs for covered
services on a basis that most reliably
reflects the participants’ respective
shares of the reasonably anticipated
benefits attributable to such services, as
provided for in this paragraph (b)(5),
then the Commissioner may not adjust
such allocation basis.
(C) Documentation. The taxpayer
must maintain sufficient documentation
to establish that the requirements of this
paragraph (b)(5) are satisfied, and
include—
(1) A statement evidencing the
taxpayer’s intention to apply the
services cost method to evaluate the
arm’s length charge for covered services
pursuant to a shared services
arrangement;
(2) A list of the participants and the
renderer or renderers of covered
services under the shared services
arrangement;
(3) A description of the basis of
allocation to all participants, consistent
with the participants’ respective shares
of reasonably anticipated benefits; and
(4) A description of any aggregation of
covered services for purposes of the
shared services arrangement, and an
indication whether this aggregation (if
any) differs from the aggregation used to
evaluate the median comparable
markup for any low margin covered
services described in paragraph (b)(4)(ii)
of this section.
(iii) Definitions and special rules—(A)
Participant. A participant is a controlled
taxpayer that reasonably anticipates
benefits from covered services subject to
a shared services arrangement that
substantially complies with the
requirements described in this
paragraph (b)(5).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
(B) Aggregation. Two or more covered
services may be aggregated in a
reasonable manner taking into account
all the facts and circumstances,
including whether the relative
magnitude of reasonably anticipated
benefits of the participants sharing the
costs of such aggregated services may be
reasonably reflected by the allocation
basis employed pursuant to paragraph
(b)(5)(ii)(B) of this section. The
aggregation of services under a shared
services arrangement may differ from
the aggregation used to evaluate the
median comparable markup for any low
margin covered services described in
paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section,
provided that such alternative
aggregation can be implemented on a
reasonable basis, including
appropriately identifying and isolating
relevant costs, as necessary.
(C) Coordination with cost sharing
arrangements. To the extent that an
allocation is made to a participant in a
shared services arrangement that is also
a participant in a cost sharing
arrangement subject to § 1.482–7, such
amount with respect to covered services
is first allocated pursuant to the shared
services arrangement under this
paragraph (b)(5). Costs allocated
pursuant to a shared services
arrangement may (if applicable) be
further allocated between the intangible
development activity under § 1.482–7
and other activities of the participant.
(6) Examples. The application of this
section is illustrated by the following
examples. No inference is intended
whether the presence or absence of one
or more facts is determinative of the
conclusion in any example. For
purposes of Examples 1 through 14,
assume that Company P and its
subsidiaries, Company Q and Company
R, are corporations and members of the
same group of controlled entities (PQR
Controlled Group). For purposes of
Examples 15 through 17, assume that
Company P and its subsidiary, Company
S, are corporations and members of the
same group of controlled entities (PS
Controlled Group). For purposes of
Examples 18 through 26, assume that
Company P and its subsidiaries,
Company X, Company Y, and Company
Z, are corporations and members of the
same group of controlled entities (PXYZ
Group) and that Company P and its
subsidiaries satisfy all of the
requirements for a shared services
arrangement specified in paragraphs
(b)(5)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
Example 1. Data entry services. (i)
Company P, Company Q and Company R
own and operate hospitals. Company P also
owns and operates a computer system for
maintaining medical information gathered by
PO 00000
Frm 00026
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
doctors and nurses during interviews and
treatment of patients. Company P uses a
scanning device to convert medical
information from various paper records into
a digital format. Company Q and Company R
do not have a computer system that allows
them to input or maintain this information,
but they have access to this information
through their computer systems. Since
Company Q and Company R do not have the
requisite computer infrastructure, Company
P maintains this medical information for
itself as well as for Company Q and Company
R.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
data entry are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances of the business of the PQR
Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. If these
services meet the other requirements of
paragraph (b) of this section, Company P will
be eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 2. Data entry services. (i)
Company P owns and operates several
gambling establishments. Company Q and
Company R own and operate travel agencies.
Company P provides its customers with a
‘‘player’s card,’’ which is a smart card device
used in Company P’s gambling
establishments to track a player’s bets,
winnings, losses, hotel accommodations, and
food and drink purchases. Using their
customer lists, Company Q and Company R
request marketing information about their
customers that Company P has gathered from
these player’s cards. Company Q and
Company R use the smart card data to sell
customized vacation packages to their
customers, taking into account their
individual preferences and spending
patterns. Annual reports for the PQR
Controlled Group state that these smart card
data constitute an important element of the
group’s overall strategic business planning,
including advertising and accommodations.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
data entry are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the taxpayer is unable to
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. Company
P is not eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 3. Recruiting services. (i)
Company P, Company Q and Company R are
manufacturing companies that sell their
products to unrelated retail establishments.
Company P’s human resources department
recruits mid-level managers and engineers for
itself as well as for Company Q and Company
R by attending job fairs and other recruitment
events. For recruiting higher-level managers
and engineers, each of these companies uses
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
recruiters from unrelated executive search
firms.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
recruiting are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances of the business of the PQR
Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. If these
services meet the other requirements of
paragraph (b) of this section, Company P will
be eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 4. Recruiting services. (i)
Company P, Company Q and Company R are
agencies that represent celebrities in the
entertainment industry. Among the most
important resources of these companies are
the highly compensated agents who have
close personal relationships with celebrities
in the entertainment industry. Company P
implements a recruiting plan to hire highly
compensated agents for itself, and other
highly compensated agents for each of its
wholly-owned subsidiaries in foreign
countries, Company Q and Company R.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
recruiting are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the taxpayer is unable to
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. Company
P is not eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 5. Credit analysis services. (i)
Company P is a manufacturer and distributor
of clothing for retail stores. Company Q and
Company R are distributors of clothing for
retail stores. As part of its operations,
personnel in Company P perform credit
analysis on its customers. Most of the
customers have a history of purchases from
Company P, and the credit analysis involves
a review of the recent payment history of the
customer’s account. For new customers, the
personnel in Company P perform a basic
credit check of the customer, using reports
from a business credit reporting agency. On
behalf of Company Q and Company R,
Company P performs credit analysis on
customers who order clothing from Company
Q and Company R, using the same method
as Company P uses for itself.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
credit analysis are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances of the business of the PQR
Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. If these
services meet the other requirements of this
paragraph (b), Company P will be eligible to
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 6. Credit analysis services. (i)
Company P, Company Q and Company R
lease furniture to retail customers who
present a significant credit risk and are
generally unable to lease furniture from other
providers. As part of its leasing operations,
personnel in Company P perform credit
analysis on each of the potential lessees. The
personnel have developed special expertise
in determining whether a particular customer
who presents a significant credit risk (as
indicated by credit reporting agencies) will
be likely to make the requisite lease
payments on a timely basis. In order to
compensate for the specialized analysis of a
customer’s default risk, as well as the default
risk itself, Company P charges more than the
market lease rate charged to customers with
average credit ratings. Also, as part of its
operations, Company P performs similar
credit analysis services for Company Q and
Company R, which charge correspondingly
high monthly lease payments.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
credit analysis are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the taxpayer is unable to
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. Company
P is not eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 7. Credit analysis services. (i)
Company P is a large full-service bank, which
provides products and services to corporate
and consumer markets, including unsecured
loans, secured loans, lines of credit, letters of
credit, conversion of foreign currency,
consumer loans, trust services, and sales of
certificates of deposit. Company Q makes
routine consumer loans to individuals, such
as auto loans and home equity loans.
Company R makes only business loans to
small businesses.
(ii) Company P performs credit analysis
and prepares credit reports for itself, as well
as for Company Q and Company R. Company
P, Company Q and Company R regularly
employ these credit reports in the ordinary
course of business in making decisions
regarding extensions of credit to potential
customers (including whether to lend, rate of
interest, and loan terms).
(iii) Assume that these services relating to
credit analysis are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the credit analysis services
constitute part of a ‘‘financial transaction’’
described in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(H) of this
section. Company P is not eligible to charge
these services to Company Q and Company
R in accordance with the services cost
method.
Example 8. Data verification services. (i)
Company P, Company Q and Company R are
manufacturers of industrial supplies.
Company P’s accounting department
performs periodic reviews of the accounts
PO 00000
Frm 00027
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44491
payable information of Company P, Company
Q and Company R, and identifies any
inaccuracies in the records, such as doublepayments and double-charges.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
verification of data are specified covered
services within the meaning of paragraph
(b)(4)(i) of this section. Under the facts and
circumstances of the business of the PQR
Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. If these
services meet the other requirements of this
paragraph (b), Company P will be eligible to
charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 9. Data verification services. (i)
Company P gathers from unrelated customers
information regarding accounts payable and
accounts receivable and utilizes its own
computer system to analyze that information
for purposes of identifying errors in payment
and receipts (data mining). Company P is
compensated for these services based on a fee
that reflects a percentage of amounts
collected by customers as a result of the data
mining services. These activities constitute a
significant portion of Company P’s business.
Company P performs similar activities for
Company Q and Company R by analyzing
their accounts payable and accounts
receivable records.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
data mining are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the taxpayer is unable to
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. Company
P is not eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 10. Legal services. (i) Company P
is a domestic corporation with two whollyowned foreign subsidiaries, Company Q and
Company R. Company P and its subsidiaries
manufacture and distribute equipment used
by industrial customers. Company P
maintains an in-house legal department
consisting of attorneys experienced in a wide
range of business and commercial matters.
Company Q and Company R maintain small
legal departments, consisting of attorneys
experienced in matters that most frequently
arise in the normal course of business of
Company Q and Company R in their
respective jurisdictions.
(ii) Company P seeks to maintain in-house
legal staff with the ability to address the
majority of legal matters that arise in the
United States with respect to the operations
of Company P, as well as any U.S. reporting
or compliance obligations of Company Q or
Company R. The in-house legal staffs of
Company Q and Company R are much more
limited. It is necessary for Company P to
retain several local law firms to handle
litigation and business disputes arising from
the activities of Company Q and Company R.
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
44492
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
Although Company Q and Company R pay
the fees of these law firms, the hiring
authority and general oversight of the firms’
representation is in the legal department of
Company P.
(iii) In determining what portion of the
legal expenses of Company P may be
allocated to Company Q and Company R,
Company P first excludes any expenses
relating to legal services that constitute
shareholder activities and other items that
are not properly analyzed as controlled
services. Assume that the remaining services
relating to general legal functions performed
by in-house legal counsel are specified
covered services within the meaning of
paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section. Under the
facts and circumstances of the business of the
PQR Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these latter services
do not contribute significantly to the
controlled group’s key competitive
advantages, core capabilities, or fundamental
risks of success or failure in the group’s
business. If these services meet the other
requirements of this paragraph (b), Company
P will be eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 11. Legal services. (i) Company P
is a domestic holding company whose
operating companies generate electric power
for consumers by operating nuclear plants.
Company P has several domestic operating
companies, including Companies Q and R.
Assume that, although Company P owns
100% of the stock of Companies Q and R, the
companies do not elect to file a consolidated
Federal income tax return with Company P.
(ii) Company P maintains an in-house legal
department consisting of experienced
attorneys in the areas of Federal utilities
regulation, Federal labor and environmental
law, securities law, and general commercial
law. Companies Q and R maintain their own,
smaller in-house legal staffs comprised of
experienced attorneys in the areas of state
and local utilities regulation, state labor and
employment law, and general commercial
law. The legal department of Company P
performs general oversight of the legal affairs
of the company and determines whether a
particular matter would be more efficiently
handled by the Company P legal department,
by the legal staffs in the operating companies,
or in rare cases, by retained outside counsel.
In general, Company P has succeeded in
minimizing duplication and overlap of
functions between the legal staffs of the
various companies or by retained outside
counsel.
(iii) The domestic nuclear power plant
operations of Companies Q and R are subject
to extensive regulation by the U.S. Nuclear
Regulatory Commission (NRC). Operators are
required to obtain pre-construction approval,
operating licenses, and, at the end of the
operational life of the nuclear reactor,
nuclear decommissioning certificates.
Company P files consolidated financial
statements on behalf of itself, as well as
Companies Q and R, with the United States
Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC).
In these SEC filings, Company P discloses
that failure to obtain any of these licenses
(and the related periodic renewals) or
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
agreeing to licenses on terms less favorable
than those granted to competitors would
have a material adverse impact on the
operations of Company Q or Company R.
Company P maintains a group of experienced
attorneys that exclusively represents
Company Q and Company R before the NRC.
Although Company P occasionally hires an
outside law firm or industry expert to assist
on particular NRC matters, the majority of the
work is performed by the specialized legal
staff of Company P.
(iv) Certain of the legal services performed
by Company P constitute duplicative or
shareholder activities that do not confer a
benefit on the other companies and therefore
do not need to be allocated to the other
companies, while certain other legal services
are eligible to be charged to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
(v) Assume that the specialized legal
services relating to nuclear licenses
performed by in-house legal counsel of
Company P are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the taxpayer is unable to
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. Company
P is not eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 12. Group of services. (i)
Company P, Company Q and Company R are
manufacturing companies that sell their
products to unrelated retail establishments.
Company P has an enterprise resource
planning (ERP) system that maintains data
relating to accounts payable and accounts
receivable information for all three
companies. Company P’s personnel perform
the daily operations on this ERP system such
as inputting data relating to accounts payable
and accounts receivable into the system and
extracting data relating to accounts receivable
and accounts payable in the form of reports
or electronic media and providing those data
to all three companies. Periodically,
Company P’s computer specialists also
modify the ERP system to adapt to changing
business functions in all three companies.
Company P’s computer specialists make
these changes by either modifying the
underlying software program or by
purchasing additional software or hardware
from unrelated third party vendors.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
accounts payable and accounts receivable are
specified covered services within the
meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section.
Under the facts and circumstances of the
business of the PQR Controlled Group, the
taxpayer could reasonably conclude that
these services do not contribute significantly
to the controlled group’s key competitive
advantages, core capabilities, or fundamental
risks of success or failure in the group’s
business. If these services meet the other
requirements of this paragraph (b), Company
P will be eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
PO 00000
Frm 00028
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(iii) Assume that the services performed by
Company P’s computer specialists that relate
to modifying the ERP system are specifically
excluded from the services described in a
revenue procedure referenced in paragraph
(b)(4) of this section as developing hardware
or software solutions (such as systems
integration, Web site design, writing
computer programs, modifying general
applications software, or recommending the
purchase of commercially available hardware
or software). Company P is not eligible to
charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 13. Group of services. (i)
Company P manufactures and sells widgets
under an exclusive contract to Customer 1.
Company Q and Company R sell widgets
under exclusive contracts to Customer 2 and
Customer 3, respectively. At least one year in
advance, each of these customers can
accurately forecast its need for widgets.
Using these forecasts, each customer over the
course of the year places orders for widgets
with the appropriate company, Company P,
Company Q or Company R. A customer’s
actual need for widgets seldom deviates from
that customer’s forecasted need.
(ii) It is most efficient for the PQR
Controlled Group companies to manufacture
and store an inventory of widgets in advance
of delivery. Although all three companies sell
widgets, only Company P maintains a
centralized warehouse for widgets. Pursuant
to a contract, Company P provides storage of
these widgets to Company Q and Company
R at an arm’s length price.
(iii) Company P’s personnel also obtain
orders from all three companies customers to
draw up purchase orders for widgets as well
as make payment to suppliers for widget
replacement parts. In addition, Company P’s
personnel use data entry to input information
regarding orders and sales of widgets and
replacement parts for all three companies
into a centralized computer system.
Company P’s personnel also maintain the
centralized computer system and extract data
for all three companies when necessary.
(iv) Assume that these services relating to
tracking purchases and sales of inventory are
specified covered services within the
meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section.
Under the facts and circumstances of the
business of the PQR Controlled Group, the
taxpayer could reasonably conclude that
these services do not contribute significantly
to the controlled group’s key competitive
advantages, core capabilities, or fundamental
risks of success or failure in the group’s
business. If these services meet the other
requirements of this paragraph (b), Company
P will be eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 14. Group of services. (i)
Company P, Company Q and Company R
assemble and sell gadgets to unrelated
customers. Each of these companies
purchases the components necessary for
assembly of the gadgets from unrelated
suppliers. As a service to its subsidiaries,
Company P’s personnel obtain orders for
components from all three companies,
prepare purchase orders, and make payment
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44493
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
to unrelated suppliers for the components. In
addition, Company P’s personnel use data
entry to input information regarding orders
and sales of gadgets for all three companies
into a centralized computer. Company P’s
personnel also maintain the centralized
computer system and extract data for all
three companies on an as-needed basis. The
services provided by Company P personnel,
in conjunction with the centralized computer
system, constitute a state-of-the-art inventory
management system that allows Company P
to order components necessary for assembly
of the gadgets on a ‘‘just-in-time’’ basis.
(ii) Unrelated suppliers deliver the
components directly to Company P,
Company Q and Company R. Each of the
companies stores the components in its own
facilities for use in filling specific customer
orders. The companies do not maintain any
inventory that is not identified in specific
customer orders. Because of the efficiencies
associated with services provided by
personnel of Company P, all three companies
are able to significantly reduce their
inventory-related costs. Company P’s Chief
Executive Officer makes a statement in one
of its press conferences with industry
analysts that its inventory management
system is critical to the company’s success.
(iii) Assume that these services that relate
to tracking purchase and sales of inventory
are specified covered services within the
meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section.
Under the facts and circumstances, the
taxpayer is unable to reasonably conclude
that these services do not contribute
significantly to the controlled group’s key
competitive advantages, core capabilities, or
fundamental risks of success or failure in the
group’s business. Company P is not eligible
to charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 15. Low margin covered services.
Company P renders certain accounting
services to Company S. Company P uses the
services cost method for the accounting
services, and determines the amount charged
as Company P’s total cost of rendering the
services, with no markup. Based on an
application of the section 482 regulations
without regard to this paragraph (b), the
interquartile range of arm’s length markups
on total services costs is between 3% and
6%, and the median is 4%. Because the
median comparable markup on total services
costs is 4%, which is less than 7%, the
accounting services constitute low margin
covered services within the meaning of
paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section.
Example 16. Low margin covered services.
Company P performs logistics-coordination
services for its subsidiaries, including
Company S. Company P uses the services
cost method for the logistics services, and
determines the amount charged as Company
P’s total cost of rendering the services, with
no markup. Based on an application of the
section 482 regulations without regard to this
paragraph (b), the interquartile range of arm’s
length markups on total services costs is
between 6% and 13%, and the median is 9%.
Because the median comparable markup on
total services costs is 9%, which exceeds 7%,
the logistics-coordination services do not
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
constitute low margin covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of
this section. With respect to the
determination and application of the
interquartile range, see § 1.482–1(e)(2)(iii)(C).
Example 17. Low margin covered services.
Company P performs certain custodial and
maintenance services for certain office
properties owned by Company S. Company
P uses the services cost method for the
services, and determines the amount charged
as Company P’s total cost of providing the
services plus no markup. Uncontrolled
comparables perform a similar range of
custodial and maintenance services for
uncontrolled parties and charge those parties
an annual fee based on the total square
footage of the property. These transactions
meet the criteria for application of the
comparable uncontrolled services price
method of paragraph (c) of this section. The
arm’s length price for the custodial and
maintenance services is determined under
the general section 482 regulations without
regard to this paragraph (b), using the
interquartile range described in § 1.482–
1(e)(2)(iii)(C) and as necessary adjusting to
the median of such interquartile range. Based
on reliable accounting information, the total
services costs (as defined in paragraph (j) of
this section) attributable to the custodial and
maintenance services are subtracted from
such price. The resulting excess of such price
of the controlled services transaction over
total services costs, as expressed as a
percentage of total services costs, is
determined to be 4%. Because the median
comparable markup on total services costs as
determined by an application of the section
482 regulations without regard to this
paragraph (b) is 4%, which is less than 7%,
the custodial and maintenance services
constitute low margin covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of
this section.
Example 18. Shared services arrangement
and reliable measure of reasonably
anticipated benefit (allocation key). (i)
Company P operates a centralized data
processing facility that performs automated
invoice processing and order generation for
all of its subsidiaries, Companies X, Y, Z,
pursuant to a shared services arrangement.
(ii) In evaluating the shares of reasonably
anticipated benefits from the centralized data
processing services, the total value of the
merchandise on the invoices and orders may
not provide the most reliable measure of
reasonably anticipated benefits shares,
because value of merchandise sold does not
bear a relationship to the anticipated benefits
from the underlying covered services.
(iii) The total volume of orders and
invoices processed may provide a more
reliable basis for evaluating the shares of
reasonably anticipated benefits from the data
processing services. Alternatively, depending
on the facts and circumstances, total central
processing unit time attributable to the
transactions of each subsidiary may provide
a more reliable basis on which to evaluate the
shares of reasonably anticipated benefits.
Example 19. Shared services arrangement
and reliable measure of reasonably
anticipated benefit (allocation key). (i)
Company P operates a centralized center that
PO 00000
Frm 00029
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
performs human resources functions, such as
administration of pension, retirement, and
health insurance plans that are made
available to employees of its subsidiaries,
Companies X, Y, Z, pursuant to a shared
services arrangement.
(ii) In evaluating the shares of reasonably
anticipated benefits from these centralized
services, the total revenues of each subsidiary
may not provide the most reliable measure of
reasonably anticipated benefit shares,
because total revenues do not bear a
relationship to the shares of reasonably
anticipated benefits from the underlying
services.
(iii) Employee headcount or total
compensation paid to employees may
provide a more reliable basis for evaluating
the shares of reasonably anticipated benefits
from the covered services.
Example 20. Shared services arrangement
and reliable measure of reasonably
anticipated benefit (allocation key). (i)
Company P performs human resource
services (service A) on behalf of the PXYZ
Group that qualify for the services cost
method. Under that method, Company P
determines the amount charged for these
services pursuant to a shared services
arrangement based on an application of
paragraph (b)(5) of this section. Service A
constitutes a specified covered service
described in a revenue procedure pursuant to
paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section. The total
services costs for service A otherwise
determined under the services cost method is
300.
(ii) Companies X, Y and Z reasonably
anticipate benefits from service A. Company
P does not reasonably anticipate benefits
from service A. Assume that if relative
reasonably anticipated benefits were
precisely known, the appropriate allocation
of charges pursuant to § 1.482–9T(k) to
Company X, Y and Z for service A is as
follows:
SERVICE A
[Total cost 300]
Company
X .....................................................
Y .....................................................
Z ......................................................
150
75
75
(iii) The total number of employees
(employee headcount) in each company is as
follows:
Company X—600 employees.
Company Y—250 employees.
Company Z—250 employees.
(iv) Company P allocates the 300 total
services costs of service A based on employee
headcount as follows:
SERVICE A
[Total cost 300]
Company
Allocation key
Headcount
X .......................
Y .......................
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
600
250
Amount
164
68
44494
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
SERVICE A—Continued
[Total cost 300]
Company
Allocation key
Headcount
Z ........................
Amount
250
68
(v) Based on these facts, Company P may
reasonably conclude that the employee
headcount allocation basis most reliably
reflects the participants’ respective shares of
the reasonably anticipated benefits
attributable to service A.
Example 21. Shared services arrangement
and reliable measure of reasonably
anticipated benefit (allocation key). (i)
Company P performs accounts payable
services (service B) on behalf of the PXYZ
Group and determines the amount charged
for the services under such method pursuant
to a shared services arrangement based on an
application of paragraph (b)(5) of this section.
Service B is a specified covered service
described in a revenue procedure pursuant to
paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section. The total
services costs for service B otherwise
determined under the services cost method is
500.
(ii) Companies X, Y and Z reasonably
anticipate benefits from service B. Company
P does not reasonably anticipate benefits
from service B. Assume that if relative
reasonably anticipated benefits were
precisely known, the appropriate allocation
of charges pursuant to § 1.482–9T(k) to
Companies X, Y and Z for service B is as
follows:
SERVICE B
[Total cost 500]
Company
X .....................................................
Y .....................................................
Z ......................................................
125
205
170
(iii) The total number of employees
(employee headcount) in each company is as
follows:
Company X—600.
Company Y—200.
Company Z—200.
(iv) The total number of transactions
(transaction volume) with uncontrolled
customers by each company is as follows:
Company X—2,000.
Company Y—4,000.
Company Z—3,500.
(v) If Company P allocated the 500 total
services costs of service B based on employee
headcount, the resulting allocation would be
as follows:
SERVICE B
[Total cost 500]
Company
Allocation key
Headcount
X .......................
Y .......................
Z ........................
Amount
600
200
200
300
100
100
(vi) In contrast, if Company P used volume
of transactions with uncontrolled customers
as the allocation basis under the shared
services arrangement, the allocation would
be as follows:
behalf of the PXYZ Group that qualify for the
services cost method. Company P determines
the amount charged for these services under
such method pursuant to a shared services
arrangement based on an application of
paragraph (b)(5) of this section. Service A
and service B are specified covered services
described in a revenue procedure pursuant to
paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section. The total
services costs otherwise determined under
the services cost method for service A is 300
and for service B is 500; total services costs
for services A and B are 800. Company P
determines that aggregation of services A and
B for purposes of the arrangement is
appropriate.
(ii) Companies X, Y and Z reasonably
anticipate benefits from services A and B.
Company P does not reasonably anticipate
benefits from services A and B. Assume that
if relative reasonably anticipated benefits
were precisely known, the appropriate
allocation of total charges pursuant to
§ 1.482–9T(k) to Companies X, Y and Z for
services A and B is as follows:
SERVICES A AND B
[Total cost 800]
SERVICE B
Company
[Total cost 500]
X .....................................................
Y .....................................................
Z ......................................................
Company
Allocation key
Transaction
volume
X .......................
Y .......................
Z ........................
Amount
2,000
4,000
3,500
105
211
184
(vi) Based on these facts, Company P may
reasonably conclude that the transaction
volume, but not the employee headcount,
allocation basis most reliably reflects the
participants’ respective shares of the
reasonably anticipated benefits attributable to
service B.
Example 22. Shared services arrangement
and aggregation. (i) Company P performs
human resource services (service A) and
accounts payable services (service B) on
350
100
350
(iii) The total volume of transactions with
uncontrolled customers in each company is
as follows:
Company X—2,000.
Company Y—4,000.
Company Z—4,000.
(iv) The total number of employees in each
company is as follows:
Company X—600.
Company Y—200.
Company Z—200.
(v) If Company P allocated the 800 total
services costs of services A and B based on
transaction volume or employee headcount,
the resulting allocation would be as follows:
AGGREGATED SERVICES AB
[Total cost 800]
Allocation key
Company
Transaction
volume
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
X .......................................................................................................................................
Y .......................................................................................................................................
Z .......................................................................................................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
PO 00000
Frm 00030
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
2,000
4,000
4,000
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
Allocation key
Amount
160
320
320
04AUR3
Headcount
600
200
200
Amount
480
160
160
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
(vi) In contrast, if aggregated services AB
were allocated reference to the total U.S.
dollar value of sales to uncontrolled parties
(trade sales) by each company, the following
results would obtain:
AGGREGATED SERVICES AB
[Total costs 800]
Allocation key
Company
Trade sales
(millions)
X ...............
Y ...............
Z ................
Amount
$400
120
500
314
94
392
(vii) Based on these facts, Company P may
reasonably conclude that the trade sales, but
not the transaction volume or the employee
headcount, allocation basis most reliably
reflects the participants’ respective shares of
the reasonably anticipated benefits
attributable to services AB.
Example 23. Shared services arrangement
and aggregation. (i) Company P performs
services A through P on behalf of the PXYZ
Group that qualify for the services cost
method. Company P determines the amount
charged for these services under such method
pursuant to a shared services arrangement
based on an application of paragraph (b)(5)
of this section. All of these services A
through Z constitute either specified covered
services or low margin covered services
described in paragraph (b)(4) of this section.
The total services costs for services A
through Z otherwise determined under the
services cost method is 500. Company P
determines that aggregation of services A
through Z for purposes of the arrangement is
appropriate.
(ii) Companies X and Y reasonably
anticipate benefits from services A through Z
and Company Z reasonably anticipates
benefits from services A through X but not
from services Y or Z (Company Z performs
services similar to services Y and Z on its
own behalf). Company P does not reasonably
anticipate benefits from services A through Z.
Assume that if relative reasonably
anticipated benefits were precisely known,
the appropriate allocation of total charges
pursuant to § 1.482–9T(k) to Company X, Y
and Z for services A through Z is as follows:
Services A–M
(cost 490)
Company
Services N–P
(cost 10)
Services A–P
(total cost 500)
90
240
160
5
5
........................
95
245
160
X ...................................................................................................................................................
Y ...................................................................................................................................................
Z ...................................................................................................................................................
(iii) The total volume of transactions with
uncontrolled customers in each company is
as follows:
Company X—2,000.
Company Y—4,500.
Company Z—3,500.
(iv) Company P allocates the 500 total
services costs of services A through Z based
on transaction volume as follows:
AGGREGATED SERVICES A–Z
[Total costs 500]
Allocation key
Company
Transaction
volume
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
X .......................
Y .......................
Z ........................
Amount
2,000
4,500
3,500
100
225
175
(v) Based on these facts, Company P may
reasonably conclude that the transaction
volume allocation basis most reliably reflects
the participants’ respective shares of the
reasonably anticipated benefits attributable to
services A through Z.
Example 24. Renderer reasonably
anticipates benefits. (i) Company P renders
services on behalf of the PXYZ Group that
qualify for the services cost method.
Company P determines the amount charged
for these services under such method.
Company P’s share of reasonably anticipated
benefits from services A, B, C, and D is 20%
of the total reasonably anticipated benefits of
all participants. Company P’s total services
cost for services A, B, C, and D charged
within the Group is 100.
(ii) Based on an application of paragraph
(b)(5) of this section, Company P charges 80
which is allocated among Companies X, Y
and Z. No charge is made to Company P
under the shared services arrangement for
activities that it performs on its own behalf.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
Example 25. Coordination with cost
sharing arrangement. (i) Company P
performs human resource services (service A)
on behalf of the PXYZ Group that qualify for
the services cost method. Company P
determines the amount charged for these
services under such method pursuant to a
shared services arrangement based on an
application of paragraph (b)(5) of this section.
Service A constitutes a specified covered
service described in a revenue procedure
pursuant to paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section.
The total services costs for service A
otherwise determined under the services cost
method is 300.
(ii) Company X, Y, Z and P reasonably
anticipate benefits from service A. Using a
basis of allocation that is consistent with the
controlled participants’ respective shares of
the reasonably anticipated benefits from the
shared services, the total charge of 300 is
allocated as follows:
X—100.
Y—50.
Z—25.
P—125.
(iii) In addition to performing services, P
undertakes 500 of R&D and incurs
manufacturing and other costs of 1,000.
(iv) Companies P and X enter into a cost
sharing arrangement in accordance with
§ 1.482–7. Under the arrangement, Company
P will undertake all intangible development
activities. All of Company P’s research and
development (R&D) activity is devoted to the
intangible development activity under the
cost sharing arrangement. Company P will
manufacture, market, and otherwise exploit
the product in its defined territory.
Companies P and X will share intangible
development costs in accordance with their
reasonably anticipated benefits from the
intangibles, and Company X will make
payments to Company P as required under
§ 1.482–7. Company X will manufacture,
market, and otherwise exploit the product in
the rest of the world.
PO 00000
44495
Frm 00031
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(v) A portion of the charge under the
shared services arrangement is in turn
allocable to the intangible development
activity undertaken by Company P. The most
reliable estimate of the proportion allocable
to the intangible development activity is
determined to be 500 (Company P’s R&D
expenses) divided by 1,500 (Company P’s
total non-covered services costs), or onethird. Accordingly, one-third of Company P’s
charge of 125, or 42, is allocated to the
intangible development activity. Companies
P and X must share the intangible
development costs of the cost shared
intangibles (including the charge of 42 that
is allocated under the shared services
arrangement) in proportion to their
respective shares of reasonably anticipated
benefits under the cost sharing arrangement.
That is, the reasonably anticipated benefit
shares under the cost sharing arrangement
are determined separately from reasonably
anticipated benefit shares under the shared
services arrangement.
Example 26. Coordination with cost
sharing arrangement. (i) The facts and
analysis are the same as in Example 25,
except that Company X also performs
intangible development activities related to
the cost sharing arrangement. Using a basis
of allocation that is consistent with the
controlled participants’ respective shares of
the reasonably anticipated benefits from the
shared services, the 300 of service costs is
allocated as follows:
X—100.
Y—50.
Z—25.
P—125.
(ii) In addition to performing services,
Company P undertakes 500 of R&D and
incurs manufacturing and other costs of
1,000. Company X undertakes 400 of R&D
and incurs manufacturing and other costs of
600.
(iii) Companies P and X enter into a cost
sharing arrangement in accordance with
§ 1.482–7. Under the arrangement, both
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44496
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Companies P and X will undertake intangible
development activities. All of the research
and development activity conducted by
Companies P and X is devoted to the
intangible development activity under the
cost sharing arrangement. Both Companies P
and X will manufacture, market, and
otherwise exploit the product in their
respective territories and will share
intangible development costs in accordance
with their reasonably anticipated benefits
from the intangibles, and both will make
payments as required under § 1.482–7.
(iv) A portion of the charge under the
shared services arrangement is in turn
allocable to the intangible development
activities undertaken by Companies P and X.
The most reliable estimate of the portion
allocable to Company P’s intangible
development activity is determined to be 500
(Company P’s R&D expenses) divided by
1,500 (P’s total non-covered services costs),
or one-third. Accordingly, one-third of
Company P’s allocated services cost method
charge of 125, or 42, is allocated to its
intangible development activity.
(v) In addition, it is necessary to determine
the portion of the charge under the shared
services arrangement to Company X that
should be further allocated to Company X’s
intangible development activities under the
cost sharing arrangement. The most reliable
estimate of the portion allocable to Company
X’s intangible development activity is 400
(Company X’s R&D expenses) divided by
1,000 (Company X’s costs), or 40%.
Accordingly, 40% of the 100 that was
allocated to Company X, or 40, is allocated
in turn to Company X’s intangible
development activities. Company X makes a
payment to Company P of 100 under the
shared services arrangement and includes 40
of services cost method charges in the pool
of intangible development costs.
(vi) The parties’ respective contributions to
intangible development costs under the cost
sharing arrangement are as follows:
P: 500 + (0.333 * 125) = 542
X: 400 + (0.40 * 100) = 440
(c) Comparable uncontrolled services
price method—(1) In general. The
comparable uncontrolled services price
method evaluates whether the amount
charged in a controlled services
transaction is arm’s length by reference
to the amount charged in a comparable
uncontrolled services transaction. The
comparable uncontrolled services price
method is ordinarily used where the
controlled services either are identical
to or have a high degree of similarity to
the services in the uncontrolled
transaction.
(2) Comparability and reliability
considerations—(i) In general. Whether
results derived from application of this
method are the most reliable measure of
the arm’s length result must be
determined using the factors described
under the best method rule in § 1.482–
1(c). The application of these factors
under the comparable uncontrolled
services price method is discussed in
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
paragraphs (c)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this
section.
(ii) Comparability—(A) In general.
The degree of comparability between
controlled and uncontrolled
transactions is determined by applying
the provisions of § 1.482–1(d). Although
all of the factors described in § 1.482–
1(d)(3) must be considered, similarity of
the services rendered, and of the
intangibles (if any) used in performing
the services, generally will have the
greatest effects on comparability under
this method. In addition, because even
minor differences in contractual terms
or economic conditions could materially
affect the amount charged in an
uncontrolled transaction, comparability
under this method depends on close
similarity with respect to these factors,
or adjustments to account for any
differences. The results derived from
applying the comparable uncontrolled
services price method generally will be
the most direct and reliable measure of
an arm’s length price for the controlled
transaction if an uncontrolled
transaction has no differences from the
controlled transaction that would affect
the price, or if there are only minor
differences that have a definite and
reasonably ascertainable effect on price
and for which appropriate adjustments
are made. If such adjustments cannot be
made, or if there are more than minor
differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions, the
comparable uncontrolled services price
method may be used, but the reliability
of the results as a measure of the arm’s
length price will be reduced. Further, if
there are material differences for which
reliable adjustments cannot be made,
this method ordinarily will not provide
a reliable measure of an arm’s length
result.
(B) Adjustments for differences
between controlled and uncontrolled
transactions. If there are differences
between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions that would
affect price, adjustments should be
made to the price of the uncontrolled
transaction according to the
comparability provisions of § 1.482–
1(d)(2). Specific examples of factors that
may be particularly relevant to
application of this method include—
(1) Quality of the services rendered;
(2) Contractual terms (for example,
scope and terms of warranties or
guarantees regarding the services,
volume, credit and payment terms,
allocation of risks, including any
contingent-payment terms and whether
costs were incurred without a provision
for current reimbursement);
(3) Intangibles (if any) used in
rendering the services;
PO 00000
Frm 00032
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(4) Geographic market in which the
services are rendered or received;
(5) Risks borne (for example, costs
incurred to render the services, without
provision for current reimbursement);
(6) Duration or quantitative measure
of services rendered;
(7) Collateral transactions or ongoing
business relationships between the
renderer and the recipient, including
arrangement for the provision of
tangible property in connection with the
services; and
(8) Alternatives realistically available
to the renderer and the recipient.
(iii) Data and assumptions. The
reliability of the results derived from the
comparable uncontrolled services price
method is affected by the completeness
and accuracy of the data used and the
reliability of the assumptions made to
apply the method. See § 1.482–1(c) (best
method rule).
(3) Arm’s length range. See § 1.482–
1(e)(2) for the determination of an arm’s
length range.
(4) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (c) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Internal comparable
uncontrolled services price. Company A, a
United States corporation, performs
shipping, stevedoring, and related services
for controlled and uncontrolled parties on a
short-term or as-needed basis. Company A
charges uncontrolled parties in Country X a
uniform fee of $60 per container to place
loaded cargo containers in Country X on
oceangoing vessels for marine transportation.
Company A also performs identical services
in Country X for its wholly-owned
subsidiary, Company B, and there are no
substantial differences between the
controlled and uncontrolled transactions. In
evaluating the appropriate measure of the
arm’s length price for the container-loading
services performed for Company B, because
Company A renders substantially identical
services in Country X to both controlled and
uncontrolled parties, it is determined that the
comparable uncontrolled services price
constitutes the best method for determining
the arm’s length price for the controlled
services transaction. Based on the reliable
data provided by Company A concerning the
price charged for services in comparable
uncontrolled transactions, a loading charge of
$60 per cargo container will be considered
the most reliable measure of the arm’s length
price for the services rendered to Company
B. See paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A) of this section.
Example 2. External comparable
uncontrolled services price. (i) The facts are
the same as in Example 1, except that
Company A performs services for Company
B, but not for uncontrolled parties. Based on
information obtained from unrelated parties
(which is determined to be reliable under the
comparability standards set forth in
paragraph (c)(2) of this section), it is
determined that uncontrolled parties in
Country X perform services comparable to
those rendered by Company A to Company
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
B, and that such parties charge $60 per cargo
container.
(ii) In evaluating the appropriate measure
of an arm’s length price for the loading
services that Company A renders to Company
B, the $60 per cargo container charge is
considered evidence of a comparable
uncontrolled services price. See paragraph
(c)(2)(ii)(A) of this section.
Example 3. External comparable
uncontrolled services price. The facts are the
same as in Example 2, except that
uncontrolled parties in Country X render
similar loading and stevedoring services, but
only under contracts that have a minimum
term of one year. If the difference in the
duration of the services has a material effect
on prices, adjustments to account for these
differences must be made to the results of the
uncontrolled transactions according to the
provisions of § 1.482–1(d)(2), and such
adjusted results may be used as a measure of
the arm’s length result.
Example 4. Use of valuable intangibles. (i)
Company A, a United States corporation in
the biotechnology sector, renders research
and development services exclusively to its
affiliates. Company B is Company A’s
wholly-owned subsidiary in Country X.
Company A renders research and
development services to Company B.
(ii) In performing its research and
development services function, Company A
uses proprietary software that it developed
internally. Company A uses the software to
evaluate certain genetically engineered
compounds developed by Company B.
Company A owns the copyright on this
software and does not license it to
uncontrolled parties.
(iii) No uncontrolled parties can be
identified that perform services identical or
with a high degree of similarity to those
performed by Company A. Because there are
material differences for which reliable
adjustments cannot be made, the comparable
uncontrolled services price method is
unlikely to provide a reliable measure of the
arm’s length price. See paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A)
of this section.
Example 5. Internal comparable. (i)
Company A, a United States corporation, and
its subsidiaries render computer consulting
services relating to systems integration and
networking to business clients in various
countries. Company A and its subsidiaries
render only consulting services, and do not
manufacture computer hardware or software
nor distribute such products. The controlled
group is organized according to industry
specialization, with key industry specialists
working for Company A. These personnel
typically form the core consulting group that
teams with consultants from the localcountry subsidiaries to serve clients in the
subsidiaries’ respective countries.
(ii) Company A and its subsidiaries
sometimes undertake engagements directly
for clients, and sometimes work as
subcontractors to unrelated parties on more
extensive supply-chain consulting
engagements for clients. In undertaking the
latter engagements with third party
consultants, Company A typically prices its
services based on consulting hours worked
multiplied by a rate determined for each
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
category of employee. The company also
charges, at no markup, for out-of-pocket
expenses such as travel, lodging, and data
acquisition charges. The Company has
established the following schedule of hourly
rates:
Category
Project managers ......
Technical staff ...........
Rate
$400 per hour.
$300 per hour.
(iii) Thus, for example, a project involving
100 hours of the time of project managers and
400 hours of technical staff time would result
in the following project fees (without regard
to any out-of-pocket expenses): ([100 hrs. ×
$400/hr.] + [400 hrs. × $300/hr.]) = $40,000
+ $120,000 = $160,000.
(iv) Company B, a Country X subsidiary of
Company A, contracts to perform consulting
services for a Country X client in the banking
industry. In undertaking this engagement,
Company B uses its own consultants and also
uses Company A project managers and
technical staff that specialize in the banking
industry for 75 hours and 380 hours,
respectively. In determining an arm’s length
charge, the price that Company A charges for
consulting services as a subcontractor in
comparable uncontrolled transactions will be
considered evidence of a comparable
uncontrolled services price. Thus, in this
case, a payment of $144,000, (or [75 hrs. ×
$400/hr.] + [380 hrs. × $300/hr.] = $30,000
+ $114,000) may be used as a measure of the
arm’s length price for the work performed by
Company A project mangers and technical
staff. In addition, if the comparable
uncontrolled services price method is used,
then, consistent with the practices employed
by the comparables with respect to similar
types of expenses, Company B must
reimburse Company A for appropriate out-ofpocket expenses. See paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A)
of this section.
Example 6. Adjustments for differences. (i)
The facts are the same as in Example 5,
except that the engagement is undertaken
with the client on a fixed fee basis. That is,
prior to undertaking the engagement
Company B and Company A estimate the
resources required to undertake the
engagement, and, based on hourly fee rates,
charge the client a single fee for completion
of the project. Company A’s portion of the
engagement results in fees of $144,000.
(ii) The engagement, once undertaken,
requires 20% more hours by each of
Companies A and B than originally
estimated. Nevertheless, the unrelated client
pays the fixed fee that was agreed upon at the
start of the engagement. Company B pays
Company A $144,000, in accordance with the
fixed fee arrangement.
(iii) Company A often enters into similar
fixed fee engagements with clients. In
addition, Company A’s records for similar
engagements show that when it experiences
cost overruns, it does not collect additional
fees from the client for the difference
between projected and actual hours.
Accordingly, in evaluating whether the fees
paid by Company B to Company A are arm’s
length, it is determined that no adjustments
to the intercompany service charge are
PO 00000
Frm 00033
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44497
warranted. See § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii) and
paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A) of this section.
(5) Indirect evidence of the price of a
comparable uncontrolled services
transaction—(i) In general. The price of
a comparable uncontrolled services
transaction may be derived based on
indirect measures of the price charged
in comparable uncontrolled services
transactions, but only if—
(A) The data are widely and routinely
used in the ordinary course of business
in the particular industry or market
segment for purposes of determining
prices actually charged in comparable
uncontrolled services transactions;
(B) The data are used to set prices in
the controlled services transaction in
the same way they are used to set prices
in uncontrolled services transactions of
the controlled taxpayer, or in the same
way they are used by uncontrolled
taxpayers to set prices in uncontrolled
services transactions; and
(C) The amount charged in the
controlled services transaction may be
reliably adjusted to reflect differences in
quality of the services, contractual
terms, market conditions, risks borne
(including contingent-payment terms),
duration or quantitative measure of
services rendered, and other factors that
may affect the price to which
uncontrolled taxpayers would agree.
(ii) Example. The following example
illustrates this paragraph (c)(5):
Example. Indirect evidence of comparable
uncontrolled services price. (i) Company A is
a United States insurance company.
Company A’s wholly-owned Country X
subsidiary, Company B, performs specialized
risk analysis for Company A as well as for
uncontrolled parties. In determining the
price actually charged to uncontrolled
entities for performing such risk analysis,
Company B uses a proprietary, multi-factor
computer program, which relies on the gross
value of the policies in the customer’s
portfolio, the relative composition of those
policies, their location, and the estimated
number of personnel hours necessary to
complete the project. Uncontrolled
companies that perform comparable risk
analysis in the same industry or marketsegment use similar proprietary computer
programs to price transactions with
uncontrolled customers (the competitors’
programs may incorporate different inputs, or
may assign different weights or values to
individual inputs, in arriving at the price).
(ii) During the taxable year subject to audit,
Company B performed risk analysis for
uncontrolled parties as well as for Company
A. Because prices charged to uncontrolled
customers reflected the composition of each
customer’s portfolio together with other
factors, the prices charged in Company B’s
uncontrolled transactions do not provide a
reliable basis for determining the comparable
uncontrolled services price for the similar
services rendered to Company A. However,
in evaluating an arm’s length price for the
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44498
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
studies performed by Company B for
Company A, Company B’s proprietary
computer program may be considered as
indirect evidence of the comparable
uncontrolled services price that would be
charged to perform the services for Company
A. The reliability of the results obtained by
application of this internal computer
program as a measure of an arm’s length
price for the services will be increased to the
extent that Company A used the internal
computer program to generate actual
transaction prices for risk-analysis studies
performed for uncontrolled parties during the
same taxable year under audit; Company A
used data that are widely and routinely used
in the ordinary course of business in the
insurance industry to determine the price
charged; and Company A reliably adjusted
the price charged in the controlled services
transaction to reflect differences that may
affect the price to which uncontrolled
taxpayers would agree.
(d) Gross services margin method—(1)
In general. The gross services margin
method evaluates whether the amount
charged in a controlled services
transaction is arm’s length by reference
to the gross profit margin realized in
comparable uncontrolled transactions.
This method ordinarily is used in cases
where a controlled taxpayer performs
services or functions in connection with
an uncontrolled transaction between a
member of the controlled group and an
uncontrolled taxpayer. This method
may be used where a controlled
taxpayer renders services (agent
services) to another member of the
controlled group in connection with a
transaction between that other member
and an uncontrolled taxpayer. This
method also may be used in cases where
a controlled taxpayer contracts to
provide services to an uncontrolled
taxpayer (intermediary function) and
another member of the controlled group
actually performs a portion of the
services provided.
(2) Determination of arm’s length
price—(i) In general. The gross services
margin method evaluates whether the
price charged or amount retained by a
controlled taxpayer in the controlled
services transaction in connection with
the relevant uncontrolled transaction is
arm’s length by determining the
appropriate gross profit of the controlled
taxpayer.
(ii) Relevant uncontrolled transaction.
The relevant uncontrolled transaction is
a transaction between a member of the
controlled group and an uncontrolled
taxpayer as to which the controlled
taxpayer performs agent services or an
intermediary function.
(iii) Applicable uncontrolled price.
The applicable uncontrolled price is the
price paid or received by the
uncontrolled taxpayer in the relevant
uncontrolled transaction.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
(iv) Appropriate gross services profit.
The appropriate gross services profit is
computed by multiplying the applicable
uncontrolled price by the gross services
profit margin in comparable
uncontrolled transactions. The
determination of the appropriate gross
services profit will take into account
any functions performed by other
members of the controlled group, as
well as any other relevant factors
described in § 1.482–1(d)(3). The
comparable gross services profit margin
may be determined by reference to the
commission in an uncontrolled
transaction, where that commission is
stated as a percentage of the price
charged in the uncontrolled transaction.
(v) Arm’s length range. See § 1.482–
1(e)(2) for determination of the arm’s
length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability
considerations—(i) In general. Whether
results derived from application of this
method are the most reliable measure of
the arm’s length result must be
determined using the factors described
under the best method rule in § 1.482–
1(c). The application of these factors
under the gross services margin method
is discussed in paragraphs (d)(3)(ii) and
(iii) of this section.
(ii) Comparability—(A) Functional
comparability. The degree of
comparability between an uncontrolled
transaction and a controlled transaction
is determined by applying the
comparability provisions of § 1.482–
1(d). A gross services profit provides
compensation for services or functions
that bear a relationship to the relevant
uncontrolled transaction, including an
operating profit in return for the
investment of capital and the
assumption of risks by the controlled
taxpayer performing the services or
functions under review. Therefore,
although all of the factors described in
§ 1.482–1(d)(3) must be considered,
comparability under this method is
particularly dependent on similarity of
services or functions performed, risks
borne, intangibles (if any) used in
providing the services or functions, and
contractual terms, or adjustments to
account for the effects of any such
differences. If possible, the appropriate
gross services profit margin should be
derived from comparable uncontrolled
transactions by the controlled taxpayer
under review, because similar
characteristics are more likely found
among different transactions by the
same controlled taxpayer than among
transactions by other parties. In the
absence of comparable uncontrolled
transactions involving the same
controlled taxpayer, an appropriate
gross services profit margin may be
PO 00000
Frm 00034
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
derived from transactions of
uncontrolled taxpayers involving
comparable services or functions with
respect to similarly related transactions.
(B) Other comparability factors.
Comparability under this method is not
dependent on close similarity of the
relevant uncontrolled transaction to the
related transactions involved in the
uncontrolled comparables. However,
substantial differences in the nature of
the relevant uncontrolled transaction
and the relevant transactions involved
in the uncontrolled comparables, such
as differences in the type of property
transferred or service provided in the
relevant uncontrolled transaction, may
indicate significant differences in the
services or functions performed by the
controlled and uncontrolled taxpayers
with respect to their respective relevant
transactions. Thus, it ordinarily would
be expected that the services or
functions performed in the controlled
and uncontrolled transactions would be
with respect to relevant transactions
involving the transfer of property within
the same product categories or the
provision of services of the same general
type (for example, informationtechnology systems design).
Furthermore, significant differences in
the intangibles (if any) used by the
controlled taxpayer in the controlled
services transaction as distinct from the
uncontrolled comparables may also
affect the reliability of the comparison.
Finally, the reliability of profit measures
based on gross services profit may be
adversely affected by factors that have
less effect on prices. For example, gross
services profit may be affected by a
variety of other factors, including cost
structures or efficiency (for example,
differences in the level of experience of
the employees performing the service in
the controlled and uncontrolled
transactions). Accordingly, if material
differences in these factors are
identified based on objective evidence,
the reliability of the analysis may be
affected.
(C) Adjustments for differences
between controlled and uncontrolled
transactions. If there are material
differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions that would
affect the gross services profit margin,
adjustments should be made to the gross
services profit margin, according to the
comparability provisions of § 1.482–
1(d)(2). For this purpose, consideration
of the total services costs associated
with functions performed and risks
assumed may be necessary because
differences in functions performed are
often reflected in these costs. If there are
differences in functions performed,
however, the effect on gross services
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
profit of such differences is not
necessarily equal to the differences in
the amount of related costs. Specific
examples of factors that may be
particularly relevant to this method
include—
(1) Contractual terms (for example,
scope and terms of warranties or
guarantees regarding the services or
function, volume, credit and payment
terms, and allocation of risks, including
any contingent-payment terms);
(2) Intangibles (if any) used in
performing the services or function;
(3) Geographic market in which the
services or function are performed or in
which the relevant uncontrolled
transaction takes place; and
(4) Risks borne, including, if
applicable, inventory-type risk.
(D) Buy-sell distributor. If a controlled
taxpayer that performs an agent service
or intermediary function is comparable
to a distributor that takes title to goods
and resells them, the gross profit margin
earned by such distributor on
uncontrolled sales, stated as a
percentage of the price for the goods,
may be used as the comparable gross
services profit margin.
(iii) Data and assumptions—(A) In
general. The reliability of the results
derived from the gross services margin
method is affected by the completeness
and accuracy of the data used and the
reliability of the assumptions made to
apply this method. See § 1.482–1(c)
(best method rule).
(B) Consistency in accounting. The
degree of consistency in accounting
practices between the controlled
transaction and the uncontrolled
comparables that materially affect the
gross services profit margin affects the
reliability of the results under this
method.
(4) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (d) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Agent services. Company A and
Company B are members of a controlled
group. Company A is a foreign manufacturer
of industrial equipment. Company B is a U.S.
company that acts as a commission agent for
Company A by arranging for Company A to
make direct sales of the equipment it
manufactures to unrelated purchasers in the
U.S. market. Company B does not take title
to the equipment but instead receives from
Company A commissions that are determined
as a specified percentage of the sales price for
the equipment that is charged by Company
A to the unrelated purchaser. Company B
also arranges for direct sales of similar
equipment by unrelated foreign
manufacturers to unrelated purchasers in the
U.S. market. Company B charges these
unrelated foreign manufacturers a
commission fee of 5% of the sales price
charged by the unrelated foreign
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
manufacturers to the unrelated U.S.
purchasers for the equipment. Information
regarding the comparable agent services
provided by Company B to unrelated foreign
manufacturers is sufficiently complete to
conclude that it is likely that all material
differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions have been
identified and adjustments for such
differences have been made. If the
comparable gross services profit margin is
5% of the price charged in the relevant
transactions involved in the uncontrolled
comparables, then the appropriate gross
services profit that Company B may earn and
the arm’s length price that it may charge
Company A for its agent services is equal to
5% of the applicable uncontrolled price
charged by Company A in sales of equipment
in the relevant uncontrolled transactions.
Example 2. Agent services. The facts are
the same as in Example 1, except that
Company B does not act as a commission
agent for unrelated parties and it is not
possible to obtain reliable information
concerning commission rates charged by
uncontrolled commission agents that engage
in comparable transactions with respect to
relevant sales of property. It is possible,
however, to obtain reliable information
regarding the gross profit margins earned by
unrelated parties that briefly take title to and
then resell similar property in uncontrolled
transactions, in which they purchase the
property from foreign manufacturers and
resell the property to purchasers in the U.S.
market. Analysis of the facts and
circumstances indicates that, aside from
certain minor differences for which
adjustments can be made, the uncontrolled
parties that resell property perform similar
functions and assume similar risks as
Company B performs and assumes when it
acts as a commission agent for Company A’s
sales of property. Under these circumstances,
the gross profit margin earned by the
unrelated distributors on the purchase and
resale of property may be used, subject to any
adjustments for any material differences
between the controlled and uncontrolled
transactions, as a comparable gross services
profit margin. The appropriate gross services
profit that Company B may earn and the
arm’s length price that it may charge
Company A for its agent services is therefore
equal to this comparable gross services
margin, multiplied by the applicable
uncontrolled price charged by Company A in
its sales of equipment in the relevant
uncontrolled transactions.
Example 3. Agent services. (i) Company A
and Company B are members of a controlled
group. Company A is a U.S. corporation that
renders computer consulting services,
including systems integration and
networking, to business clients.
(ii) In undertaking engagements with
clients, Company A in some cases pays a
commission of 3% of its total fees to
unrelated parties that assist Company A in
obtaining consulting engagements. Typically,
such fees are paid to non-computer
consulting firms that provide strategic
management services for their clients. When
Company A obtains a consulting engagement
with a client of a non-computer consulting
PO 00000
Frm 00035
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44499
firm, Company A does not subcontract with
the other consulting firm, nor does the other
consulting firm play any role in Company A’s
consulting engagement.
(iii) Company B, a Country X subsidiary of
Company A, assists Company A in obtaining
an engagement to perform computer
consulting services for a Company B banking
industry client in Country X. Although
Company B has an established relationship
with its Country X client and was
instrumental in arranging for Company A’s
engagement with the client, Company A’s
particular expertise was the primary
consideration in motivating the client to
engage Company A. Based on the relative
contributions of Companies A and B in
obtaining and undertaking the engagement,
Company B’s role was primarily to facilitate
the consulting engagement between
Company A and the Country X client.
Information regarding the commissions paid
by Company A to unrelated parties for
providing similar services to facilitate
Company A’s consulting engagements is
sufficiently complete to conclude that it is
likely that all material differences between
these uncontrolled transactions and the
controlled transaction between Company B
and Company A have been identified and
that appropriate adjustments have been made
for any such differences. If the comparable
gross services margin earned by unrelated
parties in providing such agent services is
3% of total fees charged in the relevant
transactions involved in the uncontrolled
comparables, then the appropriate gross
services profit that Company B may earn and
the arm’s length price that it may charge
Company A for its agent services is equal to
this comparable gross services margin (3%),
multiplied by the applicable uncontrolled
price charged by Company A in its relevant
uncontrolled consulting engagement with
Company B’s client.
Example 4. Intermediary function. (i) The
facts are the same as in Example 3, except
that Company B contracts directly with its
Country X client to provide computer
consulting services and Company A performs
the consulting services on behalf of Company
B. Company A does not enter into a
consulting engagement with Company B’s
Country X client. Instead, Company B
charges its Country X client an uncontrolled
price for the consulting services, and
Company B pays a portion of the
uncontrolled price to Company A for
performing the consulting services on behalf
of Company B.
(ii) Analysis of the relative contributions of
Companies A and B in obtaining and
undertaking the consulting contract indicates
that Company B functioned primarily as an
intermediary contracting party, and the gross
services margin method is the most reliable
method for determining the amount that
Company B may retain as compensation for
its intermediary function with respect to
Company A’s consulting services. In this
case, therefore, because Company B entered
into the relevant uncontrolled transaction to
provide services, Company B receives the
applicable uncontrolled price that is paid by
the Country X client for the consulting
services. Company A technically performs
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
44500
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
services for Company B when it performs, on
behalf of Company B, the consulting services
Company B contracted to provide to the
Country X client. The arm’s length amount
that Company A may charge Company B for
performing the consulting services on
Company B’s behalf is equal to the applicable
uncontrolled price received by Company B in
the relevant uncontrolled transaction, less
Company B’s appropriate gross services
profit, which is the amount that Company B
may retain as compensation for performing
the intermediary function.
(iii) Reliable data concerning the
commissions that Company A paid to
uncontrolled parties for assisting it in
obtaining engagements to provide consulting
services similar to those it has provided on
behalf of Company B provide useful
information in applying the gross services
margin method. However, consideration
should be given to whether the third party
commission data may need to be adjusted to
account for any additional risk that Company
B may have assumed as a result of its
function as an intermediary contracting
party, compared with the risk it would have
assumed if it had provided agent services to
assist Company A in entering into an
engagement to provide its consulting service
directly. In this case, the information
regarding the commissions paid by Company
A to unrelated parties for providing agent
services to facilitate its performance of
consulting services for unrelated parties is
sufficiently complete to conclude that all
material differences between these
uncontrolled transactions and the controlled
performance of an intermediary function,
including possible differences in the amount
of risk assumed in connection with
performing that function, have been
identified and that appropriate adjustments
have been made. If the comparable gross
services margin earned by unrelated parties
in providing such agent services is 3% of
total fees charged in Company B’s relevant
uncontrolled transactions, then the
appropriate gross services profit that
Company B may retain as compensation for
performing an intermediary function (and the
amount, therefore, that is deducted from the
applicable uncontrolled price to arrive at the
arm’s length price that Company A may
charge Company B for performing consulting
services on Company B’s behalf) is equal to
this comparable gross services margin (3%),
multiplied by the applicable uncontrolled
price charged by Company B in its contract
to provide services to the uncontrolled party.
Example 5. External comparable. (i) The
facts are the same as in Example 4, except
that neither Company A nor Company B
engages in transactions with third parties that
facilitate similar consulting engagements.
(ii) Analysis of the relative contributions of
Companies A and B in obtaining and
undertaking the contract indicates that
Company B’s role was primarily to facilitate
the consulting arrangement between
Company A and the Country X client.
Although no reliable internal data are
available regarding comparable transactions
with uncontrolled entities, reliable data exist
regarding commission rates for similar
facilitating services between uncontrolled
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
parties. These data indicate that a 3%
commission (3% of total engagement fee) is
charged in such transactions. Information
regarding the uncontrolled comparables is
sufficiently complete to conclude that it is
likely that all material differences between
the controlled and uncontrolled transactions
have been identified and adjusted for. If the
appropriate gross services profit margin is
3% of total fees, then an arm’s length result
of the controlled services transaction is for
Company B to retain an amount equal to 3%
of total fees paid to it.
(e) Cost of services plus method—(1)
In general. The cost of services plus
method evaluates whether the amount
charged in a controlled services
transaction is arm’s length by reference
to the gross services profit markup
realized in comparable uncontrolled
transactions. The cost of services plus
method is ordinarily used in cases
where the controlled service renderer
provides the same or similar services to
both controlled and uncontrolled
parties. This method is ordinarily not
used in cases where the controlled
services transaction involves a
contingent-payment arrangement, as
described in paragraph (i)(2) of this
section.
(2) Determination of arm’s length
price—(i) In general. The cost of
services plus method measures an arm’s
length price by adding the appropriate
gross services profit to the controlled
taxpayer’s comparable transactional
costs.
(ii) Appropriate gross services profit.
The appropriate gross services profit is
computed by multiplying the controlled
taxpayer’s comparable transactional
costs by the gross services profit
markup, expressed as a percentage of
the comparable transactional costs
earned in comparable uncontrolled
transactions.
(iii) Comparable transactional costs.
Comparable transactional costs consist
of the costs of providing the services
under review that are taken into account
as the basis for determining the gross
services profit markup in comparable
uncontrolled transactions. Depending
on the facts and circumstances, such
costs typically include all compensation
attributable to employees directly
involved in the performance of such
services, materials and supplies
consumed or made available in
rendering such services, and may
include as well other costs of rendering
the services. Comparable transactional
costs must be determined on a basis that
will facilitate comparison with the
comparable uncontrolled transactions.
For that reason, comparable
transactional costs may not necessarily
equal total services costs, as defined in
paragraph (j) of this section, and in
PO 00000
Frm 00036
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
appropriate cases may be a subset of
total services costs. Generally accepted
accounting principles or Federal income
tax accounting rules (where Federal
income tax data for comparable
transactions or business activities are
available) may provide useful guidance
but will not conclusively establish the
appropriate comparable transactional
costs for purposes of this method.
(iv) Arm’s length range. See § 1.482–
1(e)(2) for determination of an arm’s
length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability
considerations—(i) In general. Whether
results derived from the application of
this method are the most reliable
measure of the arm’s length result must
be determined using the factors
described under the best method rule in
§ 1.482–1(c).
(ii) Comparability—(A) Functional
comparability. The degree of
comparability between controlled and
uncontrolled transactions is determined
by applying the comparability
provisions of § 1.482–1(d). A service
renderer’s gross services profit provides
compensation for performing services
related to the controlled services
transaction under review, including an
operating profit for the service
renderer’s investment of capital and
assumptions of risks. Therefore,
although all of the factors described in
§ 1.482–1(d)(3) must be considered,
comparability under this method is
particularly dependent on similarity of
services or functions performed, risks
borne, intangibles (if any) used in
providing the services or functions, and
contractual terms, or adjustments to
account for the effects of any such
differences. If possible, the appropriate
gross services profit markup should be
derived from comparable uncontrolled
transactions of the same taxpayer
participating in the controlled services
transaction because similar
characteristics are more likely to be
found among services provided by the
same service provider than among
services provided by other service
providers. In the absence of such
services transactions, an appropriate
gross services profit markup may be
derived from comparable uncontrolled
services transactions of other service
providers. If the appropriate gross
services profit markup is derived from
comparable uncontrolled services
transactions of other service providers,
in evaluating comparability the
controlled taxpayer must consider the
results under this method expressed as
a markup on total services costs of the
controlled taxpayer, because differences
in functions performed may be reflected
in differences in service costs other than
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
those included in comparable
transactional costs.
(B) Other comparability factors.
Comparability under this method is less
dependent on close similarity between
the services provided than under the
comparable uncontrolled services price
method. Substantial differences in the
services may, however, indicate
significant functional differences
between the controlled and
uncontrolled taxpayers. Thus, it
ordinarily would be expected that the
controlled and uncontrolled
transactions would involve services of
the same general type (for example,
information-technology systems design).
Furthermore, if a significant amount of
the controlled taxpayer’s comparable
transactional costs consists of service
costs incurred in a tax accounting
period other than the tax accounting
period under review, the reliability of
the analysis would be reduced. In
addition, significant differences in the
value of the services rendered, due for
example to the use of valuable
intangibles, may also affect the
reliability of the comparison. Finally,
the reliability of profit measures based
on gross services profit may be
adversely affected by factors that have
less effect on prices. For example, gross
services profit may be affected by a
variety of other factors, including cost
structures or efficiency-related factors
(for example, differences in the level of
experience of the employees performing
the service in the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions). Accordingly,
if material differences in these factors
are identified based on objective
evidence, the reliability of the analysis
may be affected.
(C) Adjustments for differences
between the controlled and uncontrolled
transactions. If there are material
differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions that would
affect the gross services profit markup,
adjustments should be made to the gross
services profit markup earned in the
comparable uncontrolled transaction
according to the provisions of § 1.482–
1(d)(2). For this purpose, consideration
of the comparable transactional costs
associated with the functions performed
and risks assumed may be necessary,
because differences in the functions
performed are often reflected in these
costs. If there are differences in
functions performed, however, the effect
on gross services profit of such
differences is not necessarily equal to
the differences in the amount of related
comparable transactional costs. Specific
examples of the factors that may be
particularly relevant to this method
include—
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
(1) The complexity of the services;
(2) The duration or quantitative
measure of services;
(3) Contractual terms (for example,
scope and terms of warranties or
guarantees provided, volume, credit and
payment terms, allocation of risks,
including any contingent-payment
terms);
(4) Economic circumstances; and
(5) Risks borne.
(iii) Data and assumptions—(A) In
general. The reliability of the results
derived from the cost of services plus
method is affected by the completeness
and accuracy of the data used and the
reliability of the assumptions made to
apply this method. See § 1.482–1(c)
(Best method rule).
(B) Consistency in accounting. The
degree of consistency in accounting
practices between the controlled
transaction and the uncontrolled
comparables that materially affect the
gross services profit markup affects the
reliability of the results under this
method. Thus, for example, if
differences in cost accounting practices
would materially affect the gross
services profit markup, the ability to
make reliable adjustments for such
differences would affect the reliability
of the results obtained under this
method. Further, reliability under this
method depends on the extent to which
the controlled and uncontrolled
transactions reflect consistent reporting
of comparable transactional costs. For
purposes of this paragraph (e)(3)(iii)(B),
the term comparable transactional costs
includes the cost of acquiring tangible
property that is transferred (or used)
with the services, to the extent that the
arm’s length price of the tangible
property is not separately evaluated as
a controlled transaction under another
provision.
(4) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (e) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Internal comparable. (i)
Company A designs and assembles
information-technology networks and
systems. When Company A renders services
for uncontrolled parties, it receives
compensation based on time and materials as
well as certain other related costs necessary
to complete the project. This fee includes the
cost of hardware and software purchased
from uncontrolled vendors and incorporated
in the final network or system, plus a
reasonable allocation of certain specified
overhead costs incurred by Company A in
providing these services. Reliable accounting
records maintained by Company A indicate
that Company A earned a gross services
profit markup of 10% on its time, materials
and specified overhead in providing design
services during the year under examination
on information technology projects for
uncontrolled entities.
PO 00000
Frm 00037
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44501
(ii) Company A designed an informationtechnology network for its Country X
subsidiary, Company B. The services
rendered to Company B are similar in scope
and complexity to services that Company A
rendered to uncontrolled parties during the
year under examination. Using Company A’s
accounting records (which are determined to
be reliable under paragraph (e)(3) of this
section), it is possible to identify the
comparable transactional costs involved in
the controlled services transaction with
reference to the costs incurred by Company
A in rendering similar design services to
uncontrolled parties. Company A’s records
indicate that it does not incur any additional
types of costs in rendering similar services to
uncontrolled customers. The data available
are sufficiently complete to conclude that it
is likely that all material differences between
the controlled and uncontrolled transactions
have been identified and adjusted for. Based
on the gross services profit markup data
derived from Company A’s uncontrolled
transactions involving similar design
services, an arm’s length result for the
controlled services transaction is equal to the
price that will allow Company A to earn a
10% gross services profit markup on its
comparable transactional costs.
Example 2. Inability to adjust for
differences in comparable transactional
costs. The facts are the same as in Example
1, except that Company A’s staff that
rendered the services to Company B
consisted primarily of engineers in training
status or on temporary rotation from other
Company A subsidiaries. In addition, the
Company B network incorporated innovative
features, including specially designed
software suited to Company B’s
requirements. The use of less-experienced
personnel and staff on temporary rotation,
together with the special features of the
Company B network, significantly increased
the time and costs associated with the project
as compared to time and costs associated
with similar projects completed for
uncontrolled customers. These factors
constitute material differences between the
controlled and the uncontrolled transactions
that affect the determination of Company A’s
comparable transactional costs associated
with the controlled services transaction, as
well as the gross services profit markup.
Moreover, it is not possible to perform
reliable adjustments for these differences on
the basis of the available accounting data.
Under these circumstances, the reliability of
the cost of services plus method as a measure
of an arm’s length price is substantially
reduced.
Example 3. Operating loss by reference to
total services costs. The facts and analysis are
the same as in Example 1, except that an
unrelated Company C, instead of Company
A, renders similar services to uncontrolled
parties and publicly available information
indicates that Company C earned a gross
services profit markup of 10% on its time,
materials and certain specified overhead in
providing those services. As in Example 1,
Company A still provides services for its
Country X subsidiary, Company B. In
accordance with the requirements in
paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section, the
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44502
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
taxpayer performs additional analysis and
restates the results of Company A’s
controlled services transaction with its
Country X subsidiary, Company B, in the
form of a markup on Company A’s total
services costs. This analysis by reference to
total services costs shows that Company A
generated an operating loss on the controlled
services transaction, which indicates that
functional differences likely exist between
the controlled services transaction performed
by Company A and uncontrolled services
transactions performed by Company C, and
that these differences may not be reflected in
the comparable transactional costs. Upon
further scrutiny, the presence of such
functional differences between the controlled
and uncontrolled transactions may indicate
that the cost of services plus method does not
provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result under the facts and
circumstances.
Example 4. Internal comparable. (i)
Company A, a U.S. corporation, and its
subsidiaries perform computer consulting
services relating to systems integration and
networking for business clients in various
countries. Company A and its subsidiaries
render only consulting services and do not
manufacture or distribute computer hardware
or software to clients. The controlled group
is organized according to industry
specialization, with key industry specialists
working for Company A. These personnel
typically form the core consulting group that
teams with consultants from the localcountry subsidiaries to serve clients in the
subsidiaries’ respective countries.
(ii) On some occasions, Company A and its
subsidiaries undertake engagements directly
for clients. On other occasions, they work as
subcontractors for uncontrolled parties on
more extensive consulting engagements for
clients. In undertaking the latter engagements
with third-party consultants, Company A
typically prices its services at four times the
compensation costs of its consultants,
defined as the consultants’ base salary plus
estimated fringe benefits, as defined in this
table:
Category
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Project managers ......
Technical staff ...........
Rates
$100 per hour.
$75 per hour.
(iii) In uncontrolled transactions, Company
A also charges the customer, at no markup,
for out-of-pocket expenses such as travel,
lodging, and data acquisition charges. Thus,
for example, a project involving 100 hours of
time from project managers, and 400 hours of
technical staff time would result in total
compensation costs to Company A of (100
hrs. × $100/hr.) + (400 hrs. × $75/hr.) =
$10,000 + $30,000 = $40,000. Applying the
markup of 300%, the total fee charged would
thus be (4 × $40,000), or $160,000, plus outof-pocket expenses.
(iv) Company B, a Country X subsidiary of
Company A, contracts to render consulting
services to a Country X client in the banking
industry. In undertaking this engagement,
Company B uses its own consultants and also
uses the services of Company A project
managers and technical staff that specialize
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
in the banking industry for 75 hours and 380
hours, respectively. The data available are
sufficiently complete to conclude that it is
likely that all material differences between
the controlled and uncontrolled transactions
have been identified and adjusted for. Based
on reliable data concerning the compensation
costs to Company A, an arm’s length result
for the controlled services transaction is
equal to $144,000. This is calculated as
follows: [4 × (75 hrs. × $100/hr.)] + [4 × (380
hrs. × $75/hr.)] = $30,000 + $114,000 =
$144,000, reflecting a 4× markup on the total
compensation costs for Company A project
managers and technical staff. In addition,
consistent with Company A’s pricing of
uncontrolled transactions, Company B must
reimburse Company A for appropriate out-ofpocket expenses incurred in performing the
services.
(f) Comparable profits method—(1) In
general. The comparable profits method
evaluates whether the amount charged
in a controlled transaction is arm’s
length, based on objective measures of
profitability (profit level indicators)
derived from uncontrolled taxpayers
that engage in similar business activities
under similar circumstances. The rules
in § 1.482–5 relating to the comparable
profits method apply to controlled
services transactions, except as
modified in this paragraph (f).
(2) Determination of arm’s length
result—(i) Tested party. This paragraph
(f) applies where the relevant business
activity of the tested party as
determined under § 1.482–5(b)(2) is the
rendering of services in a controlled
services transaction. Where the tested
party determined under § 1.482–5(b)(2)
is instead the recipient of the controlled
services, the rules under this paragraph
(f) are not applicable to determine the
arm’s length result.
(ii) Profit level indicators. In addition
to the profit level indicators provided in
§ 1.482–5(b)(4), a profit level indicator
that may provide a reliable basis for
comparing operating profits of the tested
party involved in a controlled services
transaction and uncontrolled
comparables is the ratio of operating
profit to total services costs (as defined
in paragraph (j) of this section).
(iii) Comparability and reliability
considerations—Data and
assumptions—Consistency in
accounting. Consistency in accounting
practices between the relevant business
activity of the tested party and the
uncontrolled service providers is
particularly important in determining
the reliability of the results under this
method, but less than in applying the
cost of services plus method.
Adjustments may be appropriate if
materially different treatment is applied
to particular cost items related to the
relevant business activity of the tested
PO 00000
Frm 00038
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
party and the uncontrolled service
providers. For example, adjustments
may be appropriate where the tested
party and the uncontrolled comparables
use inconsistent approaches to classify
similar expenses as ‘‘cost of goods sold’’
and ‘‘selling, general, and
administrative expenses.’’ Although
distinguishing between these two
categories may be difficult, the
distinction is less important to the
extent that the ratio of operating profit
to total services costs is used as the
appropriate profit level indicator.
Determining whether adjustments are
necessary under these or similar
circumstances requires thorough
analysis of the functions performed and
consideration of the cost accounting
practices of the tested party and the
uncontrolled comparables. Other
adjustments as provided in § 1.482–
5(c)(2)(iv) may also be necessary to
increase the reliability of the results
under this method.
(3) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (f) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Ratio of operating profit to total
services costs as the appropriate profit level
indicator. (i) A Country T parent firm,
Company A, and its Country Y subsidiary,
Company B, both engage in manufacturing as
their principal business activity. Company A
also performs certain advertising services for
itself and its affiliates. In year 1, Company A
renders advertising services to Company B.
(ii) Based on the facts and circumstances,
it is determined that the comparable profits
method will provide the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length result. Company
A is selected as the tested party. No data are
available for comparable independent
manufacturing firms that render advertising
services to third parties. Financial data are
available, however, for ten independent firms
that render similar advertising services as
their principal business activity in Country
X. The ten firms are determined to be
comparable under § 1.482–5(c). Neither
Company A nor the comparable companies
use valuable intangibles in rendering the
services.
(iii) Based on the available financial data
of the comparable companies, it cannot be
determined whether these comparable
companies report costs for financial
accounting purposes in the same manner as
the tested party. The publicly available
financial data of the comparable companies
segregate total services costs into cost of
goods sold and sales, general and
administrative costs, with no further
segmentation of costs provided. Due to the
limited information available regarding the
cost accounting practices used by the
comparable companies, the ratio of operating
profits to total services costs is determined to
be the most appropriate profit level indicator.
This ratio includes total services costs to
minimize the effect of any inconsistency in
accounting practices between Company A
and the comparable companies.
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
Example 2. Application of the operating
profit to total services costs profit level
indicator. (i) Company A is a foreign
subsidiary of Company B, a U.S. corporation.
Company B is under examination for its year
1 taxable year. Company B renders
management consulting services to Company
A. Company B’s consulting function includes
analyzing Company A’s operations,
benchmarking Company A’s financial
performance against companies in the same
industry, and to the extent necessary,
developing a strategy to improve Company
A’s operational performance. The accounting
records of Company B allow reliable
identification of the total services costs of the
consulting staff associated with the
management consulting services rendered to
Company A. Company A reimburses
Company B for its costs associated with
rendering the consulting services, with no
markup.
(ii) Based on all the facts and
circumstances, it is determined that the
comparable profits method will provide the
most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result. Company B is selected as the tested
party, and its rendering of management
consulting services is identified as the
relevant business activity. Data are available
from ten domestic companies that operate in
the industry segment involving management
consulting and that perform activities
comparable to the relevant business activity
of Company B. These comparables include
entities that primarily perform management
consulting services for uncontrolled parties.
The comparables incur similar risks as
Year 1
Revenues .........................................................................................................
Cost of Goods Sold .........................................................................................
Operating Expenses ........................................................................................
Operating Profit ................................................................................................
1,200,000
100,000
1,100,000
0
44503
Company B incurs in performing the
consulting services and do not make use of
valuable intangibles or special processes.
(iii) Based on the available financial data
of the comparables, it cannot be determined
whether the comparables report their costs
for financial accounting purposes in the same
manner as Company B reports its costs in the
relevant business activity. The available
financial data for the comparables report only
an aggregate figure for costs of goods sold and
operating expenses, and do not segment the
underlying services costs. Due to this
limitation, the ratio of operating profits to
total services costs is determined to be the
most appropriate profit level indicator.
(iv) For the taxable years 1 through 3,
Company B shows the following results for
the services performed for Company A:
Year 2
1,100,000
100,000
1,000,000
0
Year 3
1,300,000
(*)
1,300,000
0
Average
1,200,000
66,667
1,133,333
0
* N/A.
(v) After adjustments have been made to
account for identified material differences
between the relevant business activity of
Company B and the comparables, the average
ratio for the taxable years 1 through 3 of
operating profit to total services costs is
calculated for each of the uncontrolled
service providers. Applying each ratio to
Company B’s average total services costs
from the relevant business activity for the
taxable years 1 through 3 would lead to the
following comparable operating profit (COP)
for the services rendered by Company B:
OP/total
service costs
(%)
Uncontrolled service provider
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
1 ..............................................................................................................................................................
2 ..............................................................................................................................................................
3 ..............................................................................................................................................................
4 ..............................................................................................................................................................
5 ..............................................................................................................................................................
6 ..............................................................................................................................................................
7 ..............................................................................................................................................................
8 ..............................................................................................................................................................
9 ..............................................................................................................................................................
10 ............................................................................................................................................................
(vi) The available data are not sufficiently
complete to conclude that it is likely that all
material differences between the relevant
business activity of Company B and the
comparables have been identified. Therefore,
an arm’s length range can be established only
pursuant to § 1.482–1(e)(2)(iii)(B). The arm’s
length range is established by reference to the
interquartile range of the results as calculated
under § 1.482–1(e)(2)(iii)(C), which consists
of the results ranging from $168,000 to
$134,160. Company B’s reported average
operating profit of zero ($0) falls outside this
range. Therefore, an allocation may be
appropriate.
(vii) Because Company B reported income
of zero, to determine the amount, if any, of
the allocation, Company B’s reported
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OP/total
service costs
(for year 3)
(%)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
PO 00000
Frm 00039
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
$189,000
180,000
168,000
159,600
144,000
135,600
135,000
134,160
133,320
129,000
operating profit for year 3 is compared to the
comparable operating profits derived from
the comparables’ results for year 3. The ratio
of operating profit to total services costs in
year 3 is calculated for each of the
comparables and applied to Company B’s
year 3 total services costs to derive the
following results:
Uncontrolled service provider
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
15.75
15.00
14.00
13.30
12.00
11.30
11.25
11.18
11.11
10.75
Company B
COP
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
15.00
14.75
14.00
13.50
12.30
11.05
11.03
11.00
10.50
Company B
COP
$195,000
191,750
182,000
175,500
159,900
143,650
143,390
143,000
136,500
44504
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
OP/total
service costs
(for year 3)
(%)
Uncontrolled service provider
Company 10 ............................................................................................................................................................
(viii) Based on these results, the median of
the comparable operating profits for year 3 is
$151,775. Therefore, Company B’s income for
year 3 is increased by $151,775, the
difference between Company B’s reported
operating profit for year 3 of zero and the
median of the comparable operating profits
for year 3.
Example 3. Material difference in
accounting for stock-based compensation. (i)
Taxpayer, a U.S. corporation the stock of
which is publicly traded, performs controlled
services for its wholly-owned subsidiaries.
The arm’s length price of these controlled
services is evaluated under the comparable
profits method for services in this paragraph,
by reference to the net cost plus profit level
indicator (PLI). Taxpayer is the tested party
under paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section. The
Commissioner identifies the most narrowly
identifiable business activity of the tested
party for which data are available that
incorporate the controlled transaction (the
relevant business activity). The
Commissioner also identifies four
uncontrolled domestic service providers,
Companies A, B, C, and D, each of which
performs exclusively activities similar to the
relevant business activity of Taxpayer that is
subject to analysis under this paragraph (f).
The stock of Companies A, B, C, and D is
publicly traded on a U.S. stock exchange.
Assume that Taxpayer makes an election to
apply these regulations to earlier taxable
years.
(ii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Taxpayer that engage in the
relevant business activity. Assume that, as
determined under a method in accordance
with U.S. generally accepted accounting
principles, the fair value of such stock
options attributable to the employees’
performance of the relevant business activity
is 500 for the taxable year in question. In
evaluating the controlled services, Taxpayer
10.25
Company B
COP
133,250
includes salaries, fringe benefits, and related
compensation of these employees in ‘‘total
services costs,’’ as defined in paragraph (j) of
this section. Taxpayer does not include any
amount attributable to stock options in total
services costs, nor does it deduct that amount
in determining ‘‘reported operating profit’’
within the meaning of § 1.482–5(d)(5), for the
year under examination.
(iii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Companies A, B, C, and D.
Under a fair value method in accordance
with U.S. generally accepted accounting
principles, the comparables include in total
compensation the value of the stock options
attributable to the employees’ performance of
the relevant business activity for the annual
financial reporting period, and treat this
amount as an expense in determining
operating profit for financial accounting
purposes. The treatment of employee stock
options is summarized in the following table.
Salaries
and other nonoption compensation
Taxpayer
Company
Company
Company
Company
......................................................................................................................................
A ..................................................................................................................................
B ..................................................................................................................................
C ..................................................................................................................................
D ..................................................................................................................................
(iv) A material difference exists in
accounting for stock-based compensation, as
defined in § 1.482–7(d)(2)(i). Analysis
indicates that this difference would
materially affect the measure of an arm’s
length result under this paragraph (f). In
making an adjustment to improve
comparability under §§ 1.482–1(d)(2) and
1.482–5(c)(2)(iv), the Commissioner includes
in total services costs of the tested party the
total compensation costs of 1,500 (including
stock option fair value). In addition, the
Commissioner calculates the net cost plus
PLI by reference to the financial-accounting
data of Companies A, B, C, and D, which take
into account compensatory stock options.
Example 4. Material difference in
utilization of stock-based compensation.
(i) The facts are the same as in paragraph
(i) of Example 3.
(ii) No stock options are granted to the
employees of Taxpayer that engage in the
relevant business activity. Thus, no
deduction for stock options is made in
determining ‘‘reported operating profit’’
Stock options
fair value
Stock options
expensed
1,000
7,000
4,300
10,000
15,000
500
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
0
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
within the meaning of § 1.482–5(d)(5), for the
taxable year under examination.
(iii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Companies A, B, C, and D, but
none of these companies expense stock
options for financial accounting purposes.
Under a method in accordance with U.S.
generally accepted accounting principles,
however, Companies A, B, C, and D disclose
the fair value of the stock options for
financial accounting purposes. The
utilization and treatment of employee stock
options is summarized in the following table.
Salaries
and other nonoption compensation
Taxpayer
Company
Company
Company
Company
......................................................................................................................................
A ..................................................................................................................................
B ..................................................................................................................................
C ..................................................................................................................................
D ..................................................................................................................................
Stock options
fair value
Stock options
expensed
1,000
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
0
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
(*)
0
0
0
0
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
* N/A.
(iv) A material difference in the utilization
of stock-based compensation exists within
the meaning of § 1.482–7(d)(2)(i). Analysis
indicates that these differences would
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
materially affect the measure of an arm’s
length result under this paragraph (f). In
evaluating the comparable operating profits
of the tested party, the Commissioner uses
PO 00000
Frm 00040
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Taxpayer’s total services costs, which
include total compensation costs of 1,000. In
considering whether an adjustment is
necessary to improve comparability under
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
§§ 1.482–1(d)(2) and 1.482–5(c)(2)(iv), the
Commissioner recognizes that the total
compensation provided to employees of
Taxpayer is comparable to the total
compensation provided to employees of
Companies A, B, C, and D. Because
Companies A, B, C, and D do not expense
stock-based compensation for financial
accounting purposes, their reported operating
profits must be adjusted in order to improve
comparability with the tested party. The
Commissioner increases each comparable’s
total services costs, and also reduces its
reported operating profit, by the fair value of
44505
the stock-based compensation incurred by
the comparable company.
(v) The adjustments to the data of
Companies A, B, C, and D described in
paragraph (iv) of this Example 4 are
summarized in the following table:
Salaries
and other nonoption compensation
Stock options
Total services
costs
(A)
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
25,000
12,500
36,000
27,000
6,000
2,500
11,000
7,000
24.00
20.00
30.56
25.93
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
27,000
12,750
40,500
29,000
4,000
2,250
6,500
5,000
14.80
17.65
16.05
17.24
Per financial statements:
Company A ..........................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
As adjusted:
Company A ...................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
Example 5. Non-material difference in
utilization of stock-based compensation.
(i) The facts are the same as in paragraph
(i) of Example 3.
(ii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Taxpayer that engage in the
relevant business activity. Assume that, as
determined under a method in accordance
with U.S. generally accepted accounting
principles, the fair value of such stock
options attributable to the employees’
performance of the relevant business activity
is 50 for the taxable year. Taxpayer includes
salaries, fringe benefits, and all other
compensation of these employees (including
the stock option fair value) in ‘‘total services
costs,’’ as defined in paragraph (j) of this
section, and deducts these amounts in
determining ‘‘reported operating profit’’
within the meaning of § 1.482–5(d)(5), for the
taxable year under examination.
Operating
profit
(B)
Net cost plus
PLI
(B/A)
(%)
(iii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Companies A, B, C, and D, but
none of these companies expense stock
options for financial accounting purposes.
Under a method in accordance with U.S.
generally accepted accounting principles,
however, Companies A, B, C, and D disclose
the fair value of the stock options for
financial accounting purposes. The
utilization and treatment of employee stock
options is summarized in the following table.
Salaries and
other
non-option
compensation
Taxpayer
Company
Company
Company
Company
......................................................................................................................................
A ..................................................................................................................................
B ..................................................................................................................................
C ..................................................................................................................................
D ..................................................................................................................................
(iv) Analysis of the data reported by
Companies A, B, C, and D indicates that an
adjustment for differences in utilization of
stock-based compensation would not have a
Stock options
fair value
Stock options
expensed
1,000
7,000
4,300
10,000
15,000
50
100
40
130
75
50
0
0
0
0
material effect on the determination of an
arm’s length result.
Salaries and
other
non-option
compensation
Stock options
fair value
Total services
costs
(A)
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
100
40
130
75
25,000
12,500
36,000
27,000
6,000
2,500
11,000
7,000
24.00
20.00
30.56
25.93
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
100
40
130
75
25,100
12,540
36,130
27,075
5,900
2,460
10,870
6,925
23.51
19.62
30.09
25.58
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Per financial statements:
Company A ...................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
As adjusted:
Company A ...................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
(v) Under the circumstances, the difference
in utilization of stock-based compensation
would not materially affect the determination
of the arm’s length result under this
paragraph (f). Accordingly, in calculating the
net cost plus PLI, no comparability
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
adjustment is made to the data of Companies
A, B, C, or D pursuant to §§ 1.482–1(d)(2) and
1.482–5(c)(2)(iv).
Example 6. Material difference in
comparables’ accounting for stock-based
PO 00000
Frm 00041
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Operating
profit
(B)
Net cost
plus PLI
(B/A)
(%)
compensation. (i) The facts are the same as
in paragraph (i) of Example 3.
(ii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Taxpayer that engage in the
relevant business activity. Assume that, as
determined under a method in accordance
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44506
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
with U.S. generally accepted accounting
principles, the fair value of such stock
options attributable to employees’
performance of the relevant business activity
is 500 for the taxable year. Taxpayer includes
salaries, fringe benefits, and all other
compensation of these employees (including
the stock option fair value) in ‘‘total services
costs,’’ as defined in paragraph (j) of this
section and deducts these amounts in
determining ‘‘reported operating profit’’
within the meaning of § 1.482–5(d)(5), for the
taxable year under examination.
(iii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Companies A, B, C, and D.
Companies A and B expense the stock
options for financial accounting purposes in
accordance with U.S. generally accepted
accounting principles. Companies C and D
do not expense the stock options for financial
accounting purposes. Under a method in
accordance with U.S. generally accepted
accounting principles, however, Companies
C and D disclose the fair value of these
options in their financial statements. The
utilization and accounting treatment of
options are depicted in the following table.
Salary and
other
non-option
compensation
Taxpayer
Company
Company
Company
Company
......................................................................................................................................
A ..................................................................................................................................
B ..................................................................................................................................
C ..................................................................................................................................
D ..................................................................................................................................
(iv) A material difference in accounting for
stock-based compensation exists, within the
meaning of § 1.482–7(d)(2)(i). Analysis
indicates that this difference would
materially affect the measure of the arm’s
length result under paragraph (f) of this
section. In evaluating the comparable
operating profits of the tested party, the
Commissioner includes in total services costs
Taxpayer’s total compensation costs of 1,500
(including stock option fair value of 500). In
considering whether an adjustment is
necessary to improve comparability under
§§ 1.482–1(d)(2) and 1.482–5(c)(2)(iv), the
Commissioner recognizes that the total
employee compensation (including stock
options provided by Taxpayer and
Companies A, B, C, and D) provides a reliable
basis for comparison. Because Companies A
and B expense stock-based compensation for
financial accounting purposes, whereas
Companies C and D do not, an adjustment to
the comparables’ operating profit is
necessary. In computing the net cost plus
PLI, the Commissioner uses the financialaccounting data of Companies A and B, as
Stock options
fair value
Stock options
expensed
1,000
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
500
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
500
2,000
250
0
0
reported. The Commissioner increases the
total services costs of Companies C and D by
amounts equal to the fair value of their
respective stock options, and reduces the
operating profits of Companies C and D
accordingly.
(v) The adjustments described in paragraph
(iv) of this Example 6 are depicted in the
following table. For purposes of illustration,
the unadjusted data of Companies A and B
are also included.
Salaries and
other
non-option
compensation
Stock options
fair value
Total services
costs
(A)
7,000
4,300
2,000
250
27,000
12,750
4,000
2,250
14.80
17.65
12,000
15,000
4,500
2,000
40,500
29,000
6,500
5,000
16.05
17.24
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Per financial Statements:
Company A ...................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
As adjusted:
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
(g) Profit split method—(1) In general.
The profit split method evaluates
whether the allocation of the combined
operating profit or loss attributable to
one or more controlled transactions is
arm’s length by reference to the relative
value of each controlled taxpayer’s
contribution to that combined operating
profit or loss. The relative value of each
controlled taxpayer’s contribution is
determined in a manner that reflects the
functions performed, risks assumed and
resources employed by such controlled
taxpayer in the relevant business
activity. For application of the profit
split method (both the comparable profit
split and the residual profit split), see
§ 1.482–6. The residual profit split
method is ordinarily used in controlled
services transactions involving a
combination of nonroutine
contributions by multiple controlled
taxpayers.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
(2) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (g) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Residual profit split. (i)
Company A, a corporation resident in
Country X, auctions spare parts by means of
an interactive database. Company A
maintains a database that lists all spare parts
available for auction. Company A developed
the software used to run the database.
Company A’s database is managed by
Company A employees in a data center
located in Country X, where storage and
manipulation of data also take place.
Company A has a wholly-owned subsidiary,
Company B, located in Country Y. Company
B performs marketing and advertising
activities to promote Company A’s
interactive database. Company B solicits
unrelated companies to auction spare parts
on Company A’s database, and solicits
customers interested in purchasing spare
parts online. Company B owns and maintains
a computer server in Country Y, where it
receives information on spare parts available
for auction. Company B has also designed a
PO 00000
Frm 00042
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Operating
profit
(B)
Net cost plus
PLI
(B/A)
(%)
specialized communications network that
connects its data center to Company A’s data
center in Country X. The communications
network allows Company B to enter data
from uncontrolled companies on Company
A’s database located in Country X. Company
B’s communications network also allows
uncontrolled companies to access Company
A’s interactive database and purchase spare
parts. Company B bore the risks and cost of
developing this specialized communications
network. Company B enters into contracts
with uncontrolled companies and provides
the companies access to Company A’s
database through the Company B network.
(ii) Analysis of the facts and circumstances
indicates that both Company A and Company
B possess valuable intangibles that they use
to conduct the spare parts auction business.
Company A bore the economic risks of
developing and maintaining software and the
interactive database. Company B bore the
economic risks of developing the necessary
technology to transmit information from its
server to Company A’s data center, and to
allow uncontrolled companies to access
Company A’s database. Company B helped to
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
enhance the value of Company A’s trademark
and to establish a network of customers in
Country Y. In addition, there are no market
comparables for the transactions between
Company A and Company B to reliably
evaluate them separately. Given the facts and
circumstances, the Commissioner determines
that a residual profit split method will
provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result.
(iii) Under the residual profit split method,
profits are first allocated based on the routine
contributions of each taxpayer. Routine
contributions include general sales,
marketing or administrative functions
performed by Company B for Company A for
which it is possible to identify market
returns. Any residual profits will be allocated
based on the nonroutine contributions of
each taxpayer. Since both Company A and
Company B provided nonroutine
contributions, the residual profits are
allocated based on these contributions.
Example 2. Residual profit split. (i)
Company A, a Country 1 corporation,
provides specialized services pertaining to
the processing and storage of Level 1
hazardous waste (for purposes of this
example, the most dangerous type of waste).
Under long-term contracts with private
companies and governmental entities in
Country 1, Company A performs multiple
services, including transportation of Level 1
waste, development of handling and storage
protocols, recordkeeping, and supervision of
waste-storage facilities owned and
maintained by the contracting parties.
Company A’s research and development unit
has also developed new and unique
processes for transport and storage of Level
1 waste that minimize environmental and
occupational effects. In addition to this novel
technology, Company A has substantial
know-how and a long-term record of safe
operations in Country 1.
(ii) Company A’s subsidiary, Company B,
has been in operation continuously for a
number of years in Country 2. Company B
has successfully completed several projects
in Country 2 involving Level 2 and Level 3
waste, including projects with governmentowned entities. Company B has a license in
Country 2 to handle Level 2 waste (Level 3
does not require a license). Company B has
established a reputation for completing these
projects in a responsible manner. Company B
has cultivated contacts with procurement
officers, regulatory and licensing officials,
and other government personnel in Country
2.
(iii) Country 2 government publishes
invitations to bid on a project to handle the
country’s burgeoning volume of Level 1
waste, all of which is generated in
government-owned facilities. Bidding is
limited to companies that are domiciled in
Country 2 and that possess a license from the
government to handle Level 1 or Level 2
waste. In an effort to submit a winning bid
to secure the contract, Company B points to
its Level 2 license and its record of successful
completion of projects, and also
demonstrates to these officials that it has
access to substantial technical expertise
pertaining to processing of Level 1 waste.
(iv) Company A enters into a long-term
technical services agreement with Company
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
B. Under this agreement, Company A agrees
to supply to Company B project managers
and other technical staff who have detailed
knowledge of Company A’s proprietary Level
1 remediation techniques. Company A
commits to perform under any long-term
contracts entered into by Company B.
Company B agrees to compensate Company
A based on a markup on Company A’s
marginal costs (pro rata compensation and
current expenses of Company A personnel).
In the bid on the Country 2 for Level 1 waste,
Company B proposes to use a multidisciplinary team of specialists from
Company A and Company B. Project
managers from Company A will direct the
team, which will also include employees of
Company B and will make use of physical
assets and facilities owned by Company B.
Only Company A and Company B personnel
will perform services under the contract.
Country 2 grants Company B a license to
handle Level 1 waste.
(v) Country 2 grants Company B a fiveyear, exclusive contract to provide processing
services for all Level 1 hazardous waste
generated in County 2. Under the contract,
Company B is to be paid a fixed price per ton
of Level 1 waste that it processes each year.
Company B undertakes that all services
provided will meet international standards
applicable to processing of Level 1 waste.
Company B begins performance under the
contract.
(vi) Analysis of the facts and circumstances
indicates that both Company A and Company
B make nonroutine contributions to the Level
1 waste processing activity in Country 2. In
addition, it is determined that reliable
comparables are not available for the services
that Company A provides under the longterm contract, in part because those services
incorporate specialized knowledge and
process intangibles developed by Company
A. It is also determined that reliable
comparables are not available for the Level 2
license in Country 2, the successful track
record, the government contacts with
Country 2 officials, and other intangibles that
Company B provided. In view of these facts,
the Commissioner determines that the
residual profit split method for services in
paragraph (g) of this section provides the
most reliable means of evaluating the arm’s
length results for the transaction. In
evaluating the appropriate returns to
Company A and Company B for their
respective contributions, the Commissioner
takes into account that the controlled parties
incur different risks, because the contract
between the controlled parties provides that
Company A will be compensated on the basis
of marginal costs incurred, plus a markup,
whereas the contract between Company B
and the government of Country 2 provides
that Company B will be compensated on a
fixed-price basis per ton of Level 1 waste
processed.
(vii) In the first stage of the residual profit
split, an arm’s length return is determined for
routine activities performed by Company B
in Country 2, such as transportation,
recordkeeping, and administration. In
addition, an arm’s length return is
determined for routine activities performed
by Company A (administrative, human
PO 00000
Frm 00043
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44507
resources, etc.) in connection with providing
personnel to Company B. After the arm’s
length return for these functions is
determined, residual profits may be present.
In the second stage of the residual profit
split, any residual profit is allocated by
reference to the relative value of the
nonroutine contributions made by each
taxpayer. Company A’s nonroutine
contributions include its commitment to
perform under the contract and the
specialized technical knowledge made
available through the project managers under
the services agreement with Company B.
Company B’s nonroutine contributions
include its licenses to handle Level 1 and
Level 2 waste in Country 2, its knowledge of
and contacts with procurement, regulatory
and licensing officials in the government of
Country 2, and its record in Country 2 of
successfully handling non-Level 1 waste.
(h) Unspecified methods. Methods not
specified in paragraphs (b) through (g)
of this section may be used to evaluate
whether the amount charged in a
controlled services transaction is arm’s
length. Any method used under this
paragraph (h) must be applied in
accordance with the provisions of
§ 1.482–1. Consistent with the specified
methods, an unspecified method should
take into account the general principle
that uncontrolled taxpayers evaluate the
terms of a transaction by considering the
realistic alternatives to that transaction,
including economically similar
transactions structured as other than
services transactions, and only enter
into a particular transaction if none of
the alternatives is preferable to it. For
example, the comparable uncontrolled
services price method compares a
controlled services transaction to
similar uncontrolled transactions to
provide a direct estimate of the price to
which the parties would have agreed
had they resorted directly to a market
alternative to the controlled services
transaction. Therefore, in establishing
whether a controlled services
transaction achieved an arm’s length
result, an unspecified method should
provide information on the prices or
profits that the controlled taxpayer
could have realized by choosing a
realistic alternative to the controlled
services transaction (for example,
outsourcing a particular service
function, rather than performing the
function itself). As with any method, an
unspecified method will not be applied
unless it provides the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length result under
the principles of the best method rule.
See § 1.482–1(c). Therefore, in
accordance with § 1.482–1(d)
(comparability), to the extent that an
unspecified method relies on internal
data rather than uncontrolled
comparables, its reliability will be
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44508
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
reduced. Similarly, the reliability of a
method will be affected by the
reliability of the data and assumptions
used to apply the method, including any
projections used.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Example. (i) Company T, a U.S.
corporation, develops computer software
programs including a real estate investment
program that performs financial analysis of
commercial real properties. The primary
business activity of Companies U, V and W
is commercial real estate development. For
business reasons, Company T does not sell
the computer program to its customers (on a
compact disk or via download from Company
T’s server through the Internet). Instead,
Company T maintains the software program
on its own server and allows customers to
access the program through the Internet by
using a password. The transactions between
Company T and Companies U, V and W are
structured as controlled services transactions
whereby Companies U, V and W obtain
access via the Internet to Company T’s
software program for financial analysis. Each
year, Company T provides a revised version
of the computer program including the most
recent data on the commercial real estate
market, rendering the old version obsolete.
(ii) In evaluating whether the consideration
paid by Companies U, V and W to Company
T was arm’s length, the Commissioner may
consider, subject to the best method rule of
§ 1.482–1(c), Company T’s alternative of
selling the computer program to Companies
U, V and W on a compact disk or via
download through the Internet. The
Commissioner determines that the controlled
services transactions between Company T
and Companies U, V and W are comparable
to the transfer of a similar software program
on a compact disk or via download through
the Internet between uncontrolled parties.
Subject to adjustments being made for
material differences between the controlled
services transactions and the comparable
uncontrolled transactions, the uncontrolled
transfers of tangible property may be used to
evaluate the arm’s length results for the
controlled services transactions between
Company T and Companies U, V and W.
(i) Contingent-payment contractual
terms for services—(1) Contingentpayment contractual terms recognized
in general. In the case of a contingentpayment arrangement, the arm’s length
result for the controlled services
transaction generally would not require
payment by the recipient to the renderer
in the tax accounting period in which
the service is rendered if the specified
contingency does not occur in that
period. If the specified contingency
occurs in a tax accounting period
subsequent to the period in which the
service is rendered, the arm’s length
result for the controlled services
transaction generally would require
payment by the recipient to the renderer
on a basis that reflects the recipient’s
benefit from the services rendered and
the risks borne by the renderer in
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
performing the activities in the absence
of a provision that unconditionally
obligates the recipient to pay for the
activities performed in the tax
accounting period in which the service
is rendered.
(2) Contingent-payment arrangement.
For purposes of this paragraph (i), an
arrangement will be treated as a
contingent-payment arrangement if it
meets all of the requirements in
paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this section and is
consistent with the economic substance
and conduct in paragraph (i)(2)(ii) of
this section.
(i) General requirements—(A) Written
contract. The arrangement is set forth in
a written contract entered into prior to,
or contemporaneous with the start of the
activity or group of activities
constituting the controlled services
transaction.
(B) Specified contingency. The
contract states that payment is
contingent (in whole or in part) upon
the happening of a future benefit
(within the meaning of paragraph (l)(3)
of this section) for the recipient directly
related to the controlled services
transaction.
(C) Basis for payment. The contract
provides for payment on a basis that
reflects the recipient’s benefit from the
services rendered and the risks borne by
the renderer. Whether the specified
contingency bears a direct relationship
to the controlled services transaction,
and whether the basis for payment
reflects the recipient’s benefit and the
renderer’s risk, is evaluated based on all
the facts and circumstances.
(ii) Economic substance and conduct.
The arrangement, including the
contingency and the basis for payment,
is consistent with the economic
substance of the controlled transaction
and the conduct of the controlled
parties. See § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B).
(3) Commissioner’s authority to
impute contingent-payment terms.
Consistent with the authority in
§ 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B), the Commissioner
may impute contingent-payment
contractual terms in a controlled
services transaction if the economic
substance of the transaction is
consistent with the existence of such
terms.
(4) Evaluation of arm’s length charge.
Whether the amount charged in a
contingent-payment arrangement is
arm’s length will be evaluated in
accordance with this section and other
applicable regulations under section
482. In evaluating whether the amount
charged in a contingent-payment
arrangement for the manufacture,
construction, or development of tangible
or intangible property owned by the
PO 00000
Frm 00044
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
recipient is arm’s length, the charge
determined under the rules of §§ 1.482–
3 and 1.482–4 for the transfer of similar
property may be considered. See
§ 1.482–1(f)(2)(ii).
(5) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (i) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. (i) Company X is a member of
a controlled group that has operated in the
pharmaceutical sector for many years. In year
1, Company X enters into a written services
agreement with Company Y, another member
of the controlled group, whereby Company X
will perform certain research and
development activities for Company Y. The
parties enter into the agreement before
Company X undertakes any of the research
and development activities covered by the
agreement. At the time the agreement is
entered into, the possibility that any new
products will be developed is highly
uncertain and the possible market or markets
for any products that may be developed are
not known and cannot be estimated with any
reliability. Under the agreement, Company Y
will own any patent or other rights that result
from the activities of Company X under the
agreement and Company Y will make
payments to Company X only if such
activities result in commercial sales of one or
more derivative products. In that event,
Company Y will pay Company X, for a
specified period, x% of Company Y’s gross
sales of each of such products. Payments are
required with respect to each jurisdiction in
which Company Y has sales of such a
derivative product, beginning with the first
year in which the sale of a product occurs in
the jurisdiction and continuing for six
additional years with respect to sales of that
product in that jurisdiction.
(ii) As a result of research and
development activities performed by
Company X for Company Y in years 1
through 4, a compound is developed that
may be more effective than existing
medications in the treatment of certain
conditions. Company Y registers the patent
rights with respect to the compound in
several jurisdictions in year 4. In year 6,
Company Y begins commercial sales of the
product in Jurisdiction A and, in that year,
Company Y makes the payment to Company
X that is required under the agreement. Sales
of the product continue in Jurisdiction A in
years 7 through 9 and Company Y makes the
payments to Company X in years 7 through
9 that are required under the agreement.
(iii) The years under examination are years
6 though 9. In evaluating whether the
contingent-payment terms will be
recognized, the Commissioner considers
whether the conditions of paragraph (i)(2) of
this section are met and whether the
arrangement, including the specified
contingency and basis of payment, is
consistent with the economic substance of
the controlled services transaction and with
the conduct of the controlled parties. The
Commissioner determines that the
contingent-payment arrangement is reflected
in the written agreement between Company
X and Company Y; that commercial sales of
products developed under the arrangement
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
represent future benefits for Company Y
directly related to the controlled services
transaction; and that the basis for the
payment provided for in the event such sales
occur reflects the recipient’s benefit and the
renderer’s risk. Consistent with § 1.482–
1(d)(3)(ii)(B) and (iii)(B), the Commissioner
determines that the parties’ conduct over the
term of the agreement has been consistent
with their contractual allocation of risk; that
Company X has the financial capacity to bear
the risk that its research and development
services may be unsuccessful and that it may
not receive compensation for such services;
and that Company X exercises managerial
and operational control over the research and
development, such that it is reasonable for
Company X to assume the risk of those
activities. Based on all these facts, the
Commissioner determines that the
contingent-payment arrangement is
consistent with economic substance.
(iv) In determining whether the amount
charged under the contingent-payment
arrangement in each of years 6 through 9 is
arm’s length, the Commissioner evaluates
under this section and other applicable rules
under section 482 the compensation paid in
each year for the research and development
services. This analysis takes into account that
under the contingent-payment terms
Company X bears the risk that it might not
receive payment for its services in the event
that those services do not result in
marketable products and the risk that the
magnitude of its payment depends on the
magnitude of product sales, if any. The
Commissioner also considers the alternatives
reasonably available to the parties in
connection with the controlled services
transaction. One such alternative, in view of
Company X’s willingness and ability to bear
the risk and expenses of research and
development activities, would be for
Company X to undertake such activities on
its own behalf and to license the rights to
products successfully developed as a result
of such activities. Accordingly, in evaluating
whether the compensation of x% of gross
sales that is paid to Company X during the
first four years of commercial sales of
derivative products is arm’s length, the
Commissioner may consider the royalties (or
other consideration) charged for intangibles
that are comparable to those incorporated in
the derivative products and that resulted
from Company X’s research and development
activities under the contingent-payment
arrangement.
Example 2. (i) The facts are the same as in
Example 1, except that no commercial sales
ever materialize with regard to the patented
compound so that, consistent with the
agreement, Company Y makes no payments
to Company X in years 6 through 9.
(ii) Based on all the facts and
circumstances, the Commissioner determines
that the contingent-payment arrangement is
consistent with economic substance, and the
result (no payments in years 6 through 9) is
consistent with an arm’s length result.
Example 3. (i) The facts are the same as in
Example 1, except that, in the event that
Company X’s activities result in commercial
sales of one or more derivative products by
Company Y, Company Y will pay Company
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
X a fee equal to the research and
development costs borne by Company X plus
an amount equal to x% of such costs, with
the payment to be made in the first year in
which any such sales occur. The x% markup
on costs is within the range, ascertainable in
year 1, of markups on costs of independent
contract researchers that are compensated
under terms that unconditionally obligate the
recipient to pay for the activities performed
in the tax accounting period in which the
service is rendered. In year 6, Company Y
makes the single payment to Company X that
is required under the arrangement.
(ii) The years under examination are years
6 though 9. In evaluating whether the
contingent-payment terms will be
recognized, the Commissioner considers
whether the requirements of paragraph (i)(2)
of this section were met at the time the
written agreement was entered into and
whether the arrangement, including the
specified contingency and basis for payment,
is consistent with the economic substance of
the controlled services transaction and with
the conduct of the controlled parties. The
Commissioner determines that the
contingent-payment terms are reflected in the
written agreement between Company X and
Company Y and that commercial sales of
products developed under the arrangement
represent future benefits for Company Y
directly related to the controlled services
transaction. However, in this case, the
Commissioner determines that the basis for
payment provided for in the event such sales
occur (costs of the services plus x%,
representing the markup for contract research
in the absence of any nonpayment risk) does
not reflect the recipient’s benefit and the
renderer’s risks in the controlled services
transaction. Based on all the facts and
circumstances, the Commissioner determines
that the contingent-payment arrangement is
not consistent with economic substance.
(iii) Accordingly, the Commissioner
determines to exercise its authority to impute
contingent-payment contractual terms that
accord with economic substance, pursuant to
paragraph (i)(3) of this section and § 1.482–
1(d)(3)(ii)(B). In this regard, the
Commissioner takes into account that at the
time the arrangement was entered into, the
possibility that any new products would be
developed was highly uncertain and the
possible market or markets for any products
that may be developed were not known and
could not be estimated with any reliability.
In such circumstances, it is reasonable to
conclude that one possible basis of payment,
in order to reflect the recipient’s benefit and
the renderer’s risks, would be a charge equal
to a percentage of commercial sales of one or
more derivative products that result from the
research and development activities. The
Commissioner in this case may impute terms
that require Company Y to pay Company X
a percentage of sales of the products
developed under the agreement in each of
years 6 through 9.
(iv) In determining an appropriate arm’s
length charge under such imputed
contractual terms, the Commissioner
conducts an analysis under this section and
other applicable rules under section 482, and
considers the alternatives reasonably
PO 00000
Frm 00045
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44509
available to the parties in connection with
the controlled services transaction. One such
alternative, in view of Company X’s
willingness and ability to bear the risks and
expenses of research and development
activities, would be for Company X to
undertake such activities on its own behalf
and to license the rights to products
successfully developed as a result of such
activities. Accordingly, for purposes of its
determination, the Commissioner may
consider the royalties (or other consideration)
charged for intangibles that are comparable to
those incorporated in the derivative products
that resulted from Company X’s research and
development activities under the contingentpayment arrangement.
(j) Total services costs. For purposes
of this section, total services costs
means all costs of rendering those
services for which total services costs
are being determined. Total services
costs include all costs in cash or in kind
(including stock-based compensation)
that, based on analysis of the facts and
circumstances, are directly identified
with, or reasonably allocated in
accordance with the principles of
paragraph (k)(2) of this section to, the
services. In general, costs for this
purpose should comprise provision for
all resources expended, used, or made
available to achieve the specific
objective for which the service is
rendered. Reference to generally
accepted accounting principles or
Federal income tax accounting rules
may provide a useful starting point but
will not necessarily be conclusive
regarding inclusion of costs in total
services costs. Total services costs do
not include interest expense, foreign
income taxes (as defined in § 1.901–
2(a)), or domestic income taxes.
(k) Allocation of costs—(1) In general.
In any case where the renderer’s activity
that results in a benefit (within the
meaning of paragraph (l)(3) of this
section) for one recipient in a controlled
services transaction also generates a
benefit for one or more other members
of a controlled group (including the
benefit, if any, to the renderer), and the
amount charged under this section in
the controlled services transaction is
determined under a method that makes
reference to costs, costs must be
allocated among the portions of the
activity performed for the benefit of the
first mentioned recipient and such other
members of the controlled group under
this paragraph (k). The principles of this
paragraph (k) must also be used
whenever it is appropriate to allocate
and apportion any class of costs (for
example, overhead costs) in order to
determine the total services costs of
rendering the services. In no event will
an allocation of costs based on a
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44510
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
generalized or non-specific benefit be
appropriate.
(2) Appropriate method of allocation
and apportionment—(i) Reasonable
method standard. Any reasonable
method may be used to allocate and
apportion costs under this section. In
establishing the appropriate method of
allocation and apportionment,
consideration should be given to all
bases and factors, including, for
example, total services costs, total costs
for a relevant activity, assets, sales,
compensation, space utilized, and time
spent. The costs incurred by supporting
departments may be apportioned to
other departments on the basis of
reasonable overall estimates, or such
costs may be reflected in the other
departments’ costs by applying
reasonable departmental overhead rates.
Allocations and apportionments of costs
must be made on the basis of the full
cost, as opposed to the incremental cost.
(ii) Use of general practices. The
practices used by the taxpayer to
apportion costs in connection with
preparation of statements and analyses
for the use of management, creditors,
minority shareholders, joint venturers,
clients, customers, potential investors,
or other parties or agencies in interest
will be considered as potential
indicators of reliable allocation
methods, but need not be accorded
conclusive weight by the Commissioner.
In determining the extent to which
allocations are to be made to or from
foreign members of a controlled group,
practices employed by the domestic
members in apportioning costs among
themselves will also be considered if the
relationships with the foreign members
are comparable to the relationships
among the domestic members of the
controlled group. For example, if for
purposes of reporting to public
stockholders or to a governmental
agency, a corporation apportions the
costs attributable to its executive
officers among the domestic members of
a controlled group on a reasonable and
consistent basis, and such officers
exercise comparable control over foreign
members of the controlled group, such
domestic apportionment practice will be
considered in determining the
allocations to be made to the foreign
members.
(3) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (k) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Company A pays an annual
license fee of 500x to an uncontrolled
taxpayer for unlimited use of a database
within the corporate group. Under the terms
of the license with the uncontrolled taxpayer,
Company A is permitted to use the database
Company
A
Sales ................................................................................................................
(iii) Because Company C does not obtain
any benefit from the consultant, none of the
costs are allocated to it. Rather, the costs of
B
400
100 are allocated and apportioned ratably to
Company A and Company B as the entities
that obtain a benefit from the campaign,
Company
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
recipient any property or other
resources of the renderer.
(3) Benefit—(i) In general. An activity
is considered to provide a benefit to the
recipient if the activity directly results
in a reasonably identifiable increment of
economic or commercial value that
enhances the recipient’s commercial
position, or that may reasonably be
anticipated to do so. An activity is
generally considered to confer a benefit
if, taking into account the facts and
circumstances, an uncontrolled taxpayer
in circumstances comparable to those of
the recipient would be willing to pay an
uncontrolled party to perform the same
or similar activity on either a fixed or
contingent-payment basis, or if the
recipient otherwise would have
PO 00000
C
100
Total
200
Frm 00046
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
700
based on the total sales of those entities
(500). An appropriate allocation of the costs
of the consultant is as follows:
A
Allocation .....................................................................................................................................
Amount .........................................................................................................................................
(l) Controlled services transaction—
(1) In general. A controlled services
transaction includes any activity (as
defined in paragraph (l)(2) of this
section) by one member of a group of
controlled taxpayers (the renderer) that
results in a benefit (as defined in
paragraph (l)(3) of this section) to one or
more other members of the controlled
group (the recipient(s)).
(2) Activity. An activity includes the
performance of functions, assumptions
of risks, or use by a renderer of tangible
or intangible property or other
resources, capabilities, or knowledge,
such as knowledge of and ability to take
advantage of particularly advantageous
situations or circumstances. An activity
also includes making available to the
for its own use and in rendering research
services to its subsidiary, Company B.
Company B obtains benefits from the
database that are similar to those that it
would obtain if it had independently
licensed the database from the uncontrolled
taxpayer. Evaluation of the arm’s length
charge (under a method in which costs are
relevant) to Company B for the controlled
services that incorporate use of the database
must take into account the full amount of the
license fee of 500x paid by Company A, as
reasonably allocated and apportioned to the
relevant benefits, although the incremental
use of the database for the benefit of
Company B did not result in an increase in
the license fee paid by Company A.
Example 2. (i) Company A is a consumer
products company located in the United
States. Companies B and C are wholly-owned
subsidiaries of Company A and are located in
Countries B and C, respectively. Company A
and its subsidiaries manufacture products for
sale in their respective markets. Company A
hires a consultant who has expertise
regarding a manufacturing process used by
Company A and its subsidiary, Company B.
Company C, the Country C subsidiary, uses
a different manufacturing process, and
accordingly will not receive any benefit from
the outside consultant hired by Company A.
In allocating and apportioning the cost of
hiring the outside consultant (100), Company
A determines that sales constitute the most
appropriate allocation key.
(ii) Company A and its subsidiaries have
the following sales:
B
400/500
80
100/500
20
Total
........................
100
performed for itself the same activity or
a similar activity. A benefit may result
to the owner of an intangible if the
renderer engages in an activity that is
reasonably anticipated to result in an
increase in the value of that intangible.
Paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) through (v) of this
section provide guidelines that indicate
the presence or absence of a benefit for
the activities in the controlled services
transaction.
(ii) Indirect or remote benefit. An
activity is not considered to provide a
benefit to the recipient if, at the time the
activity is performed, the present or
reasonably anticipated benefit from that
activity is so indirect or remote that the
recipient would not be willing to pay,
on either a fixed or contingent-payment
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
basis, an uncontrolled party to perform
a similar activity, and would not be
willing to perform such activity for itself
for this purpose. The determination
whether the benefit from an activity is
indirect or remote is based on the nature
of the activity and the situation of the
recipient, taking into consideration all
facts and circumstances.
(iii) Duplicative activities. If an
activity performed by a controlled
taxpayer duplicates an activity that is
performed, or that reasonably may be
anticipated to be performed, by another
controlled taxpayer on or for its own
account, the activity is generally not
considered to provide a benefit to the
recipient, unless the duplicative activity
itself provides an additional benefit to
the recipient.
(iv) Shareholder activities. An activity
is not considered to provide a benefit if
the sole effect of that activity is either
to protect the renderer’s capital
investment in the recipient or in other
members of the controlled group, or to
facilitate compliance by the renderer
with reporting, legal, or regulatory
requirements applicable specifically to
the renderer, or both. Activities in the
nature of day-to-day management
generally do not relate to protection of
the renderer’s capital investment. Based
on analysis of the facts and
circumstances, activities in connection
with a corporate reorganization may be
considered to provide a benefit to one
or more controlled taxpayers.
(v) Passive association. A controlled
taxpayer generally will not be
considered to obtain a benefit where
that benefit results from the controlled
taxpayer’s status as a member of a
controlled group. A controlled
taxpayer’s status as a member of a
controlled group may, however, be
taken into account for purposes of
evaluating comparability between
controlled and uncontrolled
transactions.
(4) Disaggregation of transactions. A
controlled services transaction may be
analyzed as two separate transactions
for purposes of determining the arm’s
length consideration, if that analysis is
the most reliable means of determining
the arm’s length consideration for the
controlled services transaction. See the
best method rule under § 1.482–1(c).
(5) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (l) are illustrated by the
following examples. In each example,
assume that Company X is a U.S.
corporation and Company Y is a whollyowned subsidiary of Company X in
Country B.
Example 1. In general. In developing a
worldwide advertising and promotional
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
campaign for a consumer product, Company
X pays for and obtains designation as an
official sponsor of the Olympics. This
designation allows Company X and all its
subsidiaries, including Company Y, to
identify themselves as sponsors and to use
the Olympic logo in advertising and
promotional campaigns. The Olympic
sponsorship campaign generates benefits to
Company X, Company Y, and other
subsidiaries of Company X.
Example 2. Indirect or remote benefit.
Based on recommendations contained in a
study performed by its internal staff,
Company X implements certain changes in
its management structure and the
compensation of managers of divisions
located in the United States. No changes
were recommended or considered for
Company Y in Country B. The internal study
and the resultant changes in its management
may increase the competitiveness and overall
efficiency of Company X. Any benefits to
Company Y as a result of the study are,
however, indirect or remote. Consequently,
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from the study.
Example 3. Indirect or remote benefit.
Based on recommendations contained in a
study performed by its internal staff,
Company X decides to make changes to the
management structure and management
compensation of its subsidiaries, in order to
increase their profitability. As a result of the
recommendations in the study, Company X
implements substantial changes in the
management structure and management
compensation scheme of Company Y. The
study and the changes implemented as a
result of the recommendations are
anticipated to increase the profitability of
Company X and its subsidiaries. The
increased management efficiency of
Company Y that results from these changes
is considered to be a specific and identifiable
benefit, rather than remote or speculative.
Example 4. Duplicative activities. At its
corporate headquarters in the United States,
Company X performs certain treasury
functions for Company X and for its
subsidiaries, including Company Y. These
treasury functions include raising capital,
arranging medium and long-term financing
for general corporate needs, including cash
management. Under these circumstances, the
treasury functions performed by Company X
do not duplicate the functions performed by
Company Y’s staff. Accordingly, Company Y
is considered to obtain a benefit from the
functions performed by Company X.
Example 5. Duplicative activities. The facts
are the same as in Example 4, except that
Company Y’s functions include ensuring that
the financing requirements of its own
operations are met. Analysis of the facts and
circumstances indicates that Company Y
independently administers all financing and
cash-management functions necessary to
support its operations, and does not utilize
financing obtained by Company X. Under the
circumstances, the treasury functions
performed by Company X are duplicative of
similar functions performed by Company Y’s
staff, and the duplicative functions do not
enhance Company Y’s position. Accordingly,
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
PO 00000
Frm 00047
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44511
benefit from the duplicative activities
performed by Company X.
Example 6. Duplicative activities.
Company X’s in-house legal staff has
specialized expertise in several areas,
including intellectual property law.
Company Y is involved in negotiations with
an unrelated party to enter into a complex
joint venture that includes multiple licenses
and cross-licenses of patents and copyrights.
Company Y retains outside counsel that
specializes in intellectual property law to
review the transaction documents. Outside
counsel advises that the terms for the
proposed transaction are advantageous to
Company Y and that the contracts are valid
and fully enforceable. Before Company Y
executes the contracts, the legal staff of
Company X also reviews the transaction
documents and concurs in the opinion
provided by outside counsel. The activities
performed by Company X substantially
duplicate the legal services obtained by
Company Y, but they also reduce the
commercial risk associated with the
transaction in a way that confers an
additional benefit on Company Y.
Example 7. Shareholder activities.
Company X is a publicly held corporation.
U.S. laws and regulations applicable to
publicly held corporations such as Company
X require the preparation and filing of
periodic reports that show, among other
things, profit and loss statements, balance
sheets, and other material financial
information concerning the company’s
operations. Company X, Company Y and
each of the other subsidiaries maintain their
own separate accounting departments that
record individual transactions and prepare
financial statements in accordance with their
local accounting practices. Company Y, and
the other subsidiaries, forward the results of
their financial performance to Company X,
which analyzes and compiles these data into
periodic reports in accordance with U.S. laws
and regulations. Because Company X’s
preparation and filing of the reports relate
solely to its role as an investor of capital or
shareholder in Company Y or to its
compliance with reporting, legal, or
regulatory requirements, or both, these
activities constitute shareholder activities
and therefore Company Y is not considered
to obtain a benefit from the preparation and
filing of the reports.
Example 8. Shareholder activities. The
facts are the same as in Example 7, except
that Company Y’s accounting department
maintains a general ledger recording
individual transactions, but does not prepare
any financial statements (such as profit and
loss statements and balance sheets). Instead,
Company Y forwards the general ledger data
to Company X, and Company X analyzes and
compiles financial statements for Company
Y, as well as for Company X’s overall
operations, for purposes of complying with
U.S. reporting requirements. Company Y is
subject to reporting requirements in Country
B similar to those applicable to Company X
in the United States. Much of the data that
Company X analyzes and compiles regarding
Company Y’s operations for purposes of
complying with the U.S. reporting
requirements are made available to Company
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
44512
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
Y for its use in preparing reports that must
be filed in Country B. Company Y
incorporates these data, after minor
adjustments for differences in local
accounting practices, into the reports that it
files in Country B. Under these
circumstances, because Company X’s
analysis and compilation of Company Y’s
financial data does not relate solely to its role
as an investor of capital or shareholder in
Company Y, or to its compliance with
reporting, legal, or regulatory requirements,
or both, these activities do not constitute
shareholder activities.
Example 9. Shareholder activities.
Members of Company X’s internal audit staff
visit Company Y on a semiannual basis in
order to review the subsidiary’s adherence to
internal operating procedures issued by
Company X and its compliance with U.S.
anti-bribery laws, which apply to Company
Y on account of its ownership by a U.S.
corporation. Because the sole effect of the
reviews by Company X’s audit staff is to
protect Company X’s investment in Company
Y, or to facilitate Company X’s compliance
with U.S. anti-bribery laws, or both, the visits
are shareholder activities and therefore
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from the visits.
Example 10. Shareholder activities.
Country B recently enacted legislation that
changed the foreign currency exchange
controls applicable to foreign shareholders of
Country B corporations. Company X
concludes that it may benefit from changing
the capital structure of Company Y, thus
taking advantage of the new foreign currency
exchange control laws in Country B.
Company X engages an investment banking
firm and a law firm to review the Country B
legislation and to propose possible changes
to the capital structure of Company Y.
Because Company X’s retention of the firms
facilitates Company Y’s ability to pay
dividends and other amounts and has the
sole effect of protecting Company X’s
investment in Company Y, these activities
constitute shareholder activities and
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from the activities.
Example 11. Shareholder activities. The
facts are the same as in Example 10, except
that Company Y bears the full cost of
retaining the firms to evaluate the new
foreign currency control laws in Country B
and to make appropriate changes to its stock
ownership by Company X. Company X is
considered to obtain a benefit from the
rendering by Company Y of these activities,
which would be shareholder activities if
conducted by Company X (see Example 10).
Example 12. Shareholder activities. The
facts are the same as in Example 10, except
that the new laws relate solely to corporate
governance in Country B, and Company X
retains the law firm and investment banking
firm in order to evaluate whether
restructuring would increase Company Y’s
profitability, reduce the number of legal
entities in Country B, and increase Company
Y’s ability to introduce new products more
quickly in Country B. Because Company X
retained the law firm and the investment
banking firm primarily to enhance Company
Y’s profitability and the efficiency of its
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
operations, and not solely to protect
Company X’s investment in Company Y or to
facilitate Company X’s compliance with
Country B’s corporate laws, or to both, these
activities do not constitute shareholder
activities.
Example 13. Shareholder activities.
Company X establishes detailed personnel
policies for its subsidiaries, including
Company Y. Company X also reviews and
approves the performance appraisals of
Company Y’s executives, monitors levels of
compensation paid to all Company Y
personnel, and is involved in hiring and
firing decisions regarding the senior
executives of Company Y. Because this
personnel-related activity by Company X
involves day-to-day management of Company
Y, this activity does not relate solely to
Company X’s role as an investor of capital or
a shareholder of Company Y, and therefore
does not constitute a shareholder activity.
Example 14. Shareholder activities. Each
year, Company X conducts a two-day retreat
for its senior executives. The purpose of the
retreat is to refine the long-term business
strategy of Company X and its subsidiaries,
including Company Y, and to produce a
confidential strategy statement. The strategy
statement identifies several potential growth
initiatives for Company X and its subsidiaries
and lists general means of increasing the
profitability of the company as a whole. The
strategy statement is made available without
charge to Company Y and the other
subsidiaries of Company X. Company Y
independently evaluates whether to
implement some, all, or none of the
initiatives contained in the strategy
statement. Because the preparation of the
strategy statement does not relate solely to
Company X’s role as an investor of capital or
a shareholder of Company Y, the expense of
preparing the document is not a shareholder
expense.
Example 15. Passive association/benefit.
Company X is the parent corporation of a
large controlled group that has been in
operation in the information-technology
sector for ten years. Company Y is a small
corporation that was recently acquired by the
Company X controlled group from local
Country B owners. Several months after the
acquisition of Company Y, Company Y
obtained a contract to redesign and assemble
the information-technology networks and
systems of a large financial institution in
Country B. The project was significantly
larger and more complex than any other
project undertaken to date by Company Y.
Company Y did not use Company X’s
marketing intangibles to solicit the contract,
and Company X had no involvement in the
solicitation, negotiation, or anticipated
execution of the contract. For purposes of
this section, Company Y is not considered to
obtain a benefit from Company X or any
other member of the controlled group
because the ability of Company Y to obtain
the contract, or to obtain the contract on
more favorable terms than would have been
possible prior to its acquisition by the
Company X controlled group, was due to
Company Y’s status as a member of the
Company X controlled group and not to any
specific activity by Company X or any other
member of the controlled group.
PO 00000
Frm 00048
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Example 16. Passive association/benefit.
The facts are the same as in Example 15,
except that Company X executes a
performance guarantee with respect to the
contract, agreeing to assist in the project if
Company Y fails to meet certain mileposts.
This performance guarantee allowed
Company Y to obtain the contract on
materially more favorable terms than
otherwise would have been possible.
Company Y is considered to obtain a benefit
from Company X’s execution of the
performance guarantee.
Example 17. Passive association/benefit.
The facts are the same as in Example 15,
except that Company X began the process of
negotiating the contract with the financial
institution in Country B before acquiring
Company Y. Once Company Y was acquired
by Company X, the contract with the
financial institution was entered into by
Company Y. Company Y is considered to
obtain a benefit from Company X’s
negotiation of the contract.
Example 18. Passive association/benefit.
The facts are the same as in Example 15,
except that Company X sent a letter to the
financial institution in Country B, which
represented that Company X had a certain
percentage ownership in Company Y and
that Company X would maintain that same
percentage ownership interest in Company Y
until the contract was completed. This letter
allowed Company Y to obtain the contract on
more favorable terms than otherwise would
have been possible. Since this letter from
Company X to the financial institution
simply affirmed Company Y’s status as a
member of the controlled group and
represented that this status would be
maintained until the contract was completed,
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from Company X’s furnishing of the
letter.
Example 19. Passive association/benefit. (i)
S is a company that supplies plastic
containers to companies in various
industries. S establishes the prices for its
containers through a price list that offers
customers discounts based solely on the
volume of containers purchased.
(ii) Company X is the parent corporation of
a large controlled group in the information
technology sector. Company Y is a whollyowned subsidiary of Company X located in
Country B. Company X and Company Y both
purchase plastic containers from unrelated
supplier S. In year 1, Company X purchases
1 million units and Company Y purchases
100,000 units. S, basing its prices on
purchases by the entire group, completes the
order for 1.1 million units at a price of $0.95
per unit, and separately bills and ships the
orders to each company. Companies X and Y
undertake no bargaining with supplier S with
respect to the price charged, and purchase no
other products from supplier S.
(iii) R1 and its wholly-owned subsidiary
R2 are a controlled group of taxpayers
(unrelated to Company X or Company Y)
each of which carries out functions
comparable to those of Companies X and Y
and undertakes purchases of plastic
containers from supplier S, identical to those
purchased from S by Company X and
Company Y, respectively. S, basing its prices
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
on purchases by the entire group, charges R1
and R2 $0.95 per unit for the 1.1 million
units ordered. R1 and R2 undertake no
bargaining with supplier S with respect to
the price charged, and purchase no other
products from supplier S.
(iv) U is an uncontrolled taxpayer that
carries out comparable functions and
undertakes purchases of plastic containers
from supplier S identical to Company Y. U
is not a member of a controlled group,
undertakes no bargaining with supplier S
with respect to the price charged, and
purchases no other products from supplier S.
U purchases 100,000 plastic containers from
S at the price of $1.00 per unit.
(v) Company X charges Company Y a fee
of $5,000, or $0.05 per unit of plastic
containers purchased by Company Y,
reflecting the fact that Company Y receives
the volume discount from supplier S.
(vi) In evaluating the fee charged by
Company X to Company Y, the
Commissioner considers whether the
transactions between R1, R2, and S or the
transactions between U and S provide a more
reliable measure of the transactions between
Company X, Company Y and S. The
Commissioner determines that Company Y’s
status as a member of a controlled group
should be taken into account for purposes of
evaluating comparability of the transactions,
and concludes that the transactions between
R1, R2, and S are more reliably comparable
to the transactions between Company X,
Company Y, and S. The comparable charge
for the purchase was $0.95 per unit.
Therefore, obtaining the plastic containers at
a favorable rate (and the resulting $5,000
savings) is entirely due to Company Y’s
status as a member of the Company X
controlled group and not to any specific
activity by Company X or any other member
of the controlled group. Consequently,
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from Company X or any other
member of the controlled group.
Example 20. Disaggregation of
transactions. (i) X, a domestic corporation, is
a pharmaceutical company that develops and
manufactures ethical pharmaceutical
products. Y, a Country B corporation, is a
distribution and marketing company that also
performs clinical trials for USP in Country X.
Because Y does not possess the capability to
conduct the trials, it contracts with a third
party to undertake the trials at a cost of $100.
Y also incurs $25 in expenses related to the
third-party contract (for example, in hiring
and working with the third party).
(ii) Based on a detailed functional analysis,
the Commissioner determines that Y
performed functions beyond merely
facilitating the clinical trials for X, such as
audit controls of the third party performing
those trials. In determining the arm’s length
price, the Commissioner may consider a
number of alternatives. For example, for
purposes of determining the arm’s length
price, the Commissioner may determine that
the intercompany service is most reliably
analyzed on a disaggregated basis as two
separate transactions: in this case, the
contract between Y and the third party could
constitute an internal CUSP with a price of
$100. Y would be further entitled to an arm’s
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
length remuneration for its facilitating
services. If the most reliable method is one
that provides a markup on Y’s costs, then
‘‘total services cost’’ in this context would be
$25. Alternatively, the Commissioner may
determine that the intercompany service is
most reliably analyzed as a single
transaction, based on comparable
uncontrolled transactions involving the
facilitation of similar clinical trial services
performed by third parties. If the most
reliable method is one that provides a
markup on all of Y’s costs, and the base of
the markup determined by the comparable
companies includes the third-party clinical
trial costs, then such a markup would be
applied to Y’s total services cost of $125.
Examples 21. Disaggregation of
transactions. (i) X performs a number of
administrative functions for its subsidiaries,
including Y, a distributor of widgets in
Country B. These services include those
relating to working capital (inventory and
accounts receivable/payable) management.
To facilitate provision of these services, X
purchases an ERP system specifically
dedicated to optimizing working capital
management. The system, which entails
significant third-party costs and which
includes substantial intellectual property
relating to its software, costs $1000.
(ii) Based on a detailed functional analysis,
the Commissioner determines that in
providing administrative services for Y, X
performed functions beyond merely
operating the ERP system itself, since X was
effectively using the ERP as an input to the
administrative services it was providing to Y.
In determining arm’s length price for the
services, the Commissioner may consider a
number of alternatives. For example, if the
most reliable uncontrolled data is derived
from companies that use similar ERP systems
purchased from third parties to perform
similar administrative functions for
uncontrolled parties, the Commissioner may
determine that a CPM is the best method for
measuring the functions performed by X,
and, in addition, that a markup on total
services costs, based on the markup from the
comparable companies, is the most reliable
PLI. In this case, total services cost, and the
basis for the markup, would include
appropriate reflection of the ERP costs of
$1000. Alternatively, X’s functions may be
most reliably measured based on comparable
uncontrolled companies that perform similar
administrative functions using their
customers’ own ERP systems. Under these
circumstances, the total services cost would
equal X’s costs of providing the
administrative services excluding the ERP
cost of $1000.
44513
transaction is evaluated as a controlled
services transaction under this section
or whether one or more elements should
be evaluated separately under other
sections of the section 482 regulations
depends on which approach will
provide the most reliable measure of an
arm’s length result. Ordinarily, an
integrated transaction of this type may
be evaluated under this section and its
separate elements need not be evaluated
separately, provided that each
component of the transaction may be
adequately accounted for in evaluating
the comparability of the controlled
transaction to the uncontrolled
comparables and, accordingly, in
determining the arm’s length result in
the controlled transaction. See § 1.482–
1(d)(3).
(2) Services transactions that effect a
transfer of intangible property. A
transaction structured as a controlled
services transaction may in certain cases
include an element that constitutes the
transfer of intangible property or may
result in a transfer, in whole or in part,
of intangible property. Notwithstanding
paragraph (m)(1) of this section, if such
element relating to intangible property
is material to the evaluation, the arm’s
length result for the element of the
transaction that involves intangible
property must be corroborated or
determined by an analysis under
§ 1.482–4.
(3) Services subject to a qualified cost
sharing arrangement. Services provided
by a controlled participant under a
qualified cost sharing arrangement are
subject to § 1.482–7.
(4) Other types of transactions that
include controlled services transactions.
A transaction structured other than as a
controlled services transaction may
include one or more elements for which
separate pricing methods are provided
in this section. Whether such an
integrated transaction is evaluated
under another section of the section 482
regulations or whether one or more
elements should be evaluated separately
under this section depends on which
approach will provide the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length result.
Ordinarily, a single method may be
(m) Coordination with transfer pricing applied to such an integrated
rules for other transactions—(1) Services transaction, and the separate services
component of the transaction need not
transactions that include other types of
transactions. A transaction structured as be separately analyzed under this
section, provided that the controlled
a controlled services transaction may
services may be adequately accounted
include other elements for which a
for in evaluating the comparability of
separate category or categories of
methods are provided, such as a loan or the controlled transaction to the
uncontrolled comparables and,
advance, a rental, or a transfer of
accordingly, in determining the arm’s
tangible or intangible property. See
§§ 1.482–1(b)(2) and 1.482–2(a), (c), and length results in the controlled
transaction. See § 1.482–1(d)(3).
(d). Whether such an integrated
PO 00000
Frm 00049
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44514
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
(5) Examples. The following examples
illustrate paragraphs (m)(1) through (4)
of this section:
Example 1. (i) U.S. parent corporation
Company X enters into an agreement to
maintain equipment of Company Y, a foreign
subsidiary. The maintenance of the
equipment requires the use of spare parts.
The cost of the spare parts necessary to
maintain the equipment amounts to
approximately 25 percent of the total costs of
maintaining the equipment. Company Y pays
a fee that includes a charge for labor and
parts.
(ii) Whether this integrated transaction is
evaluated as a controlled services transaction
or is evaluated as a controlled services
transaction and the transfer of tangible
property depends on which approach will
provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result. If it is not possible to find
comparable uncontrolled services
transactions that involve similar services and
tangible property transfers as the controlled
transaction between Company X and
Company Y, it will be necessary to determine
the arm’s length charge for the controlled
services, and then to evaluate separately the
arm’s length charge for the tangible property
transfers under § 1.482–1 and §§ 1.482–3
through 1.482–6. Alternatively, it may be
possible to apply the comparable profits
method of § 1.482–5, to evaluate the arm’s
length profit of Company X or Company Y
from the integrated controlled transaction.
The comparable profits method may provide
the most reliable measure of measure of an
arm’s length result if uncontrolled parties are
identified that perform similar, combined
functions of maintaining and providing spare
parts for similar equipment.
Example 2. (i) U.S. parent corporation
Company X sells industrial equipment to its
foreign subsidiary, Company Y. In
connection with this sale, Company X
renders to Company Y services that consist
of demonstrating the use of the equipment
and assisting in the effective start-up of the
equipment. Company X structures the
integrated transaction as a sale of tangible
property and determines the transfer price
under the comparable uncontrolled price
method of § 1.482–3(b).
(ii) Whether this integrated transaction is
evaluated as a transfer of tangible property or
is evaluated as a controlled services
transaction and a transfer of tangible property
depends on which approach will provide the
most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result. In this case, the controlled services
may be similar to services rendered in the
transactions used to determine the
comparable uncontrolled price, or they may
appropriately be considered a difference
between the controlled transaction and
comparable transactions with a definite and
reasonably ascertainable effect on price for
which appropriate adjustments can be made.
See § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(A)(6). In either case,
application of the comparable uncontrolled
price method to evaluate the integrated
transaction may provide a reliable measure of
an arm’s length result, and application of a
separate transfer pricing method for the
controlled services element of the transaction
is not necessary.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
Example 3. (i) The facts are the same as
in Example 2 except that, after assisting
Company Y in start-up, Company X also
renders ongoing services, including
instruction and supervision regarding
Company Y’s ongoing use of the equipment.
Company X structures the entire transaction,
including the incremental ongoing services,
as a sale of tangible property, and determines
the transfer price under the comparable
uncontrolled price method of § 1.482–3(b).
(ii) Whether this integrated transaction is
evaluated as a transfer of tangible property or
is evaluated as a controlled services
transaction and a transfer of tangible property
depends on which approach will provide the
most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result. It may not be possible to identify
comparable uncontrolled transactions in
which a seller of merchandise renders
services similar to the ongoing services
rendered by Company X to Company Y. In
such a case, the incremental services in
connection with ongoing use of the
equipment could not be taken into account
as a comparability factor because they are not
similar to the services rendered in
connection with sales of similar tangible
property. Accordingly, it may be necessary to
evaluate separately the transfer price for such
services under this section in order to
produce the most reliable measure of an
arm’s length result. Alternatively, it may be
possible to apply the comparable profits
method of § 1.482–5 to evaluate the arm’s
length profit of Company X or Company Y
from the integrated controlled transaction.
The comparable profits method may provide
the most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result if uncontrolled parties are identified
that perform the combined functions of
selling equipment and rendering ongoing
after-sale services associated with such
equipment. In that case, it would not be
necessary to separately evaluate the transfer
price for the controlled services under this
section.
Example 4. (i) Company X, a U.S.
corporation, and Company Y, a foreign
corporation, are members of a controlled
group. Both companies perform research and
development activities relating to integrated
circuits. In addition, Company Y
manufactures integrated circuits. In years 1
through 3, Company X engages in substantial
research and development activities, gains
significant know-how regarding the
development of a particular high-temperature
resistant integrated circuit, and memorializes
that research in a written report. In years 1
through 3, Company X generates overall net
operating losses as a result of the
expenditures associated with this research
and development effort. At the beginning of
year 4, Company X enters into a technical
assistance agreement with Company Y. As
part of this agreement, the researchers from
Company X responsible for this project meet
with the researchers from Company Y and
provide them with a copy of the written
report. Three months later, the researchers
from Company Y apply for a patent for a
high-temperature resistant integrated circuit
based in large part upon the know-how
obtained from the researchers from Company
X.
PO 00000
Frm 00050
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
(ii) The controlled services transaction
between Company X and Company Y
includes an element that constitutes the
transfer of intangible property (such as,
know-how). Because the element relating to
the intangible property is material to the
arm’s length evaluation, the arm’s length
result for that element must be corroborated
or determined by an analysis under § 1.482–
4.
(n) Effective date—(1) In general. This
section is generally applicable for
taxable years beginning after December
31, 2006. In addition, a person may elect
to apply the provisions of this section,
§ 1.482–9T, to earlier taxable years. See
paragraph (n)(2) of this section.
(2) Election to apply regulations to
earlier taxable years—(i) Scope of
election. A taxpayer may elect to apply
§§ 1.482–1T, 1.482–2T, 1.482–4T,
1.482–6T, 1.482–8T, and 9T, 1.861–8T,
§ 1.6038A–3T, § 1.6662–6T and
§ 31.3121(s)-1T of this chapter to any
taxable year beginning after September
10, 2003. Such election requires that all
of the provisions of this section,
§§ 1.482–1T, 1.482–2T, 1.482–4T,
1.482–6T, 1.482–8T, and 1.482–9T, as
well as the related provisions, §§ 1.861–
8T, 1.6038A–3T, 1.6662–6T and
31.3121(s)–1T of this chapter be applied
to such taxable year and all subsequent
taxable years (earlier taxable years) of
the taxpayer making the election.
(ii) Effect of election. An election to
apply the regulations to earlier taxable
years has no effect on the limitations on
assessment and collection or on the
limitations on credit or refund (see
Chapter 66 of the Internal Revenue
Code).
(iii) Time and manner of making
election. An election to apply the
regulations to earlier taxable years must
be made by attaching a statement to the
taxpayer’s timely filed U.S. tax return
(including extensions) for its first
taxable year after December 31, 2006.
(iv) Revocation of election. An
election to apply the regulations to
earlier taxable years may not be revoked
without the consent of the
Commissioner.
(3) In general. The applicability of
§ 1.482–9T expires on or before July 31,
2009.
I Par. 15. Section 1.861–8 is amended
as follows:
I 1. Paragraph (a)(5)(ii) is redesignated
as paragraph (a)(5)(iii).
I 2. A new paragraph (a)(5)(ii) is added.
I 3. Paragraph (e)(4) is revised.
I 4. Paragraph (f)(4)(i) is revised.
I 5. Paragraph (g), Example 17, Example
18, and Example 30 are revised.
The addition and revisions read as
follows:
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
§ 1.861–8 Computation of taxable income
from sources within the United States and
from other sources and activities.
(a) * * *
(5) * * *
(ii) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.861–8T(a)(5) (ii).
*
*
*
*
*
(e) * * *
(4) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.861–8T(e)(4).
(f) * * *
(4) * * * (i)[Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.861–8T(f)(4)(i).
*
*
*
*
*
(g) * * *
Example 17. [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.861–8T(g), Example
17.
Example 18. [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.861–8T(g), Example
18.
*
*
*
*
*
Example 30. [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.861–8T(g), Example
30.
*
*
*
*
*
I Par. 16. Section 1.861–8T is amended
as follows:
I 1. Paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) are
removed and reserved and paragraph
(a)(5)(ii) is revised.
I 2. Paragraphs (b)(3) are revised.
I 3. Paragraph (e)(4) is added.
I 4. Paragraph (f)(4)(i) is revised.
I 5. Paragraph (g), Example 17, Example
18, and Example 30 are added.
I 6. Paragraph (h) is revised.
The addition and revisions read as
follows:
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
§ 1.861–8T Computation of taxable income
from sources within the United States and
from other sources and activities
(temporary).
(a) * * *
(5) * * *
(ii) Paragraph (e)(4), the last sentence
of paragraph (f)(4)(i), and paragraph (g),
Example 17, Example 18, and Example
30 of this section are generally
applicable for taxable years beginning
after December 31, 2006. In addition, a
person may elect to apply the provisions
of paragraph (e)(4) of this section to
earlier years. Such election shall be
made in accordance with the rules set
forth in § 1.482–9T(n)(2).
(b) * * *
(3) Supportive functions. Deductions
which are supportive in nature (such as
overhead, general and administrative,
and supervisory expenses) may relate to
other deductions which can more
readily be allocated to gross income. In
such instance, such supportive
deductions may be allocated and
apportioned along with the deductions
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
to which they relate. On the other hand,
it would be equally acceptable to
attribute supportive deductions on some
reasonable basis directly to activities or
property ordinarily be accomplished by
allocating the supportive expenses to all
gross income or to another broad class
of gross income and apportioning the
expenses in accordance with paragraph
(c)(1) of this section. For this purpose,
reasonable departmental overhead rates
may be utilized. For examples of the
application of the principles of this
paragraph (b)(3) to expenses other than
expenses attributable to stewardship
activities, see Examples 19 through 21
of paragraph (g) of this section. See
paragraph (e)(4)(ii) of this section for the
allocation and apportionment of
deductions attributable to stewardship
expenses. However, supportive
deductions that are described in 1.861–
14T(e)(3) shall be allocated and
apportioned by reference only to the
gross income of a single member of an
affiliated group of corporations as
defined in 1.861–14T.
*
*
*
*
*
(e) * * *
(4) Stewardship and controlled
services—(i) Expenses attributable to
controlled services. If a corporation
performs a controlled services
transaction (as defined in § 1.482–
9T(l)(3)), which includes any activity by
one member of a group of controlled
taxpayers that results in a benefit to a
related corporation, and the rendering
corporation charges the related
corporation for such services, section
482 and these regulations provide for an
allocation where the charge is not
consistent with an arm’s length result as
determined. The deductions for
expenses of the corporation attributable
to the controlled services transaction are
considered definitely related to the
amounts so charged and are to be
allocated to such amounts.
(ii) Stewardship expenses attributable
to dividends received. Stewardship
expenses, which result from
‘‘overseeing’’ functions undertaken for a
corporation’s own benefit as an investor
in a related corporation, shall be
considered definitely related and
allocable to dividends received, or to be
received, from the related corporation.
For purposes of this section,
stewardship expenses of a corporation
are those expenses resulting from
‘‘duplicative activities’’ (as defined in
§ 1.482–9T(l)(3)(iii)) or ‘‘shareholder
activities’’ (as defined in § 1.482–
9T(l)(3)(iv)) of the corporation with
respect to the related corporation. Thus,
for example, stewardship expenses
include expenses of an activity the sole
PO 00000
Frm 00051
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44515
effect of which is either to protect the
corporation’s capital investment in the
related corporation or to facilitate
compliance by the corporation with
reporting, legal, or regulatory
requirements applicable specifically to
the corporation, or both. If a corporation
has a foreign or international
department which exercises overseeing
functions with respect to related foreign
corporations and, in addition, the
department performs other functions
that generate other foreign-source
income (such as fees for services
rendered outside of the United States for
the benefit of foreign related
corporations, foreign-source royalties,
and gross income of foreign branches),
some part of the deductions with
respect to that department are
considered definitely related to the
other foreign-source income. In some
instances, the operations of a foreign or
international department will also
generate United States source income
(such as fees for services performed in
the United States). Permissible methods
of apportionment with respect to
stewardship expenses include
comparisons of time spent by employees
weighted to take into account
differences in compensation, or
comparisons of each related
corporation’s gross receipts, gross
income, or unit sales volume, assuming
that stewardship activities are not
substantially disproportionate to such
factors. See paragraph (f)(5) of this
section for the type of verification that
may be required in this respect. See
§ 1.482–9T(l)(5) for examples that
illustrate the principles of § 1.482–
9T(l)(3). See Example 17 and Example
18 of paragraph (g) of this section for the
allocation and apportionment of
stewardship expenses. See paragraph
(b)(3) of this section for the allocation
and apportionment of deductions
attributable to supportive functions
other than stewardship expenses, such
as expenses in the nature of day-to-day
management, and paragraph (e)(5) of
this section generally for the allocation
and apportionment of deductions
attributable to legal and accounting fees
and expenses.
(f) * * *
(4) Adjustments made under other
provisions of the Code—(i) In general. If
an adjustment which affects the
taxpayer is made under section 482 or
any other provision of the Code, it may
be necessary to recompute the
allocations and apportionments
required by this section in order to
reflect changes resulting from the
adjustment. The recomputation made by
the Commissioner shall be made using
the same method of allocation and
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44516
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
apportionment as was originally used by
the taxpayer, provided such method as
originally used conformed with
paragraph (a)(5) of this section and, in
light of the adjustment, such method
does not result in a material distortion.
In addition to adjustments which would
be made aside from this section,
adjustments to the taxpayer’s income
and deductions which would not
otherwise be made may be required
before applying this section in order to
prevent a distortion in determining
taxable income from a particular source
of activity. For example, if an item
included as a part of the cost of goods
sold has been improperly attributed to
specific sales, and, as a result, gross
income under one of the operative
sections referred to in paragraph (f)(1) of
this section is improperly determined, it
may be necessary for the Commissioner
to make an adjustment to the cost of
goods sold, consistent with the
principles of this section, before
applying this section. Similarly, if a
domestic corporation transfers the stock
in its foreign subsidiaries to a domestic
subsidiary and the parent corporation
continues to incur expenses in
connection with protecting its capital
investment in the foreign subsidiaries
(see paragraph (e)(4) of this section), it
may be necessary for the Commissioner
to make an allocation under section 482
with respect to such expenses before
making allocations and apportionments
required by this section, even though
the section 482 allocation might not
otherwise be made.
(g) * * *
Example 17. Stewardship Expenses
(Consolidation). (i) (A) Facts. X, a domestic
corporation, wholly owns M, N, and O, also
domestic corporations. X, M, N, and O file a
consolidated income tax return. All the
income of X and O is from sources within the
United States, all of M’s income is general
limitation income from sources within South
America, and all of N’s income is general
limitation income from sources within
Africa. X receives no dividends from M, N,
or O. During the taxable year, the
consolidated group of corporations earned
consolidated gross income of $550,000 and
incurred total deductions of $370,000 as
follows:
Gross income
Deductions
Corporations:
X .......................................................................................................................................................................
M .......................................................................................................................................................................
N .......................................................................................................................................................................
O .......................................................................................................................................................................
$100,000
250,000
150,000
50,000
$50,000
100,000
200,000
20,000
Total ...........................................................................................................................................................
550,000
370,000
(B) Of the $50,000 of deductions incurred
by X, $15,000 relates to X’s ownership of M;
$10,000 relates to X’s ownership of N; $5,000
relates to X’s ownership of O; and the sole
effect of the entire $30,000 of deductions is
to protect X’s capital investment in M, N, and
O. X properly categorizes the $30,000 of
deductions as stewardship expenses. The
remainder of X’s deductions ($20,000) relates
to production of United States source income
from its plant in the United States.
(ii) (A) Allocation. X’s deductions of
$50,000 are definitely related and thus
allocable to the types of gross income to
which they give rise, namely $25,000 wholly
to general limitation income from sources
outside the United States ($15,000 for
stewardship of M and $10,000 for
stewardship of N) and the remainder
($25,000) wholly to gross income from
sources within the United States. Expenses
incurred by M and N are entirely related and
thus wholly allocable to general limitation
income earned from sources without the
United States, and expenses incurred by O
are entirely related and thus wholly allocable
to income earned within the United States.
Hence, no apportionment of expenses of X,
M, N, or O is necessary. For purposes of
applying the foreign tax credit limitation; the
statutory grouping is general limitation gross
income from sources without the United
States and the residual grouping is gross
income from sources within the United
States. As a result of the allocation of
deductions, the X consolidated group has
taxable income from sources without the
United States in the amount of $75,000,
computed as follows:
Foreign source general limitation gross income:
($250,000 from M + $150,000 from N) ........................................................................................................................................
Less: Deductions allocable to foreign source general limitation gross income:
($25,000 from X, $100,000 from M, and $200,000 from N) ........................................................................................................
$400,000
Total foreign-source taxable income .....................................................................................................................................
75,000
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
(B) Thus, in the combined computation of
the general limitation, the numerator of the
limiting fraction (taxable income from
sources outside the United States) is $75,000.
Example 18. Stewardship and Supportive
Expenses. (i) (A) Facts. X, a domestic
corporation, manufactures and sells
pharmaceuticals in the United States. X’s
domestic subsidiary S, and X’s foreign
subsidiaries T, U, and V perform similar
functions in the United States and foreign
countries T, U, and V, respectively. Each
325,000
corporation derives substantial net income
during the taxable year that is general
limitation income described in section
904(d)(1). X’s gross income for the taxable
year consists of:
Domestic sales income .......................................................................................................................................................................
Dividends from S (before dividends received deduction) ...............................................................................................................
Dividends from T ...............................................................................................................................................................................
Dividends from U ...............................................................................................................................................................................
Dividends from V ...............................................................................................................................................................................
Royalties from T and U ......................................................................................................................................................................
Fees from U for services performed by X .........................................................................................................................................
$32,000,000
3,000,000
2,000,000
1,000,000
0
1,000,000
1,000,000
Total gross income ......................................................................................................................................................................
40,000,000
(B) In addition, X incurs expenses of its
supervision department of $1,500,000.
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
(C) X’s supervision department (the
Department) is responsible for the
PO 00000
Frm 00052
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
supervision of its four subsidiaries and for
rendering certain services to the subsidiaries,
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
and this Department provides all the
supportive functions necessary for X’s
foreign activities. The Department performs
three principal types of activities. The first
type consists of services for the direct benefit
of U for which a fee is paid by U to X. The
cost of the services for U is $900,000 (which
results in a total charge to U of $1,000,000).
The second type consists of activities
described in § 1.482–9(l)(3)(iii) that are in the
nature of shareholder oversight that duplicate
functions performed by the subsidiaries’ own
employees and that do not provide an
additional benefit to the subsidiaries. For
example, a team of auditors from X’s
accounting department periodically audits
the subsidiaries’ books and prepares internal
reports for use by X’s management. Similarly,
X’s treasurer periodically reviews for the
board of directors of X the subsidiaries’
financial policies. These activities do not
provide an additional benefit to the related
corporations. The cost of the duplicative
services and related supportive expenses is
$540,000. The third type of activity consists
of providing services which are ancillary to
the license agreements which X maintains
with subsidiaries T and U. The cost of the
ancillary services is $60,000.
(ii) Allocation. The Department’s outlay of
$900,000 for services rendered for the benefit
of U is allocated to the $1,000,000 in fees
paid by U. The remaining $600,000 in the
Department’s deductions are definitely
related to the types of gross income to which
they give rise, namely dividends from
subsidiaries S, T, U, and V and royalties from
T and U. However, $60,000 of the $600,000
in deductions are found to be attributable to
the ancillary services and are definitely
related (and therefore allocable) solely to
royalties received from T and U, while the
remaining $540,000 in deductions are
definitely related (and therefore allocable) to
dividends received from all the subsidiaries.
(iii) (A) Apportionment. For purposes of
applying the foreign tax credit limitation, the
statutory grouping is general limitation gross
income from sources outside the United
States and the residual grouping is gross
income from sources within the United
States. X’s deduction of $540,000 for the
Department’s expenses and related
supportive expenses which are allocable to
dividends received from the subsidiaries
must be apportioned between the statutory
and residual groupings before the foreign tax
credit limitation may be applied. In
determining an appropriate method for
apportioning the $540,000, a basis other than
X’s gross income must be used since the
dividend payment policies of the subsidiaries
bear no relationship either to the activities of
the Department or to the amount of income
earned by each subsidiary. This is evidenced
by the fact that V paid no dividends during
the year, whereas S, T, and U paid dividends
of $1 million or more each. In the absence
of facts that would indicate a material
distortion resulting from the use of such
method, the stewardship expenses ($540,000)
may be apportioned on the basis of the gross
receipts of each subsidiary.
(B) The gross receipts of the subsidiaries
were as follows:
S ............................................
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
$4,000,000
Jkt 208001
T ...........................................
U ...........................................
V ...........................................
3,000,000
500,000
1,500,000
Total ..............................
9,000,000
(C) Thus, the expenses of the Department
are apportioned for purposes of the foreign
tax credit limitation as follows:
Apportionment of stewardship expenses to the statutory grouping of gross
income: $540,000 ×
[($3,000,000 + $500,000 +
$1,500,000)/$9,000,000] ..
Apportionment of supervisory expenses to the residual grouping of gross
income: $540,000 ×
[$4,000,000/9,000,000] ....
Total: Apportioned
stewardship expense
*
*
*
*
$300,000
240,000
540,000
*
Example 30. Income Taxes. (i) (A) Facts.
As in Example 17 of this paragraph, X is a
domestic corporation that wholly owns M, N,
and O, also domestic corporations. X, M, N,
and O file a consolidated income tax return.
All the income of X and O is from sources
within the United States, all of M’s income
is general limitation income from sources
within South America, and all of N’s income
is general limitation income from sources
within Africa. X receives no dividends from
M, N, or O. During the taxable year, the
consolidated group of corporations earned
consolidated gross income of $550,000 and
incurred total deductions of $370,000. X has
gross income of $100,000 and deductions of
$50,000, without regard to its deduction for
state income tax. Of the $50,000 of
deductions incurred by X, $15,000 relates to
X’s ownership of M; $10,000 relates to X’s
ownership of N; $5,000 relates to X’s
ownership of O; and the entire $30,000
constitutes stewardship expenses. The
remainder of X’s $20,000 of deductions
(which is assumed not to include state
income tax) relates to production of U.S.
source income from its plant in the United
States. M has gross income of $250,000 and
deductions of $100,000, which yield foreignsource general limitation taxable income of
$150,000. N has gross income of $150,000
and deductions of $200,000, which yield a
foreign-source general limitation loss of
$50,000. O has gross income of $50,000 and
deductions of $20,000, which yield U.S.
source taxable income of $30,000.
(B) Unlike Example 17 of this paragraph
(g), however, X also has a deduction of
$1,800 for state A income taxes. X’s state A
taxable income is computed by first making
adjustments to the Federal taxable income of
X to derive apportionable taxable income for
state A tax purposes. An analysis of state A
law indicates that state A law also includes
in its definition of the taxable business
income of X which is apportionable to X’s
state A activities, the taxable income of M,
N, and O, which is related to X’s business.
As in Example 25, the amount of
apportionable taxable income attributable to
business activities conducted in state A is
PO 00000
Frm 00053
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44517
determined by multiplying apportionable
taxable income by a fraction (the ‘‘state
apportionment fraction’’) that compares the
relative amounts of payroll, property, and
sales within state A with worldwide payroll,
property, and sales. Assuming that X’s
apportionable taxable income equals
$180,000, $100,000 of which is from sources
without the United States, and $80,000 is
from sources within the United States, and
that the state apportionment fraction is equal
to 10 percent, X has state A taxable income
of $18,000. The state A income tax of $1,800
is then derived by applying the state A
income tax rate of 10 percent to the $18,000
of state A taxable income.
(C)
(i) Allocation and apportionment. Assume
that under Example 29, it is determined that
X’s deduction for state A income tax is
definitely related to a class of gross income
consisting of income from sources both
within and without the United States, and
that the state A tax is apportioned $1,000 to
sources without the United States, and $800
to sources within the United States. Under
Example 17, without regard to the deduction
for X’s state A income tax, X has a separate
loss of ($25,000) from sources without the
United States. After taking into account the
deduction for state A income tax, X’s
separate loss from sources without the
United States is increased by the $1,000 state
A tax apportioned to sources without the
United States, and equals a loss of ($26,000),
for purposes of computing the numerator of
the consolidated general limitation foreign
tax credit limitation.
(h) Effective dates—(1) In general. In
general, the rules of this section, as well
as the rules of §§ 1.861–9T, 1.861–10T,
1.861–11T, 1.861–12T, and 1.861–14T
apply for taxable years beginning after
December 31, 1986, except for
paragraphs (a)(5)(ii), (b)(3), (e)(4),
(f)(4)(i), paragraph (g) Example 17,
Example 18, and Example 30, and
paragraph (h) of this section, which are
generally applicable for taxable years
beginning after December 31, 2006.
However, see 1.861–8(e)(12)(iv) and
1.861–14(e)(6) for rules concerning the
allocation and apportionment of
deductions for charitable contributions.
In the case of corporate taxpayers,
transition rules set forth in 1.861–13T
provide for the gradual phase-in of
certain provisions of this and the
foregoing sections. However, the
following rules are effective for taxable
years commencing after December 31,
1988:
(i) Section 1.861–9T(b)(2) (concerning
the treatment of certain foreign
currency).
(ii) Section 1.861–9T(d)(2)
(concerning the treatment of interest
incurred by nonresident aliens).
(iii) Section 1.861–10T(b)(3)(ii)
(providing an operating costs test for
purposes of the nonrecourse
indebtedness exception).
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
44518
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
(iv) Section 1.861–10T(b)(6)
(concerning excess collaterilzation of
nonrecourse borrowings).
(2) In addition, 1.861–10T(e)
(concerning the treatment of related
controlled foreign corporation
indebtedness) is applicable for taxable
years commencing after December 31,
1987. For rules for taxable years
beginning before January 1, 1987, and
for later years to the extent permitted by
1.861–13T, see 1.861–8 (revised as of
April 1, 1986).
(3) Expiration date. The applicability
of the paragraphs (a)(5)(ii), (b)(3), (e)(4),
(f)(4)(i), paragraph (g) Example 17,
Example 18, and Example 30, and
paragraph (h) of this section, expires on
or before July 31, 2009.
I Par. 17. Section 1.6038A–3(a)(3) is
amended by revising paragraph (a)(3),
Example 4 to read:
§ 1.6038A–3
Record maintenance
(a)(1) through (3) Examples 1 through
3 [Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.6038A–3(a)(1) through (3) Examples
1 through 3.
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
Example 4. S, a U.S. reporting corporation,
provides computer consulting services for its
foreign parent, X. Based on the application of
section 482 and the regulations, it is
determined that the cost of services plus
method, as described in § 1.482–9T(e), will
provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result, based on the facts and
circumstances of the controlled transaction
between S and X. S is required to maintain
records to permit verification upon audit of
the comparable transactional costs (as
described in § 1.482–9T(e)(2)(iii)) used to
calculate the arm’s length price. Based on the
facts and circumstances, if it is determined
that X’s records are relevant to determine the
correct U.S. tax treatment of the controlled
transaction between S and X, the record
maintenance requirements under section
6038A(a) and this section will be applicable
to the records of X.
(b)(1) through (h) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.6038A–3T(b)(1)
through (h).
(i) Effective date—(1) In general. This
provision is generally applicable for
taxable years beginning after December
31, 2006.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of this section to
earlier taxable years in accordance with
the rules set forth in § 1.482–9T(n)(2).
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
§ 1.6662–6 Transactions between persons
described in section 482 and net section
482 transfer price adjustments.
*
Record maintenance.
(a) * * *
(3) * * *
Example 4. [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.6038A–3T, Example 4.
*
*
*
*
*
I Par. 18. Section 1.6038A–3T is added
to read as follows:
§ 1.6038A–3T
(temporary).
(3) Expiration date. The applicability
of this section expires on or before July
31, 2009.
I Par. 19. Section 1.6662–6 is amended
as follows:
I 1. Paragraphs (d)(2)(ii)(A) through
(d)(2)(ii)(G) are redesignated as
paragraphs (d)(2)(ii)(A)(1) through
(d)(2)(ii)(A)(7) and paragraph (d)(2)(ii)
introductory text as paragraph
(d)(2)(ii)(A), respectively.
I 2. A new paragraph (d)(2)(ii)(B) is
added.
I 3. Paragraphs (d)(2)(iii)(B)(4) and
(d)(2)(iii)(B)(6) are revised
I 4. Paragraph (g) is revised.
The additions and revisions read as
follows:
*
*
*
*
(d) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
(B) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.6662–6T(d)(2)(ii)(B).
*
*
*
*
*
(iii) * * *
(B) * * *
(4) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.6662–6T(d)(2)(iii)(B)(4).
*
*
*
*
*
(6) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.6662–6T(d)(2)(iii)(B)(6).
*
*
*
*
*
(g) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.6662–6T(g).
I Par. 20. Section 1.6662–6T is added to
read as follows:
§ 1.6662–6T Transactions between parties
described in section 482 and net section
482 transfer price adjustments (temporary).
(a) through (d)(2)(ii)(A) [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.6662–6(a)
through (d)(2)(ii)(A).
(d)(2)(ii)(B) Services cost method. A
taxpayer’s selection of the services cost
method for certain services, described in
§ 1.482–9T(b), and its application of that
method to a controlled services
transaction will be considered
reasonable for purposes of the specified
method requirement only if the taxpayer
reasonably allocated and apportioned
costs in accordance with § 1.482–9T(k),
reasonably concluded that the
controlled services transaction meets
the conditions of § 1.482–9T(b)(3), and
reasonably concluded that the
controlled services transaction is not
described in paragraph § 1.482–9T(b)(2).
Whether the taxpayer’s conclusion was
reasonable must be determined from all
the facts and circumstances. The factors
relevant to this determination include
PO 00000
Frm 00054
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
those described in paragraph
(d)(2)(ii)(A) of this section, to the extent
applicable.
(d)(2)(iii)(A) through (d)(2)(iii)(B)(3)
[Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.6662–6(d)(2)(iii)(A) through
(d)(2)(iii)(B)(3).
(d)(2)(iii)(B)(4) A description of the
method selected and an explanation of
why that method was selected,
including an evaluation of whether the
regulatory conditions and requirements
for application of that method, if any,
were met;
(d)(2)(iii)(B)(5) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.6662–6(d)(2)(iii)(B)(5).
(d)(2)(iii)(B)(6) A description of the
controlled transactions (including the
terms of sale) and any internal data used
to analyze those transactions. For
example, if a profit split method is
applied, the documentation must
include a schedule providing the total
income, costs, and assets (with
adjustments for different accounting
practices and currencies) for each
controlled taxpayer participating in the
relevant business activity and detailing
the allocations of such items to that
activity. Similarly, if a cost-based
method (such as the cost plus method,
the services cost method for certain
services, or a comparable profits method
with a cost-based profit level indicator)
is applied, the documentation must
include a description of the manner in
which relevant costs are determined and
are allocated and apportioned to the
relevant controlled transaction.
(d)(2)(iii)(B)(7) through (f) [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.6662–
6(d)(2)(iii)(B)(7) through (f).
(g) Effective date—(1) This section is
generally effective February 9, 1996.
However, taxpayers may elect to apply
this section to all open taxable years
beginning after December 31, 1993.
(2)(i) The provisions of paragraphs
(d)(2)(ii)(B), (d)(2)(iii)(B)(4) and
(d)(2)(iii)(B)(6) of this section are
applicable for taxable years beginning
after December 31, 2006.
(ii) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of this section to
earlier taxable years in accordance with
the rules set forth in § 1.482–9T(n)(2) of
this chapter.
(iii) Expiration date. The applicability
of § 1.6662–6T expires on or before July
31, 2009.
PART 31—EMPLOYMENT TAXES AND
COLLECTION OF INCOME TAX AT THE
SOURCE
Par. 21. The authority citation for part
31 continues to read as follows:
I
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules and Regulations
Par. 22. Section 31.3121(s)–1 is
amended by revising paragraphs
(c)(2)(iii) and (d) to read as follows:
I
§ 31.3121(s)–1 Concurrent employment by
related corporations with common
paymaster.
*
*
*
*
*
(c) * * *
(2) * * *
(iii) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 31.3121(s)–1T(c)(2)(iii).
*
*
*
*
*
(d) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 31.3121(s)–1T(d).
I Par. 23. Section 31.3121(s)–1T is
added to read as follows:
§ 31.3121(s)–1T Concurrent employment
by related corporations with common
paymaster (temporary).
jlentini on PROD1PC65 with RULES3
(a) through (c)(2)(ii) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 31.3121(s)–1(a)
through (c)(2)(ii).
(c)(2)(iii) Group-wide allocation rules.
Under the group-wide method of
allocation, the district director may
VerDate Aug<31>2005
22:36 Aug 03, 2006
Jkt 208001
allocate the taxes imposed by sections
3102 and 3111 in an appropriate
manner to a related corporation that
remunerates an employee through a
common paymaster if the common
paymaster fails to remit the taxes to the
Internal Revenue Service. Allocation in
an appropriate manner varies according
to the circumstances. It may be based on
sales, property, corporate payroll, or any
other basis that reflects the distribution
of the services performed by the
employee, or a combination of the
foregoing bases. To the extent
practicable, the Commissioner may use
the principles of § 1.482–2(b) of this
chapter in making the allocations with
respect to wages paid after December 31,
1978, and on or before December 31,
2006. To the extent practicable, the
Commissioner may use the principles of
§ 1.482–9T of this chapter in making the
allocations with respect to wages paid
after December 31, 2006.
(d) Effective date—(1) In general. This
section is applicable with respect to
wages paid after December 31, 1978.
PO 00000
Frm 00055
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
44519
[§ 31.3121(s)–1]. The fourth sentence of
paragraph (c)(2)(iii) of this section is
applicable with respect to wages paid
after December 31, 1978, and on or
before December 31, 2006. The fifth
sentence of paragraph (c)(2)(iii) of this
section is applicable with respect to
wages paid after December 31, 2006.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the fifth sentence of paragraph
(c)(2)(iii) of this section to earlier
taxable years in accordance with the
rules set forth in § 1.482–9T(n)(2).
(3) The applicability of § 31.3121(s)–
1T expires on or before July 31, 2009.
Mark E. Matthews,
Deputy Commissioner for Services and
Enforcement.
Approved: July 11, 2006.
Eric Solomon,
Acting Deputy Assistant Secretary of the
Treasury.
[FR Doc. 06–6497 Filed 7–31–06; 4:40 pm]
BILLING CODE 4830–01–P
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Agencies
[Federal Register Volume 71, Number 150 (Friday, August 4, 2006)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 44466-44519]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Printing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 06-6497]
[[Page 44465]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Part V
Department of the Treasury
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Internal Revenue Service
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
26 CFR Parts 1 and 31
Treatment of Services Under Section 482; Allocation of Income and
Deductions From Intangibles; Stewardship Expense; Final Rule
Federal Register / Vol. 71, No. 150 / Friday, August 4, 2006 / Rules
and Regulations
[[Page 44466]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY
Internal Revenue Service
26 CFR Parts 1 and 31
[TD 9278]
RIN 1545-BB31, 1545-AY38, 1545-BC52
Treatment of Services Under Section 482; Allocation of Income and
Deductions From Intangibles; Stewardship Expense
AGENCY: Internal Revenue Service (IRS), Treasury.
ACTION: Final and temporary regulations.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This document contains final and temporary regulations that
provide guidance regarding the treatment of controlled services
transactions under section 482 and the allocation of income from
intangibles, in particular with respect to contributions by a
controlled party to the value of an intangible owned by another
controlled party. This document also contains final and temporary
regulations that modify the regulations under section 861 concerning
stewardship expenses to be consistent with the changes made to the
regulations under section 482. These final and temporary regulations
potentially affect controlled taxpayers within the meaning of section
482. They provide updated guidance necessary to reflect economic and
legal developments since the issuance of the current guidance.
DATES: Effective Date: These regulations are effective on January 1,
2007.
Applicability Dates: These regulations apply to taxable years
beginning after December 31, 2006.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Thomas A. Vidano, (202) 435-5265, or
Carol B. Tan, (202) 435-5265 for matters relating to section 482, or
David Bergkuist (202) 622-3850 for matters relating to stewardship
expenses (not toll-free numbers).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Background
Section 482 of the Internal Revenue Code generally provides that
the Secretary may allocate gross income, deductions and credits between
or among two or more taxpayers owned or controlled by the same
interests in order to prevent evasion of taxes or to clearly reflect
income of a controlled taxpayer. Regulations under section 482
published in the Federal Register (33 FR 5849) on April 16, 1968,
provided guidance with respect to a wide range of controlled
transactions, including transfers of tangible and intangible property
and the provision of services. Revised and updated transfer pricing
regulations were published in the Federal Register (59 FR 34971, 60 FR
65553 and 61 FR 21955) on July 8, 1994, December 20, 1995, and May 13,
1996. A notice of proposed rulemaking and notice of public hearing were
published in the Federal Register (68 FR 53448) on September 10, 2003.
A correction to the notice of proposed rulemaking and notice of public
hearing was published in the Federal Register (68 FR 70214) on December
17, 2003. A public hearing was held on January 14, 2004.
The Treasury Department and the IRS received a substantial volume
of comments on a wide range of issues addressed in the 2003 proposed
regulations. These comments were very helpful and substantial changes
have been incorporated in response. In order to achieve the goal of
updating the 1968 regulations, while facilitating consideration of
further public input in refining final rules, these regulations are
issued in temporary form with a delayed effective date for taxable
years beginning after December 31, 2006.
These regulations are issued a significant amount of time after
proposed revisions to the regulations pertaining to cost sharing
arrangements were issued. Commentators suggested that this type of
timing sequence was important so that each regulation could be assessed
properly. Commentators also suggested, among other things, that the
services regulations be reissued in temporary and proposed form. By
issuing these regulations in temporary and proposed form, the Treasury
Department and the IRS provide taxpayers an opportunity to submit
additional comments prior to the time these regulations become
effective, allowing commentators to consider the potential interaction
between these regulations and the cost sharing regulations.
Explanation of Provisions
A. Controlled Services
1. Services Cost Method--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9T(b)
a. The Simplified Cost Based Method and Public Comments
The 2003 proposed regulations set forth a simplified cost based
method (SCBM). The SCBM was intended to preserve the salutary aspects
of the current Sec. 1.482-2(b) cost safe harbor that provide
appropriately reduced administrative and compliance burdens for low
margin services. At the same time, the existing rules would be brought
more in line with the arm's length standard, and various problematic
features of those rules would be eliminated. The goal was to provide
certainty concerning the pricing of low margin services, thus allowing
the compliance efforts of both taxpayers and the IRS to concentrate on
those services for which a robust transfer pricing analysis is
particularly appropriate. The preamble to the 2003 proposed regulations
also indicated that in certain cases, the allocation or sharing among
group members of expenses or charges relating to corporate headquarters
or other centralized service activities may be consistent with the
proposed regulations, but no further guidance was provided on such
service sharing arrangements.
A number of commentators argued that the SCBM was actually
counterproductive to its stated goals. These commentators contended
that to apply the SCBM, taxpayers would potentially need to expend
substantial sums to prepare comparability studies, perhaps separately
for each of the numerous categories of back office services. They
contended that, although taxpayers have in-depth knowledge concerning
their businesses and the relative value added by their back offices,
the SCBM called for quantitative judgments that business people are not
qualified to make by themselves, especially in the prevailing
compliance environment. As a matter of proper accountability, taxpayers
would be required as a practical matter to devote significant
compliance resources to enlist outside consultants or otherwise to
develop support for those judgments.
Commentators suggested a range of proposed alternatives to the SCBM
regime. One such proposal was simply to return to the approach in the
existing regulations under Sec. 1.482-2(b). The 1968 regulations are
fairly rudimentary in nature, particularly, in today's tax compliance
environment. In addition, those regulations were open to substantial
manipulation by taxpayers (both inbound and outbound). Moreover, there
have been extensive and far-reaching developments in the services
economy since the existing regulations were published in 1968, with
real prospects that many intragroup services have values significantly
in excess of their cost. As a result, in the course of considering
comments on the 2003 proposed regulations, the Treasury Department and
the IRS have concluded that it would not be appropriate simply to
readopt the standard in the 1968 regulations. Additional proposals by
commentators included development of
[[Page 44467]]
a list of activities that would qualify to be priced at cost or
detailed provisions regarding cost sharing arrangements for low value
services performed on a centralized basis, and other options.
The Treasury Department and the IRS may have decided not to return
to the 1968 regulations, but have nonetheless taken the full range of
comments on the 2003 proposed regulations seriously. Therefore, in
light of the extensive comments on these issues, the Treasury
Department and the IRS have substantially redesigned the relevant
provisions. The Treasury Department and the IRS recognize that the
section 482 services regulations potentially affect a large volume of
intragroup back office services that are common across many industries.
It is in the interest of good tax administration to minimize the
compliance burdens applicable to such services, especially to the
extent that the arm's length markups are low and the activities do not
significantly contribute to business success or failure.
Accordingly, based on the comments, these temporary regulations
eliminate the SCBM and replace it with the services cost method (SCM),
as set forth in Sec. 1.482-9T(b). The SCM evaluates whether the price
for covered services, as defined, is arm's length by reference to the
total services costs with no markup. Where the conditions on
application of the method are met, the SCM will be considered the best
method for purposes of Sec. 1.482-1(c).
b. Services Cost Method: Identification of Covered Services and Other
Eligibility Criteria
Section 1.482-9T(b)(4) provides for two categories of covered
services that are eligible for the SCM if the other conditions on
application of the method are met. If the conditions are satisfied,
covered services in each category may be charged at cost with no
markup. The first category consists of specified covered services
identified in a revenue procedure published by the IRS. This revenue
procedure approach is consistent with taxpayer comments. Services will
be identified in such revenue procedure based upon the determination of
the Treasury Department and the IRS that they constitute support
services of a type common across industry sectors and generally do not
involve a significant arm's length markup on total services costs.
Because the government performs the analysis necessary to determine the
eligibility of specified covered services, the compliance burden that
was previously imposed by the SCBM is eliminated for a broad class of
commonly provided services.
An initial proposed list of specified covered services is contained
in an Announcement being published contemporaneously with these
temporary regulations. This Announcement will be published in the
Internal Revenue Bulletin. For copies of the Internal Revenue Bulletin,
see Sec. 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b). The Treasury Department and the IRS
solicit public input on whether the list of services sufficiently
covers the full range of back office services typical within
multinational groups, on the descriptions provided for these covered
services, and on other matters related to the Announcement. It is
contemplated that a final revenue procedure, reflecting appropriate
comments, will be issued to coincide with the effective date of the
temporary regulations for taxable years beginning after December 31,
2006. In the future, particular services may be added to, clarified in,
or deleted from the list, depending on ongoing developments.
The second category of covered services is certain low margin
covered services. Taxpayers objected to the requirement under the SCBM
that all services qualify for that method based on a quantitative
analysis, but based on comments the Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that controlled taxpayers might nonetheless want the discretion
to show that particular services--not otherwise covered by the revenue
procedure--qualify for the SCM, using a modified quantitative approach.
Low margin covered services consist of services for which the median
comparable arm's length markup on total services costs is less than or
equal to seven percent. As under the SCBM, the median comparable arm's
length markup on total services costs means the excess of the arm's
length price of the controlled services transaction over total services
costs, expressed as a percentage of total services costs. For this
purpose, the arm's length price is determined under the general
transfer pricing rules without regard to the SCM, using the
interquartile range (including any adjustment to the median in the case
of results outside such range). Again, if the markup on costs for
eligible services is seven percent or less, this category of services
can be charged out at cost with no markup.
Under Sec. 1.482-9T(b)(2), specified covered services or low
margin covered services otherwise eligible for the SCM will qualify for
the method if the taxpayer reasonably concludes in its business
judgment that the services do not contribute significantly to key
competitive advantages, core capabilities, or fundamental chances of
success or failure in one or more trades or businesses of the renderer,
the recipient, or both. Unlike the quantitative judgment called for
under the SCBM, this is a business judgment preeminently within the
business person's own expertise. Exact precision is not needed and it
is expected that the taxpayer's judgment will be accepted in most
cases. This condition is intended to focus transfer pricing compliance
resources of both taxpayers and the IRS principally on significant
valuation issues. Thus, it is anticipated that in most cases the
examination of relevant services will focus only on verification of
total services costs and their appropriate allocation. These are issues
even under the 1968 regulations. There will be little need in all but
the most unusual cases to challenge the taxpayer's reasonable business
judgment in concluding that such typical back office services do not
contribute significantly to fundamental risks of success or failure.
The condition effectively is reserved to allow the IRS to reject any
attempt to claim that a core competency of the taxpayer's business
qualifies as a mere back office service. For illustrations of the role
performed by this condition, see the contrasting pairs of Example 1 and
Example 2, Example 3 and Example 4, Example 5 and Example 6, Example 8
and Example 9, Example 10 and Example 11, and Example 12 and Example 13
in Sec. 1.482-9T(b)(6).
As indicated in this preamble, it is expected that in all but
unusual cases, the taxpayer's business judgment will be respected. In
evaluating the reasonableness of the taxpayer's conclusion, the
Commissioner will consider all the relevant facts and circumstances.
This provision avoids the need to exclude from the SCM certain back
office services that as a general matter and across a range of industry
sectors are low margin, but that in the context of a particular
business nonetheless constitute high margin services. That is, it
permits the Treasury Department and the IRS to include a greater range
of service categories under the SCM, even though in specific
circumstances an otherwise covered service of a particular taxpayer
will be ineligible.
In addition, under Sec. 1.482-9T(b)(3)(i), a single procedural
requirement applies under the SCM. The taxpayer must maintain
documentation of covered services costs and their allocation. The
documentation must include a statement evidencing the taxpayer's
intention to apply the SCM.
In Sec. 1.482-9T(b)(3)(ii), the SCM preserves the same list of
categories of
[[Page 44468]]
controlled transactions that are not eligible to be priced under the
method as under the SCBM. The Treasury Department and the IRS continue
to believe that these transactions tend to be high margin transactions,
transactions for which total services costs constitute an inappropriate
reference point, or other types of transactions that should be subject
to a more robust arm's length analysis under the general section 482
rules. Comments are requested in this regard in light of the other
substantial changes made in the regulations.
Consistent with the purpose of providing for appropriately reduced
compliance burdens for services subject to the SCM, the temporary
regulations retain provisions in Sec. 1.6662-6T(d)(2) similar to those
associated with the SCBM.
c. Shared Services Arrangements
Section 1.482-9T(b)(5) of the temporary regulations provides
explicit guidance on shared services arrangements (SSAs). In general,
an SSA must include two or more participants; must include as
participants all controlled taxpayers that benefit from one or more
covered services subject to the SSA; and must be structured such that
each covered service (or group of covered services) confers a benefit
on at least one participant. A participant is a controlled taxpayer
that reasonably anticipates benefits from covered services subject to
the SSA and that substantially complies with the SSA requirements.
Under an SSA, the arm's length charge to each participant is the
portion of the total costs of the services otherwise determined under
the SCM that is properly allocated to such participant under the
arrangement. For purposes of an SSA, two or more covered services may
be aggregated, provided that the aggregation is reasonable based on the
facts and circumstances, including whether it reasonably reflects the
relative magnitude of the benefits that the participants reasonably
anticipate from the services in question. Such aggregation may, but
need not, correspond to the aggregation used in applying other
provisions of the SCM. If the taxpayer reasonably concludes that the
SSA (including any aggregation for purposes of the SSA) results in an
allocation of the costs of covered services that provides the most
reliable measure of the participants' respective shares of the
reasonably anticipated benefits from those services, then the
Commissioner may not adjust such allocation basis.
In addition, as a procedural matter, the taxpayer must maintain
documentation concerning the SSA, including a statement that it intends
to apply the SCM under the SSA and information on the participants, the
allocation basis, and grouping of services for purposes of the SSA.
Guidance is also provided on the coordination of cost allocations under
an SSA and cost allocations under a qualified cost sharing arrangement.
d. Deleted Provisions
The SCM is considerably streamlined as compared to the SCBM. Upon
further consideration, and in light of public comments, many of the
conditions, contractual requirements, quantitative screens, and other
technicalities associated with the SCBM have been eliminated. The
Treasury Department and the IRS believe this streamlined approach
serves the interests of both the government and taxpayers by reducing
complexity and administrative burden.
2. Comparable Uncontrolled Services Price Method--Temp. Treas. Reg.
Sec. 1.482-9T(c)
The 2003 proposed regulations set forth the comparable uncontrolled
services price (CUSP) method. This method evaluated whether the
consideration in a controlled services transaction is arm's length by
comparison to the price charged in a comparable uncontrolled services
transaction. This method was closely analogous to the comparable
uncontrolled price (CUP) method in existing Sec. 1.482-3(b).
One commentator objected to the statement in Sec. 1.482-9(b)(1) of
the 2003 proposed regulations that, to be evaluated under the CUSP
method, a controlled service ordinarily needed to be ``identical to or
have a high degree of similarity'' to the uncontrolled comparable
transactions. The commentator viewed the comparability analysis in the
examples in proposed Sec. 1.482-9(b)(4) as more consistent with the
standard in existing Sec. 1.482-3(b)(2)(ii)(A). The Treasury
Department and the IRS agree that the comparability standards under the
CUSP method for services should run parallel to those under the CUP
method for sales of tangible property. Indeed, the provisions are
parallel. The commentator misconstrues the purpose of the quoted
provision.
Although the provision contains general guidance on situations in
which the method ordinarily applies, it is not intended to and does not
alter the substantive comparability standards. Just like the CUP
method, the standards under the CUSP method emphasize the relative
similarity of the controlled services to the uncontrolled transaction
and the presence or absence of nonroutine intangibles. Section 1.482-
9T(c)(2)(ii) of the temporary regulations also provides, consistent
with the best method rule, that the CUSP method generally provides the
most direct and reliable measure of an arm's length result if the
uncontrolled transaction either has no differences from the controlled
services transaction or has only minor differences that have a definite
and reasonably ascertainable effect on price, and appropriate
adjustments may be made for such differences. If such adjustments
cannot be made, or if there are more than minor differences between the
controlled and uncontrolled transactions, the comparable uncontrolled
services price method may be used, but the reliability of the results
as a measure of the arm's length price will be reduced. Further, if
there are material differences for which reliable adjustments cannot be
made, this method ordinarily will not provide a reliable measure of an
arm's length result.
The CUSP provisions in these temporary regulations are
substantially similar to the corresponding provisions in the 2003
proposed regulations.
3. Gross Services Margin Method--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9T(d)
The 2003 proposed regulations provided for a gross services margin
method, which evaluated the amount charged in a controlled services
transaction by reference to the gross services profit margin in
uncontrolled transactions that involve similar services. The method was
analogous to the resale price method for transfers of tangible property
in existing Sec. 1.482-3(c).
Under the 2003 proposed regulations, this method would ordinarily
be used where a controlled taxpayer performs activities in connection
with a ``related uncontrolled transaction'' between a member of the
controlled group and an uncontrolled taxpayer. For example, the method
may be used where a controlled taxpayer renders services to another
member of the controlled group in connection with a transaction between
that other member and an uncontrolled party (agent services), or where
a controlled taxpayer contracts to provide services to an uncontrolled
taxpayer and another member of the controlled group actually performs
the services (intermediary function).
The 2003 proposed regulations defined the terms ``related
uncontrolled transaction,'' ``applicable uncontrolled
[[Page 44469]]
price,'' and ``appropriate gross services profit''. A ``related
uncontrolled transaction'' is a transaction between a member of the
controlled group and an uncontrolled taxpayer for which a controlled
taxpayer performs either agent services or an intermediary function.
The ``applicable uncontrolled price'' is the sales price paid by the
uncontrolled party in the related uncontrolled transaction. The
``appropriate gross services profit'' is the product of the applicable
uncontrolled price and the gross services profit margin in comparable
uncontrolled services transactions. The gross services profit margin
takes into account all functions performed by other members of the
controlled group and any other relevant factors.
One commentator mistakenly interpreted the term ``related
uncontrolled transaction'' to suggest that the comparable transaction
under this method is one that takes place between controlled parties.
While this was not intended, the Treasury Department and the IRS agree
that the nomenclature is potentially confusing, and as a result, these
regulations substitute the term ``relevant uncontrolled transaction''
in lieu of ``related uncontrolled transaction'' wherever that appeared.
In other respects, the gross services margin provisions in these
temporary regulations are substantially similar to the provisions in
the 2003 proposed regulations.
4. Cost of Services Plus Method--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9T(e)
The 2003 proposed regulations set forth the cost of services plus
method. This method evaluated the amount charged in a controlled
services transaction by reference to the gross services profit markup
in comparable uncontrolled services transactions. The gross services
profit is determined by reference to the markup as a percentage of
comparable transactional costs in comparable uncontrolled transactions.
This method would ordinarily apply where the renderer of controlled
services provides the same or similar services to both controlled and
uncontrolled parties. In general, those are the only circumstances in
which a controlled taxpayer would likely have the detailed information
concerning comparable transactional costs necessary to apply this
method reliably.
The cost of services plus method in the 2003 proposed regulations
was generally analogous to the cost plus method for transfers of
tangible property in existing Sec. 1.482-3(d). The method implicitly
recognized that financial accounting standards applicable to services
have not developed to the same degree as the standards applicable to
other categories of transactions, such as manufacturing or distribution
of tangible property. For that reason, the method adopted the concept
of ``comparable transactional costs,'' which the 2003 proposed
regulations defined as all costs of providing the services taken into
account in determining the gross services profit markup in comparable
uncontrolled services transactions. In this context, comparable
uncontrolled transactions could be either services transactions between
the controlled taxpayer and uncontrolled parties (internal
comparables), or services transactions between two uncontrolled parties
(external comparables).
The 2003 proposed regulations also recognized that comparable
transactional costs could be a subset of total services costs.
Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) or Federal income tax
accounting rules (if income tax data for comparable uncontrolled
transactions are available) could provide an appropriate platform for
analysis under this provision, but neither is necessarily conclusive.
Commentators objected that the concept of comparable transactional
costs was imprecise, and they suggested that such costs should in any
event include only the direct costs associated with providing a
particular service, as determined under GAAP or Federal income tax
accounting rules. As noted above, the financial accounting standards
for services transactions are not as precise as the standards
applicable to other types of transactions. The relative lack of
uniformity in turn makes it impractical to derive a single definition
of cost that would apply generally to controlled services transactions.
Comparable transactional costs may potentially include direct and
indirect costs, if such costs are included in the internal or external
uncontrolled transactions that form the basis for comparison. Section
1.482-9T(e)(4) Example 1 has been modified to clarify this concept.
Several commentators objected to Sec. 1.482-9(d)(3)(ii)(A) of the
2003 proposed regulations. In their view, this provision required the
results obtained under the cost of services plus method to be confirmed
by means of a separate analysis under the comparable profits method
(CPM) for services. If a confirming analysis under the CPM for services
were required in all cases, commentators reasoned, the cost of services
plus method could not be viewed as a specified method in its own right.
The Treasury Department and the IRS agree and clarify that the
intent of the rules is not to require confirmation of the results under
the cost of services plus method. In response to public comments, Sec.
1.482-9T(e)(3)(ii)(A) of these temporary regulations incorporates
several changes. First, restatement of the price under this method in
the form of a markup on total costs of the controlled taxpayer is
necessary only if the cost of services plus method utilizes external
comparables. If internal comparables are used, this calculation need
not be performed. Second, in situations where the price is restated,
the sole purpose is to determine whether it is necessary to perform
additional evaluation of functional comparability.
For example, if the price under the cost of services plus method,
when restated, indicates a markup on the renderer's total services
costs that is either low or negative, this may indicate differences in
functions that have not been accounted for under the traditional
comparability factors. A low or negative markup suggests the need for
additional inquiry, the outcome of which may suggest that the cost of
services plus method is not the most reliable measure of an arm's
length result under the best method rule. Conforming changes have been
made in Sec. 1.482-9T(e)(4) Example 3 of these temporary regulations.
5. Comparable Profits Method for Services--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec.
1.482-9T(f)
The 2003 proposed regulations provided for a Comparable Profits
Method (CPM) for services, which was similar to the CPM in existing
Sec. 1.482-5. In general, the CPM for services evaluated whether the
amount charged in a controlled services transaction is arm's length by
reference to objective measures of profitability (profit level
indicators or PLIs) derived from financial information regarding
uncontrolled taxpayers that engage in similar services transactions
under similar circumstances. The CPM for services applied only where
the renderer of controlled services is the tested party.
Section 1.482-9(e) of the 2003 proposed regulations provided that
the profit level indicators (PLIs) provided for in existing Sec.
1.482-5(b)(4)(ii) may also be used under the CPM for services. The
relative lack of uniformity in financial accounting standards for
services, combined with potentially incomplete information regarding
the cost accounting practices of the
[[Page 44470]]
uncontrolled comparables, strongly suggest that PLIs that require
accurate segmentation of costs may have limited reliability.
The 2003 proposed regulations stated that the degree of consistency
in accounting practices between the controlled services transaction and
the uncontrolled services transaction might affect the reliability of
the results under the CPM for services. If appropriate adjustments to
account for such differences are not possible, the reliability of the
results under this method will be reduced.
Section 1.482-9(e)(2)(ii) of the 2003 proposed regulations provided
for a new profit level indicator that may be particularly useful for
controlled services transactions: the ratio of operating profits to
total services costs, or the markup on total costs (also referred to as
the ``net cost plus''). Because this profit level indicator evaluates
operating profits by reference to the markup on all costs related to
the provision of services, it is more likely to use a cost base of the
tested party that is comparable to the cost base used by uncontrolled
parties in performing similar business activities.
The Treasury Department and the IRS received a number of comments
concerning the CPM for services. Commentators questioned whether the
definition of ``total services costs,'' which provides the net cost
plus cost base under the CPM for services, included stock-based
compensation. In response to these comments, the Treasury Department
and the IRS clarify their intent that Sec. 1.482-5(c)(2)(iv) of the
existing regulations apply to the CPM for services. Accordingly, new
Example 3, Example 4, Example 5, and Example 6 are included in Sec.
1.482-9T(f)(3) of these temporary regulations. These examples show the
application of existing Sec. 1.482-5(c)(2)(iv) to fact patterns that
involve differences in the utilization of or accounting for stock-based
compensation in the context of controlled services transactions.
One commentator expressed reservations concerning a statement in
the preamble to the 2003 proposed regulations, which indicated that
PLIs based on return on capital or assets might be unreliable for
controlled services because the reliability of these PLIs decreases as
operating assets play a less prominent role in generating operating
profits. This commentator contended that such PLIs are reliable for all
firms, including service providers. The Treasury Department and the IRS
clarify that, although return on capital PLIs may produce reliable
results in the case of certain service providers, in general, such PLIs
are subject to the general reservation in existing Sec. 1.482-
5(b)(4)(i) to the effect that the reliability of such PLIs increases as
operating assets play a greater role in general operating profits.
Aside from the addition of the examples described above, the CPM
for services provisions in these temporary regulations are
substantially similar to the provisions in the 2003 proposed
regulations.
6. Profit Split Method--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. Sec. 1.482-9T(g) and
1.482-6T(c)(3)(i)(B)
The 2003 proposed regulations provided additional guidance
concerning application of the comparable profit split and the residual
profit split methods to controlled services transactions. Generally,
these methods evaluated whether the allocation of the combined
operating profit or loss attributable to one or more controlled
transactions is arm's length by reference to the relative value of each
controlled taxpayer's contributions to the combined operating profit or
loss.
The 2003 proposed regulations provided that the guidance regarding
the profit split methods in existing Sec. 1.482-6, as amended by
proposed Sec. 1.482-6(c)(3)(i)(B) and by other changes, applied to
controlled services transactions. Section 1.482-9(g) of the 2003
proposed regulations also provided specific additional guidance
concerning application of existing Sec. 1.482-6, as amended, to
controlled services transactions.
The Treasury Department and the IRS received numerous comments on
the profit split method. Commentators objected in particular to
references in the 2003 proposed regulations to ``interrelated''
transactions in Sec. 1.482-6(c)(3)(i)(B)(1), and to ``high-value
services'' and ``highly integrated transactions'' in Sec. 1.482-
9(g)(1). Commentators viewed these terms as vague and subjective.
Commentators also sought more specific guidance concerning the
circumstances in which the residual profit split method would
constitute the best method under the principles of existing Sec.
1.482-1(c). In addition, some commentators suggested that one hallmark
of a nonroutine contribution in the context of controlled services is
that the renderer bears substantial risks. Another commentator
suggested that the arm's length compensation for a function performed
by an employee or group of employees should not in any event be
evaluated under a profit split method. In this commentator's view, such
an activity should be classified as routine because the market return
for the function is equivalent to the total compensation paid to the
employees. Commentators also raised several objections to the factual
assumptions in the proposed analysis concerning Sec. 1.482-9(g)(2)
Example 2 of the 2003 proposed regulations.
The Treasury Department and the IRS agreed with a number of
comments and, as a result, have made substantial changes to these
provisions. Under these temporary regulations, all references to
``interrelated'' transactions in Sec. 1.482-6(c)(3)(i)(B)(1), as well
as references to ``high-value services'' and ``highly integrated
transactions'' in Sec. 1.482-9(g)(1) have been eliminated. Section
1.482-9T(g)(1) now states that the profit split method is ``ordinarily
used in controlled services transactions involving a combination of
nonroutine contributions by multiple controlled taxpayers.'' This
change from the 2003 proposed regulations (which referred to ``high-
value'' or ``highly-integrated'' transactions), conforms to the changes
to Sec. 1.482-6T(c)(3)(i)(B)(1), as described below.
Section 1.482-6T(c)(3)(i)(B)(1) of these temporary regulations
defines a nonroutine contribution as ``a contribution that is not
accounted for as a routine contribution.'' In other words, a nonroutine
contribution is one for which the return cannot be determined by
reference to market benchmarks. Importantly, in this context, the term
``routine'' does not necessarily signify that a contribution is low
value. In fact, comparable uncontrolled transactions may indicate that
the returns to a routine contribution are very significant.
In response to the comments and in accordance with the revised
definition of nonroutine contribution in these temporary regulations,
the following references were eliminated as unnecessary: (1)
Contributions not fully accounted for by market returns; and (2)
contributions so interrelated with other transactions that they cannot
be reliably evaluated on a separate basis. These changes will bring
added clarity to the temporary regulations.
The Treasury Department and the IRS believe that these revised
provisions respond to the public comments and offer more specific
guidance concerning the circumstances in which the profit split method
would likely constitute the best method under existing Sec. 1.482-
1(c). In particular, the term ``high-value'' is not included in
temporary Sec. 1.482-9T(g)(1), thus eliminating any implication that
the profit split method is a ``default'' method for controlled services
that have value significantly in excess of cost. This shift in emphasis
is
[[Page 44471]]
also reflected in section B.2 of this preamble, which describes the
deletion of language from several examples that some believed suggested
that the residual profit split is a default method. The clear intent is
that no method, including the profit split, is a default method for
purposes of the best method rule. Rather, the profit split method
applies if a controlled services transaction has one or more material
elements for which it is not possible to determine a market-based
return. The Treasury Department and the IRS believe that the above
changes address the comments made and so do not believe that it is
necessary for the regulations to adopt alternative definitions of
nonroutine contribution put forward by commentators, such as
definitions based on the degree of risk borne by the renderer of
services or the extent to which an activity is performed solely by
employees of the taxpayer.
Finally, based on the public comments, and in light of the changes
described in this preamble, Sec. 1.482-9(g)(2) Example 2 of the 2003
proposed regulations has been withdrawn and replaced by a new example
that more effectively illustrates application of the profit split
method to nonroutine contributions by multiple controlled parties.
7. Unspecified Methods--Sec. 1.482-9T(h)
The 2003 proposed regulations provided that an unspecified method
may provide the most reliable measure of an arm's length result under
the best method rule. Such an unspecified method must take into account
that uncontrolled taxpayers compare the terms of a particular
transaction to the realistic alternatives to that transaction.
No significant comments were received concerning the unspecified
method provisions. Consistent with the general aim to coordinate the
analyses under the various sections of the regulations under section
482 so that economically similar transactions will be evaluated
similarly, however, Sec. 1.482-9T(h) has been modified to provide that
in applying an unspecified method to services, the realistic
alternatives to be considered include ``economically similar
transactions structured as other than services transactions.'' This
provision allows flexibility to consider non-services alternatives to a
services transaction, for example, a transfer or license of intangible
property, if such an approach provides the most reliable measure of an
arm's length result. The Treasury Department and the IRS are
considering similar changes to Sec. Sec. 1.482-3(e)(1) and 1.482-
4(d)(1) of the existing regulations. Public comments are requested
regarding the advisability of such changes and the form they should
take. Aside from this change, the unspecified method provisions in
these temporary regulations are substantially similar to the provisions
in the 2003 proposed regulations.
8. Contingent-Payment Contractual Terms--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-
9T(i)
The contingent-payment contractual term provisions in the 2003
proposed regulations built on the fundamental principle that, in
structuring controlled transactions, taxpayers are free to choose from
among a wide range of risk allocations. This provision in the 2003
proposed regulations also acknowledged that contingent-payment terms--
terms requiring compensation to be paid only if specified results are
obtained--may be particularly relevant in the context of controlled
services transactions. The 2003 proposed regulations provided detailed
guidance concerning contingent-payment contractual terms, including
economic substance considerations as well as documentation
requirements.
Under Sec. 1.482-9(i)(2) of the 2003 proposed regulations, a
contingent-payment arrangement was given effect if it met three basic
requirements: (1) The arrangement is contained in a written contract
executed prior to the start of the activity; (2) the contract makes
payment contingent on a future benefit directly related to the outcome
of the controlled services transaction; and (3) the contract provides
for payment on a basis that reflects the recipient's benefit from the
services rendered and the risks borne by the renderer.
Commentators generally supported the contingent-payment terms
provision as providing guidance concerning a contractual structure with
particular relevance to controlled services transactions. However, they
also raised three fundamental concerns regarding the scope and
operation of this provision. First, the commentators questioned whether
controlled taxpayers would need to identify uncontrolled comparables
for any contingent-payment terms that they seek to adopt. Second, they
pointed out that certain references to economic substance provisions
and documentation requirements were either unclear or duplicative of
provisions in existing Sec. 1.482-1(d)(3). Third, commentators
expressed concern that the IRS might improperly impute contingent-
payment terms as a means of addressing erroneous transfer pricing in
situations that do not involve lack of economic substance, for example,
non-arm's length pricing of activities such as marketing or research
and development.
The temporary regulations respond to each of these concerns. First,
under Sec. 1.482-9(i)(1) of the 2003 proposed regulations, one factor
that needed to be considered was whether an uncontrolled taxpayer would
have paid a contingent fee if it engaged in a similar transaction under
comparable circumstances. In response to comments, the temporary
regulations eliminate this requirement and instead emphasize the
importance of the economic substance principles under Sec. 1.482-
1(d)(3) of the existing regulations. That is, whether a particular
arrangement entered into by controlled parties has economic substance
is not determined by reference to whether it corresponds to
arrangements adopted by uncontrolled parties.
Second, in response to comments, the temporary regulations
eliminate duplicative or unnecessary references to the economic
substance rules. For example, Sec. 1.482-9T(i)(2)(ii) has been
modified to provide that the contingent-payment arrangement as a whole,
including both the contingency and the basis of payment, must be
consistent with economic substance, as evaluated under existing Sec.
1.482-1(d)(3)(ii)(B). This section eliminates the additional
requirement under the 2003 proposed regulations, that the arm's length
charge under a contingent-payment arrangement must be evaluated by
reference to economic substance principles.
Third, the temporary regulations respond to the concern identified
by commentators that the IRS might apply the contingent-payment
provisions in an inappropriate manner, for example, to correct
erroneous transfer pricing in prior taxable years that are not under
examination. As discussed in more detail in section C of this preamble,
the temporary regulations include an example to illustrate factual
circumstances in which contractual terms pertaining to risk allocations
(provided they are otherwise consistent with taxpayers' conduct and
arrangements) are fully respected, notwithstanding that on examination
the activities were determined to have been priced on a non-arm's
length basis. Other concerns, relating to interaction of the
contingent-payment terms provision with the commensurate with income
standard, are also addressed in section C of this preamble.
New Sec. 1.482-9T(i)(5) Example 3 illustrates the application of
these rules to a situation in which the contingency identified in a
contingent-payment
[[Page 44472]]
provision is not satisfied. The example responds to a request by
commentators for additional guidance to address such a factual
scenario.
9. Total Services Costs--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9T(j)
Section 1.482-9(j) of the 2003 proposed regulations defined ``total
services costs'' for purposes of the SCBM, the CPM for services, and
the cost of services plus method where the gross services profit was
restated in the form of a markup on total services costs.
Under the 2003 proposed regulations, total services costs included
all costs directly identified with provision of the controlled
services, as well as all other costs reasonably allocable to such
services under Sec. 1.482-9(k). The Treasury Department and the IRS
intended that, in this context, ``costs'' must comprise provision for
all resources expended, used, or made available to render the service.
Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) or Federal income tax
accounting rules may provide an appropriate analytic platform, but
neither would necessarily be conclusive in evaluating whether an item
must be included in total services costs. The issue of determining
total services costs is not a new one; it is relevant under the current
1968 regulations as well.
Commentators objected that Sec. 1.482-9(j) of the 2003 proposed
regulations failed to list the specific items that were included in
total services costs. Some commentators suggested that, absent more
precise guidance in this regard, controlled taxpayers should be
permitted to rely on the definition of costs applicable under GAAP or
Federal income tax principles. Commentators also requested
clarification whether total services costs included stock-based
compensation.
The Treasury Department and the IRS view the definition of total
services costs in the 2003 proposed regulations as having struck the
correct balance between specificity and flexibility. In general, the
accounting standards applicable to services do not provide a uniform
means of determining all costs that relate to the provision of
services. Consequently, the Treasury Department and the IRS conclude
that total services costs for purposes of section 482 cannot be
determined solely by reference to GAAP or other accounting standards or
practices.
In response to comments, however, Sec. 1.482-9T(j) of the
temporary regulations clarifies that all contributions in cash or in
kind (including stock-based compensation) are included in total
services costs. In addition, the third sentence of Sec. 1.482-9T(j)
states that ``costs for this purpose should comprise provision for all
resources expended, used, or made available to achieve the specific
objective for which the service is rendered.'' To better reflect, for
example, the inclusion of stock-based compensation in total services
costs, the term ``provision'' is adopted in place of the term
``consideration'' as used in the 2003 proposed regulations.
Commentators also observed that the definition of total services
costs in the 2003 proposed regulations did not address situations in
which the costs of a controlled service provider include significant
charges from uncontrolled parties. Commentators posited that such
third-party costs should be permitted to ``pass through,'' rather than
being subject to a markup under the transfer pricing method used to
analyze the controlled services transaction. The Treasury Department
and the IRS agree that these comments raised an issue that needs to be
addressed, but decided to do so in a manner different from that
suggested by the commentators. In response to this comment, the
temporary regulations add Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(4), which under certain
circumstances allows a controlled services transaction that involves
third-party costs to be evaluated on a disaggregated basis. See section
A.11.e of this preamble.
10. Allocation of Costs--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9T(k)
Section 1.482-9(k) of the 2003 proposed regulations retained the
flexible approach of existing Sec. 1.482-2(b)(3) through (6), which
permitted taxpayers to use any reasonable allocation and apportionment
of costs in determining an arm's length charge for services. In
evaluating whether the allocation used by the taxpayer is appropriate,
the 2003 proposed regulations required that consideration be given to
all bases and factors, including practices used by the taxpayer to
apportion costs for other (non-tax) purposes. Such practices, although
relevant, need not be given conclusive weight by the Commissioner in
evaluating the arms length charge for controlled services.
Commentators urged that any technique that a taxpayer uses to
allocate costs should be entitled to deference, provided it is
consistent with GAAP. For the reasons expressed above concerning Sec.
1.482-9T(j), GAAP may provide an appropriate analytic platform but is
not necessarily controlling in evaluating the arm's length charge for
controlled services.
In the case of administrative or support services, commentators
suggested that the Commissioner should accept any reasonable allocation
used by the taxpayer, for example, revenue, sales, or employee
headcount. In general, the cost of a service that provides benefits to
multiple parties must be allocated in a manner that reliably reflects
the proportional benefit received by each of those parties. This
standard is intended to be substantially equivalent to the standard in
Sec. 1.482-2(b)(2)(i) and 1.482-2(b)(6) of the existing regulations.
In response to comments, Sec. 1.482-9T(b)(5)(i)(B) of these temporary
regulations also provides rules whereby the costs of covered services
subject to a shared services arrangement are allocated to participants
in a manner that the taxpayer reasonably concludes will most reliably
reflect each participant's reasonably anticipated benefits from the
services. See section A.1.c of this preamble.
11. Controlled Services Transactions--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-
9T(l)
a. Definition of Activity--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(2)
Section 1.482-9(l) of the 2003 proposed regulations set forth a
threshold test for determining whether an activity constituted a
controlled services transaction subject to the general framework of
Sec. 1.482-9. The 2003 proposed regulations broadly defined a
controlled services transaction as any activity by a controlled
taxpayer that resulted in a benefit to one or more other controlled
taxpayers. An ``activity'' was in turn defined as the use by the
renderer, or the making available to the recipient, of any property or
other resources of the renderer.
One commentator interpreted this provision as indicating that any
activity properly analyzed under one or more other provisions of the
transfer pricing regulations should not be subject to Sec. 1.482-9 of
the 2003 proposed regulations. Other commentators suggested that the
``predominant character'' of a transaction should control whether it is
analyzed as a controlled service under Sec. 1.482-9 of the 2003
proposed regulations or under other provisions of the section 482
regulations.
Controlled taxpayers have a great deal of flexibility to structure
transactions in various ways that are economically equivalent. In some
cases, an overall transaction may include separate elements of
differing characters, for example, a transfer of tangible property
bundled together with the provision of
[[Page 44473]]
a service. The structure adopted may sometimes be more reliably
analyzed on either a disaggregated or an aggregated basis under the
relevant section of the section 482 regulations, for example, either as
a separate transfer of tangible property under the existing section 482
regulations in Sec. 1.482-3 and a separate controlled services
transaction under these temporary regulations in Sec. 1.482-9T, or as
an overall controlled services transaction under these temporary
regulations. To the extent that a controlled transaction is structured
so that it is most reliably evaluated as a controlled services
transaction, it will be analyzed as such. To the extent that multiple
elements of a single overall transaction potentially create an overlap
between the section 482 regulations applicable to other types of
transactions and these temporary regulations concerning controlled
services transactions, the Treasury Department and the IRS believe that
the appropriate coordination is achieved by applying the rules in Sec.
1.482-9T(m). See section A.12.a of this preamble.
b. Benefit Test--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(3)
Section 1.482-9(l)(3) of the 2003 proposed regulations provided
rules for determining whether an activity provides a benefit. Under
Sec. 1.482-9(l)(3)(i), a benefit is present if the activity directly
results in a reasonably identifiable increment of economic or
commercial value that enhances the recipient's commercial position, or
is reasonably anticipated to do so. Another requirement is that an
uncontrolled taxpayer in circumstances comparable to those of the
recipient would be willing to pay an uncontrolled party to perform the
same or a similar activity, or be willing to perform for itself the
same or similar activity. The 2003 proposed regulations thus made
significant changes to the benefit test under the existing regulations,
which is based on whether an uncontrolled party in the position of the
renderer would expect payment for a particular activity. The 2003
proposed regulations adopted the so-called ``specific benefit''
approach, which mandates an arm's length charge only if a particular
activity provides an identifiable benefit to a particular taxpayer. In
addition, Sec. 1.482-9(l)(3)(ii) of the 2003 proposed regulations
provided that no benefit is present if an activity has only indirect or
remote effects.
Commentators viewed the 2003 proposed regulations as providing
insufficient guidance concerning methods that controlled taxpayers
might use to allocate or share expenses or charges, in particular with
respect to centralized services performed on a centralized basis for
multiple affiliates.
In response to these comments, the temporary regulations authorize
the use of shared services arrangements for centralized services that
qualify for the SCM in Sec. 1.482-9T(b). By entering into such
arrangements, taxpayers can, among other things, reduce the burden
associated with analysis of centralized services, which would
presumably include activities that provide benefits on only an
occasional or intermittent basis. See section A.1.c of this preamble,
concerning shared services arrangements.
One commentator suggested that, because the benefit test in the
2003 proposed regulations focused on the recipient, the arm's length
charge should also be analyzed from the perspective of the recipient
and economic conditions in the recipient's geographic market. The
commentator misunderstands the application of the benefit test.
Although the benefit test focuses on the recipient, evaluation of the
arm's length charge under the best method rule in a particular case
(for example, under a profit split method) may require analysis of the
recipient, the renderer, or both (depending, for example, on which
party performs the simplest, most easily measurable functions).
c. Specific Applications of the Benefit Test--Temp Treas. Reg. Sec.
1.482-9T(l)(3)(ii) through (v)
The 2003 proposed regulations provided additional rules concerning
application of the benefit test to particular circumstances, such as
application to activities with indirect or remote effects, duplicative
activities, shareholder activities, and passive association. These
rules in the 2003 proposed regulations were substantially similar to
the rules in existing Sec. 1.482-2(b)(2). For example, Sec. 1.482-
9(l)(3)(ii) and (l)(3)(iii) provided that no benefit is present if an
activity has only indirect or remote effects or merely duplicates an
activity that the recipient has already performed on its own behalf.
Section 1.482-9(l)(3)(iv) provided that shareholder activities do not
confer a benefit on controlled parties and therefore do not give rise
to an arm's length charge. Shareholder activities were defined as
activities that primarily benefit the owner-member of a controlled
group in its capacity as owner, rather than other controlled parties.
In addition, Sec. 1.482-9(l)(3)(v) of the 2003 proposed
regulations provided that certain ``passive association'' effects do
not give rise to a benefit within the meaning of the regulations
concerning controlled services. Passive association was defined as an
increment of value that a controlled party obtains on account of its
membership in the controlled group. Section 1.482-9(l)(3)(v) of the
2003 proposed regulations provided, however, that membership in a
controlled group may be considered in evaluating comparability between
controlled and uncontrolled transactions.
Concerning indirect or remote effects, one commentator suggested
that if a centralized activity by a parent confers only occasional or
intermittent benefits on a subsidiary, such benefits should be
classified as indirect or remote. As to the shareholder provisions,
commentators noted that the 2003 proposed regulations failed to address
the potential that an activity that confers a reasonably identifiable
increment of value on a controlled party might also be appropriately
classified as a shareholder activity. As to the passive association
provisions, commentators questioned whether membership in a controlled
group is relevant to evaluation of comparability. Commentators raised
the concern that virtually any uncontrolled transaction could
potentially be considered unreliable, because it generally would not
reflect the same efficiencies and synergies as the controlled services
transaction.
Regarding the comments concerning indirect or remote effects, the
Treasury Department and the IRS believe that to equate occasional or
intermittent benefits in all cases with indirect or remote effects
would conflict with the specific-benefit rule. That rule requires that
any service that produces an identifiable and direct benefit warrants
an arm's length charge, even if the service is provided only
occasionally or intermittently. Accordingly, the temporary regulations
retain this provision without change.
In response to comments relating to shareholder activities, Sec.
1.482-9T(l)(3)(iv) of the temporary regulations refers to the ``sole
effect'' rather than the ``primary effect'' of an activity. This change
clarifies that a shareholder activity is one of which the sole effect
is either to protect the renderer's capital investment in one or more
members of the controlled group, or to facilitate compliance by the
renderer with reporting, legal, or regulatory requirements specifically
applicable to the renderer, or both. As modified, the definition in
temporary Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(3)(iv) now conforms to the general
[[Page 44474]]
definition of benefit in Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(3)(i).
In response to commentators' request for clarification regarding
the passive association rules, new Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(5) Example 19
illustrates a situation in which group membership would be taken into
account in evaluating comparability.
The Treasury Department and the IRS have inserted the word
``generally'' in the description of duplicative activities in Sec.
1.482-9T(l)(3)(iii). This change clarifies that although a duplicative
activity does not generally give rise to a benefit, under certain
circumstances, such an activity may provide an increment of value to
the recipient by reference to the general rule in Sec. 1.482-
9T(l)(3)(i). In such cases, the activity would be appropriately
classified as a controlled services transaction.
d. Guarantees, Including Financial Guarantees
The proposed regulations appear to have created confusion on the
part of some taxpayers regarding the appropriate characterization of
financial guarantees for tax purposes. The provision of a financial
guarantee does not constitute a service for purposes of determining the
source of the guarantee fees. See Centel Communications, Inc. v.
Commissioner, 920 F.2d 1335 (7th Cir. 1990); Bank of America v. United
States, 680 F.2d 142 (Ct. Cl. 1980). Nevertheless, some taxpayers have
suggested that guarantees are services that could qualify for the cost
safe harbor and that the provision of a guarantee has no cost. This
position would mean that in effect guarantees are uniformly non-
compensatory. The Treasury Department and the IRS do not agree with
this uniform no charge rule for guarantees. As a result, financial
transactions, including guarantees, are explicitly excluded from
eligibility for the SCM by Sec. 1.482-9T(b)(3)(ii)(H). However, no
inference is intended by this exclusion that financial transactions
(including guarantees) would otherwise be considered the provision of
services for transfer pricing purposes. The Treasury Department and the
IRS subsequently intend to issue transfer pricing guidance regarding
financial guarantees, in particular, along with other guidance
concerning the treatment of global dealing operations. See Section
A.12.e of this preamble for a discussion of coordination with global
dealing operations. Such guidance will also include rules to determine
the source of income from financial guarantees.
e. Third-Party Costs--Temp. Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(4)
Commentators observed that the definition of ``total services
costs'' in Sec. 1.482-9(j) of the 2003 proposed regulations did not
address situations in which the costs of a controlled service provider
included significant charges from uncontrolled parties. Commentators
claimed that such third-party costs should be treated as ``pass
through'' items that, in most cases, should not be subject to the
markup (if any) applicable to costs incurred by the renderer in its
capacity as service provider. This comment was potentially relevant to
all cost-based methods in Sec. 1.482-9 of the 2003 proposed
regulations. The Treasury Department and the IRS agreed that these
comments raised an issue that needed to be addressed, but decided to do
so in a manner different from that suggested by the commentators.
In response to this comment, these temporary regulations include a
new Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(4). Under this provision, if total services costs
include material third-party costs, the controlled services transaction
may be analyzed either as a single transaction or as two separate
transactions, depending on which approach provides the most reliable
measure of the arm's length result under the best method rule in
existing Sec. 1.482-1(c). Consistent with the best method rule, in
determining which approach provides the most reliable indication of the
arm's length result, the primary factors are the degree of
comparability between the controlled services transaction and the
uncontrolled comparables and the quality of the data and assumptions
used. New Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(5) Example 20 and Example 21 provide
illustrations of this rule.